Home

ZyXEL p-2612HNU-FX User's Manual

1. LABEL DESCRIPTION Class Configuration Active Select to enable or disable this classifier Class Name Enter a descriptive name of up to 32 printable English keyboard characters including spaces Classification Select an existing number for where you want to put this classifier to Order move the classifier to the number you selected after clicking Apply Select Last to put this rule in the back of the classifier list Forward to Select a WAN interface through which traffic of this class will be Interface forwarded out If you select Unchange the ZyXEL Device forward traffic of this class according to the default routing table DSCP Mark This field is available only when you select the Ether Type check box If you select Mark enter a DSCP value with which the ZyXEL Device replaces the DSCP field in the packets If you select Auto Mapping and there is a VLAN tag carried in the matched packets the ZyXEL Device will replace the IP ToS field with the 802 1p priority field If you select Unchange the ZyXEL Device keep the DSCP field in the packets 802 1p Mark Select a priority level with which the ZyXEL Device replaces the IEEE 802 1p priority field in the packets If you select Unchange the ZyXEL Device keep the 802 1p priority field in the packets VLAN ID If you select Remark enter a VLAN ID number between 1 and 4095 with which the ZyXEL Device replaces the VLAN ID of the frames If you select Remove the ZyXE
2. Packet Statistics Click this link to view port status and packet specific statistics See Section 4 4 on page 92 P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 4 Status Screens LABEL DESCRIPTION USB Status Type This shows the type of device connected to the ZyXEL Device Status This shows whether the device is currently active Up This shows N A if there are no device connected to the ZyXEL Device or the connected device is not working Registration Status Account This column displays each SIP account in the ZyXEL Device Action This field displays the current registration status of the SIP account You have to register SIP accounts with a SIP server to use VoIP If the SIP account is already registered with the SIP server e Click Unregister to delete the SIP account s registration in the SIP server This does not cancel your SIP account but it deletes the mapping between your SIP identity and your IP address or domain name e The second field displays Registered If the SIP account is not registered with the SIP server e Click Register to have the ZyXEL Device attempt to register the SIP account with the SIP server e The second field displays the reason the account is not registered Inactive The SIP account is not active You can activate it in VoIP gt SIP gt SIP Settings Register Fail The last time the ZyXEL Device tried to register the
3. Description one You can type up to 31 characters using alphanumeric characters _ and no spaces allowed Back Click this button to return to the previous screen Next Click this button to continue 5 3 1 3 WAN IP Address NAT and IGMP Proxy Click Next in the Network gt WAN gt Internet Connection Service Type screen There are three possible screens as follows PPPoE or PPPoA This screen displays when you select PPP over Ethernet PPPoE in the previous section for an Ethernet WAN interface For the DSL WAN interface this shows e If you set the DSL Link Type field in the Network gt WAN gt Layer 2 Interface screen to EoA and select PPP over Ethernet PPPoE in the previous section e If you set the DSL Link Type field in the Network gt WAN gt Layer 2 Interface screen to PPPOA and click Next in the previous section P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide 107 Chapter 5 WAN Setup Note Make sure you have the correct account information from your ISP or network administrator when configuring this screen Figure 22 Network gt WAN gt Internet Connection PPPoE or PPPoA PPP Username and Password PPP usually requires that you have a user name and password to establish your connection In the boxes below enter the user name and password that your ISP has provided to you PPP Username faamin PPP Password PPPoE Service Name Authentication Method AUTO z I Use Stat
4. 1 Open the ZyXEL utility and click the Profile tab to open the screen shown next Click Add to configure a new profile Profile Tito EE Profile Name Network Type Infrastructure g DEFAULT Network Mode 802 11b g Channel Auto Security DISABLE Connect Add Delete Edit 2 The Add New Profile screen appears The wireless client automatically searches for available wireless networks and displays them in the Scan Info box Click Scan if you want to search again You can also configure your profile for a wireless network that is not in the list Add New Profile Scan Info gt Profile Name PN_Example3 eH SSID a al gt SSID 551D_Example3 T CPE_5257_00 T CPE_5548_AP Network Type Me 55D_Examples Infrastructure Connect to an Access point T ald_zyxel C Ad Hoc Connect directly to other computers T ZyXEL xl Scan Select Next Exit 3 Give the profile a descriptive name of up to 32 printable ASCII characters Select I nfrastructure and either manually enter or select the AP s SSID in the Scan Info table and click Select P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorial 4 Choose the same encryption method as the AP to which you want to connect In this example WPA PSK Security Settings gt Encryption Type WPA PSK i Back Next Exit 5 This screen varies depending on the encryption method you selected in the previous screen Enter the pre shared
5. P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Appendix F Open Software Announcements 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSEARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLEFOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIALDAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY This Product includes libbase64 0 0 1 under the LGPL License GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2 1 February 1999 Copyright C 1991 1999 Free Software Foundation Inc 59 Temple Place Suite 330 Boston MA 02111 1307 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document but changing it is not allowed This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL It also counts as the successor of the GNU Lib
6. P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorial 11 Click Finish to close the wizard window Add Standard TCP IP Printer Port Wizard Completing the Add Standard TCP IP Printer Port Wizard You have selected a port with the following characteristics SNMP No Protocol LPR LP1 Device 192 168 1 1 Port Name IP_192 168 1 1 Adapter Type To complete this wizard click Finish i Cancel 12 Select the make of the printer that you want to connect to the print server in the Manufacturer list of printers 13 Select the printer model from the list of Printers 14 If your printer is not displayed in the list of Printers you can insert the printer driver installation CD disk or download the driver file to your computer click Have Disk and install the new printer driver 15 Click Next to continue Add Printer Wizard Install Printer Software The manufacturer and model determine which printer software to use A Select the manufacturer and model of your printer If your printer came with an installation disk click Have Disk If your printer is not listed consult your printer documentation for compatible printer software Manufacturer A Printers Fujitsu ES HP DeskJet 1200C PS a i EHP DeskJet 1220C enere Gestetner St HP DeskJet 1600C HP z SA HP DeskJet 1600CM PS aj g This driver is digitally signed Windows Update Have Disk Tell me why driver signing is important P 2612HN
7. Internal Start Port This is the first internal port number that identifies a service Internal End This is the last internal port number that identifies a service Port Server IP This is the server s IP address Address Protocol This shows the IP protocol supported by this virtual server whether it is TCP UDP or TCP UDP P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 8 Network Address Translation NAT Table 34 Network gt NAT gt Port Forwarding LABEL DESCRIPTION Modify Click the edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the port forwarding rule Click the delete icon to delete an existing port forwarding rule Note that subsequent address mapping rules move up by one when you take this action Apply Click this to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device Reset Click this to return to the previous configuration 8 2 2 The Port Forwarding Edit Screen This screen lets you create or edit a port forwarding rule Click the rule s Edit icon in the Port Forwarding screen to open the following screen Figure 46 Port Forwarding Edit Rule Setup M Active Service Name User Defined WAN Interface ipoe_1_1_1 gt Server IP Address 192 13 56 32 External Start Port External End Port Internal Start Port TTT Internal End Port Protocol Type TCP hed Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 35 Port Forwarding E
8. Refer to Section 22 1 2 on page 253 to read about configurations that disallow TFTP and FTP over WAN P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 22 Tools FTP and TFTP Firmware and Configuration File Uploads These examples show you how to upload firmware and configuration files Do not interrupt the file transfer process as this may PERMANENTLY DAMAGE your device FTP is the preferred method for uploading the firmware and configuration To use this feature your computer must have an FTP client The following sections give examples of how to upload the firmware and the configuration files FTP File Upload Command from the DOS Prompt Example 1 Launch the FTP client on your computer 2 Enter open followed by a space and the IP address of your device 3 Press ENTER when prompted for a username 4 Enter your password as requested the default is 1234 5 Enter bin to set transfer mode to binary 6 Enter cd fw to open the firmware subdirectory 7 Use put to transfer files from the computer to the device for example put firmware bin ras transfers the firmware on your computer firmware bin to the device and renames it ras Similarly put config rom rom 0 transfers the configuration file on your computer config rom to the device and renames it rom 0 Likewise get rom 0 config rom transfers the configuration file on the device to your computer and renames it confi
9. 1 Click K Menu gt Computer gt Administrator Settings YaST Figure 156 openSUSE 10 3 K Menu gt Computer Menu Seachs eR Applications gt Administrator Settings Install Software ea System Information A Home Folder A 2 My Documents ry Network Folders Prat System Folders 2 4G Media 2 0 GB available a Eavorites Applications Computer History Leave User zyxel on linux h20z openSUSE 2 When the Run as Root KDE su dialog opens enter the admin password and click OK Figure 157 openSUSE 10 3 K Menu gt Computer Menu Run as root KDE su Please enter the Administrator root password to continue Command sbin yast2 Password P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 3 When the YaST Control Center window opens select Network Devices and then click the Network Card icon Figure 158 openSUSE 10 3 YaST Control Center YaST Control Center linux h20z File Edit Help D Software A Network Services Novell AppArmor Q Security and Users gt Miscellaneous 4 When the Network Settings window opens click the Overview tab select the appropriate connection Name from the list and then click the Configure button Figure 159 openSUSE 10 3 Network Settings YaST2 linux h20z Network Card a Network Settings Overview Obtain an overview of installed network cards Global Optio
10. Table 76 SIP Call Signaling LOG MESSAGE DESCRIPTION SIP SIP SIP Call Signaling number port number Send SIP message to SIP server Content SIP Messag Send SIP Call Signaling SIP number port number SIP Receive SIP message from SIP server Content SIP Messag Received SIP Number DeRegister The listed SIP account s registation was deleted from the SIP register server SIP Number Register Success The listed SIP account was successfully registered with from the SIP register server Table 77 Phone Event LOG MESSAGE DESCRIPTION OF FHOOK The phone is off the hook ONHOOK The phone is on hook FLASH The user pressed the flash key on phone Dtmf c The user pressed the digit number on phone Table 78 VolP Miscellaneous LOG MESSAGE DESCRIPTION Call return User activated the phone feature redialled the last incoming call temp CLIP activated Activate one shot caller ID display temp CLIR activated Activate one shot caller ID hidden Enable Call waiting Activate call waiting Disable Call waiting Deactivate call waiting Call transfer Activate call transfer Enable CFU Activate call forwarding unconditional to the registered destination Disable CFU Deactivate call forwarding unconditional to the registered destination Enable CFNR Activate call forwardi
11. P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Appendix C Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions 5 Click OK to close the window Figure 170 Security Settings Java Security Settings Settings Disable Enable E Font download Disable Enable p Prompt 5 Microsoft YM 5 Java permissions custom Qora Jay High safety O Low safety m Reset custom settings j Reset to Medium x Reset ces JAVA Sun 1 From Internet Explorer click Tools I nternet Options and then the Advanced tab 2 Make sure that Use Java 2 for lt applet gt under Java Sun is selected P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Appendix C Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions 3 Click OK to close the window Figure 171 Java Sun General Security Privacy Content Connections Programs Advanced Settings O Use inline AutoComplete O Use Passive FTP for firewall and DSL modem compatibility Use smooth scrolling s HTTP 1 1 settings Use HTTP 1 1 O Use HTTP 1 1 through proxy connections amp Java Q J Use Java 2 v1 4 1_07 fr caplet bequres estat gt 2 1 4 1_0 for J Use Java 2 viA1_07 fr lt appleb emutes estat gt requires restart Ej Microso se Java ae enabled requires restart O Java logging enabled JIT compiler for virtual machine enabled requires restart Multimedia O Always show Internet Explorer 5 0 or later Radio toolbar O Don t display on
12. PHONE 2 P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide 277 Chapter 25 Troubleshooting In the next example phone port 1 is configured to use SIP account 1 and phone port 2 is configured to use SIP account 2 for incoming calls In this case every time you receive a call from your SIP account 1 the phone connected to phone port 1 rings Similarly every time you receive a call from your SIP account 2 phone port 2 rings To apply these configuration changes you need to configure the Analog Phone screen See Section 9 4 on page 169 Figure 110 Incoming Calls Individual Configuration PHONE 1 PHONE 2 SIP 2 25 7 USB Device Connection The ZyXEL Device fails to detect my USB device 1 Disconnect the USB device 2 Reboot the ZyXEL Device 3 If you are connecting a USB hard drive that comes with an external power supply make sure it is connected to an appropriate power source that is on 4 Re connect your USB device to the ZyXEL Device 278 P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Product Specifications The following tables summarize the ZyXEL Device s hardware and firmware features Hardware Specifications Table 85 Hardware Specifications Dimensions 256 W x 145 D x 40 H mm Weight 457 9 Power Specification 12V 1 5A DC Built in Switch Four auto negotiating auto MDI MDI X 10 100 1000 Mbps RJ 45 Ethernet ports DSL Port P 2612HNU F1 One RJ 11 DSL port P 2612HNU F3 One RJ 45 DSL port WAN Port One
13. 2511097781 SIP Account s to Receive Incoming Call M spi 2511097781 F sip2 changeme eei _ cence 3 5 1 3 Making a VolP Call 1 Make sure you connect a telephone to the first phone port on the ZyXEL Device 2 Make sure the ZyXEL Device is on and connected to the Internet 3 Pick up the phone receiver 4 Dialthe VolP phone number you want to call P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorial 3 6 Using the File Sharing Feature In this section you can e Set up file sharing e Access the shared files from a computer 3 6 1 Set Up File Sharing To set up file sharing you need to set up a user account enable file sharing and set up your share s 3 6 1 1 Set up a User Account Before you can share files you need a user account 1 Click USB Services gt File Sharing gt Account Management to display the following screen Click Add to set up a user name and password Account Management Add ee K 8 ZyXEL Enj Apply Cancel 2 The following screen appears Enter a user name and password as shown in the example screen below Click Apply to save your settings Account Management Add User User Name Example1 5 to 15 characters Password A 5 to 15 characters Retype Password iiaa 5 to 15 characters Apply Cancel 3 This sets up your user account now you are ready to set up file sharing on your ZyXEL Device 3 6 1 2 Set up File Sharing on Your Z
14. Control Panel Devices and Printers Default Programs i s ey Magnifier Help and Support gt All Programs crama In the Control Panel click View network status and tasks under the Network and Internet category Figure 132 Windows 7 Control Panel E Control Panel gt S Al Adjust your computer s settings View by Category K System and Security Review your computer s status Back up your computer Find and fix problems User Accounts and Family Safety is Add or remove user accounts id Set up parental controls for any user Appearance and Personalization Change the theme Change desktop background Adjust screen resolution Network and Internet View network status and tasks x oose homegroup and sharing options 7 Hardware and Sound A View devices and printers Add a device Clock Language and Region Change keyboards or other input methods Change display language Ease of Access Let Windows suggest settings Optimize visual display OFE kal Programs Uninstall a program P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 3 Click Change adapter settings Figure 133 Windows 7 Network And Sharing Center G SE gt Control Panel Network and Internet Network and Sharing Center v 4 Search Control Panel Home 2 4 a 3 View your basic network information and set up connections Manage
15. E Windows Movie Maker be Printers and Faxes Help and Support yp seach All Programs gt Run BD ico FF fO tun off computer untitled Paint In the Control Panel click the Network Connections icon Figure 120 Windows XP Control Panel E Control Panel File Edit View Favorites Tools Help X P Search E Folders z Q G Control Panel Address gt va Control Panel GB Switch to Category view See Also Game d Windows Update Controllers P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 3 Right click Local Area Connection and then select Properties Figure 121 Windows XP Control Panel gt Network Connections gt Properties ocal Area Connection Standard PCI Fast Ethernet Adapte Disable Status Repair Bridge Connections Create Shortcut Rename 4 On the General tab select Internet Protocol TCP IP and then click Properties Figure 122 Windows XP Local Area Connection Properties Area Connection Properties General Authentication Advanced _ Connect using ES Accton EN1207D TX PCI Fast Ethernet Adapter This connection uses the following items M E Client for Microsoft Networks v 5 File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks Description Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol The default wide area network protocol that prov
16. Figure 45 Network gt NAT gt Port Forwarding Port Forwarding Serice Name WAN Interface Server IP Address External Port s Internal Port s Protocol User Defined gt fisce_i_1_1 L i stn En stat Enf Me Add coo Se i gaara on Paso 4 US ine 11 1 21 21 21 21 192 13 56 32 TCP amp fii Defined Apply Reset The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 34 Network gt NAT gt Port Forwarding LABEL DESCRIPTION Port Forwarding Service Name Select a pre defined service from the drop down list box The pre defined service port number s and protocol will display in the External port I nternal port and Protocol fields Otherwise select User Defined and manually enter the port number s and select the IP protocol WAN Interface Select the WAN interface through which the service is forwarded You must have already configured a WAN connection with NAT enabled P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide 151 Chapter 8 Network Address Translation NAT Table 34 Network gt NAT gt Port Forwarding LABEL DESCRIPTION Server IP Enter the IP address of the server for the specified service Address External Port Start Enter the original destination port for the packets To forward only one port enter the port number again in the External Port End field To forward a series of ports enter the start port number here and the end port num
17. Hostname DNS Routing A Hostname and Domain Name Hostname Domain Name linux h2oz J site _ Change Hostname via DHCP _ Write Hostname to etc hosts X Change etc resolv conf manually Name Servers and Domain Search List Name Server 1 Domain Search 10 0 2 3 Name Server 2 Name Server 3 _ Update DNS data via DHCP 9 Click Finish to save your settings and close the window P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address Verifying Settings Click the KNetwork Manager icon on the Task bar to check your TCP IP properties From the Options sub menu select Show Connection I nformation Figure 162 openSUSE 10 3 KNetwork Manager 7 Disable Wireless 3 Switch to Offline Mode T Show Connection Information Configure amp KNetworkManager a Wired Devices X Wired Network Dial Up Connections a Options When the Connection Status KNetwork Manager window opens click the Statistics tab to see if your connection is working properly Figure 163 openSUSE Connection Status KNetwork Manager Connection Status KNetworkManager a Device h Addresse T statistics Received Bytes 2317441 MBytes 2 2 Packets 3621 Errors 0 Dropped 0 KBytes s 0 0 Transmitted 841875 0 8 3140 0 0 0 0 P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Pop up Windows Java
18. LABEL DESCRIPTION Peak Cell Rate Divide the DSL line rate bps by 424 the size of an ATM cell to find the Peak Cell Rate PCR This is the maximum rate at which the sender can send cells Type the PCR here This field is not available when you select UBR Without PCR Connection Mode Sustainable The Sustain Cell Rate SCR sets the average cell rate long term that Cell Rate can be transmitted Type the SCR which must be less than the PCR Note that system default is 0 cells sec This field is available only when you select Non Realtime VBR or Realtime VBR Maximum Maximum Burst Size MBS refers to the maximum number of cells Burst Size that can be sent at the peak rate Type the MBS which is less than 65535 This field is available only when you select Non Realtime VBR or Realtime VBR Select Select Default Mode This allows only one WAN service over a single virtual circuit VLAN MUX Mode is not supported by the ZyXEL Device as of writing This field is not available if you select PPPoA or I PoA in the DSL Link Type field Back Click this button to return to the previous screen without saving any changes Apply Save Click this button to save your changes and go back to the previous screen 5 3 The Internet Connection Screen Use this screen to change your ZyXEL Device s WAN settings Click Network gt WAN gt Internet Connection The summary table shows you the configured WAN
19. a fi 5 E i I E eN a I 192 168 1 33 a i a a Conflicting Router IP Addresses Example Since a router connects different networks it must have interfaces using different network numbers For example if a router is set between a LAN and the Internet WAN the router s LAN and WAN addresses must be on different subnets In the following example the LAN and WAN are on the same subnet The LAN computers cannot access the Internet because the router cannot route between networks SSE EBB BE Figure 117 Conflicting Computer IP Addresses Example LAN a WAN W NS i 192 168 1 88 T _ r Internet gt Seem eee ee Conflicting Computer and Router IP Addresses Example More than one device can not use the same IP address In the following example the computer and the router s LAN port both use 192 168 1 1 as the IP address P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Appendix A IP Addresses and Subnetting The computer cannot access the Internet This problem can be solved by assigning a different IP address to the computer or the router s LAN port Figure 118 Conflicting Computer and Router IP Addresses Example e SSE TEETH a 1 192 168 1 1 H uai i o m o I me o o a I 1 i i 192 168 1 1 Internet 3 7 Seam e ee eee P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address Note Your specific ZyXEL Device may not support all of the
20. 2 ZyXEL Celebration Video 3 ZyXEL Connecting the Future 3 8 Using the Print Server Feature In this section you can e Configure a TCP IP Printer Port e Add a New Printer Using Windows e Add a New Printer Using Macintosh OS X Configure a TCP IP Printer Port This example shows how you can configure a TCP IP printer port This example is done using the Windows 2000 Professional operating system Some menu items may look different on your operating system The TCP IP port must be configured with the IP address of the ZyXEL Device and must use the LPR protocol to communicate with the printer Consult your operating systems documentation for instructions on how to do this or follow the instructions below if you have a Windows 2000 XP operating system P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorial 1 Click Start gt Settings then right click on Printers and select Open New Office Document Sa Lag Open Office Document RFI Set Program Access and Defaults Windows Update fa Add Printer WinZip BH Acrobat Distiller S HP LaserJet 8000 Series PCL 6 Programs WebWorks Rasterizer Canon iR5000 6000 PCL6 Gf Adobe PDF cy Documents gt Ss Canon iRS000 6000 PCLSe Microsoft Office Document Image Writer E is PRT403 on zytwptO1 zyxel com a Sark Network and Dial up Connections gt i PRT402 on zytwptO1 zyxel com l Printers PSON Stylus C45 Series 2 Help A Taskbar amp St
21. Enter how often you want the ZyXEL Device to update this screen Refresh Now Click this to update this screen immediately Device Information Host Name __ This field displays the ZyXEL Device system name It is used for identification You can change this in the Maintenance gt System gt General screen s System Name field Model Name This is the model name of your device MAC This is the MAC Media Access Control or Ethernet address unique to Address your ZyXEL Device Firmware This field displays the current version of the firmware inside the device Version It also shows the date the firmware version was created Click this to go to the screen where you can change it WAN Information Mode This field is not available when the WAN mode is Ethernet WAN This is the DSL standard that your ZyXEL Device is using P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 4 Status Screens LABEL DESCRIPTION IP Address This field displays the current IP address of the ZyXEL Device in the WAN Click this to go to the screen where you can change it IP Sue ne This field displays the current subnet mask in the WAN Mas LAN Information IP Address This field displays the current IP address of the ZyXEL Device in the LAN Click this to go to the screen where you can change it IP subnet This field displays the current subnet mask in the LAN Mas DHCP Server This field displa
22. PPP over ATM AAL5 RFC 2364 PPP over Ethernet RFC 2516 Multiple PPPoE VC based and LLC based multiplexing 1 610 F4 F5 OAM Other Protocol Support PPP Point to Point Protocol link layer protocol Transparent bridging for unsupported network layer protocols RIP I RIP II ICMP ATM QoS SNMP v1 and v2c with MIB II support RFC 1213 IP Multicasting IGMP v1 and v2 IGMP Proxy Management Embedded Web Configurator CLI Command Line Interpreter SNMP v1 amp v2c with MIB II Firmware upgrade and configuration file restore through Web FTP SCP SFTP Telnet for remote management Remote Management Control Telnet FTP Web SNMP and DNS Remote Firmware Upgrade Syslog P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 26 Product Specifications Voice Specifications Note To take full advantage of the supplementary phone services available through the ZyXEL Device s phone port you may need to subscribe to the services from your VoIP service provider Note Not all features are supported by all service providers Consult your service provider for more information Table 87 Voice Features Call Park and Call park and pickup lets you put a call on hold park and then Pickup continue the call pickup The caller must still pay while the call is parked When you park the call you enter a number of your choice up to eight digits which you must enter again when you pick up the call If you do not ent
23. Programs Advanced Settings t Move the slider to select a privacy setting for the Internet zone Medium Blocks third party cookies that do not have a compact privacy policy Blocks third party cookies that use personally identifiable information without your implicit consent Restricts first party cookies that use personally identifiable information without implicit consent Pop up Blocker Prevent most pop up windows from appearing _ Block pop ups 3 Click Apply to save this setting Enable Pop up Blockers with Exceptions Alternatively if you only want to allow pop up windows from your device see the following steps 1 In Internet Explorer select Tools Internet Options and then the Privacy tab P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Appendix C Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions 2 Select Settings to open the Pop up Blocker Settings screen Figure 166 Internet Options Privacy Internet Options General Security Privacy Content Connections Programs Advanced Settings lA Move the slider to select a privacy setting for the Internet zone Medium Blocks third party cookies that do not have a compact privacy policy Blocks third party cookies that use personally identifiable C3 information without your implicit consent Restricts first party cookies that use personally identifiable information without implicit consent Pop up Blocker Prevent mo
24. SIP 1 In Active ChangeMe ChangeMe SIP 2 In Active ChangeMe ChangeMe P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 4 Status Screens Figure 8 Status Screen Ethernet WAN mode gt Status Refresh Interval None wx Refresh Now Host Name P 2612HNU F3 System Uptime 2 28 Model Name P 2612HNU F3 Current Date Time Sat Jan 1 03 28 13 CET 2000 MAC Address 00 13 49 11 66 8b OESIE TE a 277 Firmware Version V3 00 BLM 0 b9 NAT Sessions Usage 0 2 WAN Information ETHER WAN Mode IPoE IP Subnet Mask C OLAN Information IP Address 192 168 1 1 IP Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 DHCP Server Server WLAN Information Channel 1 1000Mbps WPS Status inconfigur SSID1 Information WA SSID ZYXEL H4CPVN 1000Mbps Status off Security Mode WPA PSK NA SSID2 Information SSID XEL KMK Status ff Summary poo aay Made Ne Security DHCP Client List WLAN Client List SSID3 Information SSID ZyXEL 7EPHMM Packet Statistics Status off Security Mode No Security USB Status SSID4 Information SSID ZyXEL UVFTYC Status off Security Mode No Security Storage Printer Registration Status Account action ACCOUN Status T SIP 1 In Active ChangeMe ChangeMe SIP 2 In Active ChangeMe ChangeMe Each field is described in the following table Table 4 Status Screen LABEL DESCRIPTION Refresh Interval
25. carriers sub channels of 4 3125 KHz each called tones The rest of the display is the line s bit allocation This is displayed as the number in hexadecimal format of bits transmitted for each tone This can be used to determine the quality of the connection whether a given sub carrier loop has sufficient margins to support certain ADSL transmission rates and possibly to determine whether particular specific types of interference or line attenuation exist Refer to the ITU T G 992 1 recommendation for more information on DMT The better or shorter the line the higher the number of bits transmitted for a DMT tone The maximum number of bits that can be transmitted per DMT tone is 15 There will be some tones without any bits as there has to be space between the upstream and downstream channels Reset Click this button to reinitialize the ADSL line The large text box above then ADSL Line displays the progress and results of this operation for example Start to reset ADSL Loading ADSL modem F W Reset ADSL Line Successfully P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide 267 Chapter 23 Diagnostic P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Account 24 1 Overview Use this screen to change the password for the Administrator and User accounts for your ZyXEL Device 24 2 Admin Account Screen Use this screen to change the password for the Administrator and User accounts for your ZyXEL Device Click Maintenance gt
26. Association List Association List The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 32 Association List LABEL DESCRIPTION Set This is the index number of an associated wireless station MAC Address This field displays the MAC address of an associated wireless station Association Time This field displays the time a wireless station first associated with the ZyXEL Device Refresh Click this to reload the screen P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide 147 Chapter 7 Wireless LAN 7 8 Wireless LAN Technical Reference The following section contains additional technical information about the ZyXEL Device features described in this chapter The following table describes some wireless network terms and acronyms used in the ZyXEL Device s Web Configurator Table 33 Additional Wireless Terms TERM DESCRIPTION RTS CTS Threshold In a wireless network which covers a large area wireless devices are sometimes not aware of each other s presence This may cause them to send information to the AP at the same time and result in information colliding and not getting through By setting this value lower than the default value the wireless devices must sometimes get permission to send information to the ZyXEL Device The lower the value the more often the devices must get permission If this value is greater than the fragmentation threshold value see
27. Description Access Level Share Access ZyXEL X BL O S SSS Browse ZyXEL Celebrating Two Decades tti s SCOC S Security p ZyXEL gt gt lt lt Available Users Allow Users Cancel Each field is described in the following table Table 45 USB Services gt File Sharing gt Share Configuration Add LABEL DESCRIPTION Volume Select the volume in the USB storage device that you want to add as a share in the ZyXEL Device Share Manually enter the file path for the share or click the Browse button Refer to Section 10 2 1 1 on page 188 to see the Browse screen Browse Click this button to select the file path for the share directory This is the folder that will be visible to a user browsing to the USB storage device A user can access any sub folder in this folder Description You can either enter a short description of the share or leave this field blank Access Level The share can either be available to everyone in the network or only to users you add in the Account Management screen Select Public to make the share available to everyone Select Security to make the share available only to users you allow Share Access This shows when you select Security as the Access Level for the share You can allow or disallow access simply by moving Available Users to the Allow Users box P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide 187 Chapter 10 File Sharing Table 45
28. Domain Name System support you can use Support a fixed URL www zyxel com for example with a dynamic IP address You must register for this service with a Dynamic DNS service provider P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 26 Product Specifications Table 86 Firmware Specifications continued IP Multicast IP multicast is used to send traffic to a specific group of computers The ZyXEL Device supports versions 1 and 2 of IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol used to join multicast groups see RFC 2236 Time and Date Get the current time and date from an external server when you turn on your ZyXEL Device You can also set the time manually These dates and times are then used in logs Logs Use logs for troubleshooting You can send logs from the ZyXEL Device to an external syslog server Universal Plug and A UPnP enabled device can dynamically join a network obtain an Play UPnP IP address and convey its capabilities to other devices on the network Firewall Your device has a stateful inspection firewall with DoS Denial of Service protection By default when the firewall is activated all incoming traffic from the WAN to the LAN is blocked unless it is initiated from the LAN The firewall supports TCP UDP inspection DoS detection and prevention real time alerts reports and logs QoS Quality of Service You can efficiently manage traffic on your network by reserving
29. Errs This field displays the number of error packets transmitted on this port Drops This field applies to the WAN services and displays the number of packets that were to be transmitted on this port but were dropped Poll Interval s Type the time interval for the browser to refresh system statistics Set Interval Click this to apply the new poll interval you entered in the Poll Interval field above Stop Click this button to halt the refreshing of the system statistics 4 5 VoIP Statistics Click Status gt VoIP Statistics to access this screen Figure 12 VolP Statistics SIP Status ir nn oi a a SIP1 Initializing 0 00 00 ChangeMe ChangeMe SIP2 Initializing 0 00 00 ChangeMe ChangeMe NO Call Status Account Duration Status Codec Peer Number SIPL 0 Day s 0 Hour s 0 Minute s 0 Second s Idle None SIP2 0 Day s 0 Hour s 0 Minute s 0 Second s Idle None Phone Status Phone Outgoing Number Incoming Number Phonel ChangeMe ChangeMe Phone2 ChangeMe ChangeMe Pol intervat ERs P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 4 Status Screens Each field is described in the following table Table 8 VolP Statistics LABEL DESCRIPTION SIP Status Account This column displays each SIP account in the ZyXEL Device Registration This field displays the current registration status of the SIP account You can change this in the Status screen Registered The SIP account is
30. O OAM 282 OK response 177 operation humidity 279 operation temperature 279 P Pairwise Master Key PMK 355 357 park 283 passphrase 138 Peak Cell Rate PCR 103 115 peer to peer calls 170 Per Hop Behavior see PHB PHB 179 235 phone book speed dial 170 phone config 283 pickup 283 Point to Point Protocol over ATM Adaptation Layer 5 AAL5 114 point to point calls 285 ports 24 power adaptor 286 power specifications 279 PPP Point to Point Protocol Link Layer Protocol 282 PPP over ATM AAL5 282 PPP over Ethernet 282 PPP over Ethernet see PPPoE P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Index PPPoE 98 114 281 Benefits 114 preamble mode 349 print server 23 printer sharing 195 and LAN 196 configuration 58 requirements 196 TCP IP port 58 probing firewalls 204 product registration 398 profile 43 protocol 98 PSK 355 PSTN call setup signaling 178 pulse dialing 178 Q QoS 178 223 224 234 284 Quality of Service 284 Quality of Service see QoS quick dialing 285 Quick Start Guide 27 R RADIUS 286 351 message types 351 messages 351 shared secret key 352 Reach Extended ADSL 282 Real time Transport Protocol see RTP region 283 registration product 398 reinitialize the ADSL line 267 related documentation 3 REN 284 Request To Send see RTS RESET button 26 restore configuration 257 260 RFC 1483 114 282 RFC 1631 149 RFC 1889 176 285 RFC 1890 285 RFC 2327 285 RFC
31. Optional IPv6 Address Configure IPV6 A rr Click the lock to prevent further changes Assist me Apply Now 5 For statically assigned settings do the following From the Configure I Pv4 list select Manually e In the IP Address field type your IP address e In the Subnet Mask field type your subnet mask P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address e In the Router field type the IP address of your device Figure 142 Mac OS X 10 4 Network Preferences gt Ethernet eeo _ _ a Showall Network Q Location Automatic E3 Show Built in Ethernet E TCP IP PPPoE AppleTalk Proxies Ethernet Configure IPv4 Manually HA IP Address 0 0 0 0 Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 Router 0 0 0 0 DNS Servers Search Domains Optional IPv6 Address Configure IPv6 M z Click the lock to prevent further changes Assist me Apply Now J 6 Click Apply Now and close the window Verifying Settings Check your TCP IP properties by clicking Applications gt Utilities gt Network Utilities and then selecting the appropriate Network Interface from the I nfo tab Figure 143 Mac OS X 10 4 Network Utility 808 Finfo Netstat Network Utility AppleTalk Ping Lookup Traceroute Whois Finger Port Scan interface for information Network Interface en0 E Transfe
32. See Appendix B on page 305 for details on how to set up your computer s IP address P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 22 Tools Reset to Factory Defaults Click the Reset button to clear all user entered configuration information and return the ZyXEL Device to its factory defaults The following warning screen appears Figure 99 Reset Warning Message Router is restarting now Please wait As there will be no indication of when the process is complete please wait for two minute before attempting to access the router again You can also press the RESET button on the rear panel to reset the factory defaults of your ZyXEL Device Refer to Section 1 6 on page 26 for more information on the RESET button 22 4 Restart System restart allows you to reboot the ZyXEL Device without turning the power off Click Maintenance gt Tools gt Restart Click Restart to have the ZyXEL Device reboot This does not affect the ZyXEL Device s configuration Figure 101 Maintenance gt Tools gt Restart Screen System Restart Click Restart to have the device perform a software restart The SYS LED blinks as the device restarts and then stays steady on ifthe restart is successful Wait a minute before lagging into the device again Restart P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 22 Tools 22 5 Technical Reference 22 5 1 The following section contains additional technical informatio
33. Table 100 16 bit Network Number Subnet Planning NO BORROWED NO NO HOSTS PER HOST BITS SUBNET MASK SUBNETS SUBNET 1 255 255 128 0 17 2 32766 2 255 255 192 0 18 4 16382 P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Appendix A IP Addresses and Subnetting Table 100 16 bit Network Number Subnet Planning continued HOST BITS SUBNET MASK SUBNETS SUBNET 3 255 255 224 0 19 8 8190 4 255 255 240 0 20 16 4094 5 255 255 248 0 21 32 2046 6 255 255 252 0 22 64 1022 7 255 255 254 0 23 128 510 8 255 255 255 0 24 256 254 9 255 255 255 128 25 512 126 10 255 255 255 192 26 1024 62 11 255 255 255 224 27 2048 30 12 255 255 255 240 28 4096 14 13 255 255 255 248 29 8192 6 14 255 255 255 252 30 16384 2 15 255 255 255 254 31 32768 1 Configuring IP Addresses Where you obtain your network number depends on your particular situation If the ISP or your network administrator assigns you a block of registered IP addresses follow their instructions in selecting the IP addresses and the subnet mask If the ISP did not explicitly give you an IP network number then most likely you have a single user account and the ISP will assign you a dynamic IP address when the connection is established If this is the case it is recommended that you select a network number from 192 168 0 0 to 192 168 255 0 The Interne
34. Time Setting Current Time and Date Current Time 10 51 03 Current Date 2009 09 23 Time and Date Setup Get from Time Server Time Protocol SNTP RFC 1769 Time Server Address Jeurope pool ntp org Time Zone Setup Time Zone GMT 01 00 Berlin Stockholm Rome Bern Brussels Vienna X I Daylight Savings Start Date First 7 Sunday 7 of January _ 2009 09 23 at o clock End Date First z Sunday 7 of January x 2009 09 23 at o clock Apply Reset The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 71 Maintenance gt System gt Time Setting LABEL DESCRIPTION Current Time and Date Current Time This field displays the time of your ZyXEL Device Current Date This field displays the date of your ZyXEL Device Time and Date Setup Get from Time Select this radio button to have the ZyXEL Device get the time and date if you are unsure of this information Server from the time server you specified below Time Protocol This shows the time service protocol that your time server sends when you turn on the ZyXEL Device Time Server Enter the IP address or URL up to 20 extended ASCII characters in Address length of your time server Check with your SP network administrator Time Zone Setup Time Zone Choose the time zone of your location This will set the time difference between your time zone and Greenwich Mean Time GMT P
35. You can allow or disallow access simply by moving Available Users to the Allow Users box Apply Click this button to save your settings Cancel Click this button to return all fields in this screen to their previous values P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 10 File Sharing 10 3 The Account Management Screen Use this screen to configure a user account To access this screen click USB Services gt File Sharing gt Account Management Figure 62 USB Services gt File Sharing gt Account Management Account Management Account Management Add Active status J UserName O l Moa Vv ZyXEL g i Apply Cancel Each field is described in the following table Table 48 USB Services gt File Sharing gt Account Management LABEL DESCRIPTION Add Click this button to configure another user and include it in the list Active Check this to enable the user to access shares via the ZyXEL Device Otherwise clear this to prevent this user from accessing shares via the ZyXEL Device Status This shows whether the user name is active able to access shares via the ZyXEL Device or inactive unable to access shares via the ZyXEL Device User Name This field shows the list of user names already configured on the ZyXEL Device Modify Click the Edit icon to change the settings of an existing user account Click the Remove icon to delete this entry in the list You will be
36. addresses are then obtained automatically from the server To automatically search for free IP and then assign it statically select Zeroconf To use iy 6 Select Dynamic Address DHCP if you have a dynamic IP address Select Statically assigned IP Address if you have a static IP address Fill in the IP address Subnet mask and Hostname fields 7 Click Next to save the changes and close the Network Card Setup window P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 8 If you know your DNS server IP address es click the Hostname DNS tab in Network Settings and then enter the DNS server information in the fields provided Figure 161 openSUSE 10 3 Network Settings B YaST 2 linux h2o0z Enter the name for DNS domain that it belongs to Optionally enter the name server list and domain search list Note that the hostname is global it applies to all interfaces not just this one The domain is especially important if this computer is a mail server If you are using DHCP to get an IP address check whether to get a hostname via DHCP The hostname of your host which can be seen by issuing the hostname command will be set automatically by the DHCP client You may want to disable this option if you connect to different networks ber this computer and the Network Settings Global Options Overview
37. gt General continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Short GI This field displays only when you select 802 11b g n 802 11n only in 2 4G band or 802 11n only in 5G band in the Mode Select field Check this to use Short GI Guard Interval The guard interval is the gap introduced between data transmission from users in order to reduce interference Reducing the GI increases data transfer rates but also increases interference Increasing the GI reduces data transfer rates but also reduces interference A MPDU Aggregation This field displays only when you select 802 11b g n 802 11n only in 2 4G band or 802 11n only in 5G band in the Mode Select field Check this to allow the grouping of several A MSDUs Aggregate MAC Service Data Units into one large A MPDU Aggregate MAC Protocol Data Unit This function allows faster data transfer rates Channel Width This field displays only when you select 802 11b g n 802 11n only in 2 4G band or 802 11n only in 5G band in the Mode Select field A standard 20MHz channel offers transfer speeds of up to 150Mbps whereas a 40MHz channel uses two standard channels and offers speeds of up to 300Mbps However not all devices support 40MHz channels Select the channel bandwidth you want to use for your wireless network It is recommended that you select 20 40 20 40 MHz This allows the ZyXEL Device to adjust the channel bandwidth depending on network conditions Select 20 MHz
38. in any medium provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License along with the Program You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee 2 You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it thus forming a work based on the Program and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above provided that you also meet all of these conditions a You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change b You must cause any work that you distribute or publish that in whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any part thereof to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License c If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run you must cause it when started running for such interactive use in the most ordinary way to print or display an announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty or else saying that you provide a warranty and that users may redistribute the program unde
39. number between 0 and 63 in the field provided TCP ACK This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field If you select this option the matched TCP packets must contain the ACK Acknowledge flag DHCP This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field and UDP in the IP Protocol field Select this option and select a DHCP option If you select Vendor Class ID DHCP Option 60 enter the Class ID of the matched traffic such as the type of the hardware or firmware If you select Client D DHCP Option 61 enter the Type of the matched traffic and Client ID of the DHCP client If you select User Class ID DHCP Option 77 enter the User Class Data which is a string that identifies the user s category or application type in the matched DHCP packets If you select VendorSpecificl ntro DHCP Option 125 enter the Enterprise Number of the software of the matched traffic and Vendor Class Data used by all the DHCP clients Service Select the service classification of the traffic Exclude Select this option to exclude the packets that match the specified criteria from this classifier Back Click this to return to the previous screen without saving Apply Click this to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device Cancel Click this to begin configuring this screen afresh P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 17 Quality of Serv
40. x 13 49 11 66 CPU Usage CE 0 0 MAC Address 00 13 49 11 66 8b pe ia en 50 7 Firmware Version V3 00 BLT 0 b3 NAT Sessions Usage S WAN Information ETHER WAN Mode IPoE SS Status IP Subnet Mask LAN Information IP Address 192 168 1 1 IP Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 DHCP Server Server AN Informs Channel WPS Status 1000Mbps SSID1 Information SSID Status Security Mode gt N A 7 Click the WLAN Client List hyperlink in the AP s Status screen You can see if any wireless client has connected to the AP Association List Association AC Association Set mac address AS pime Set address Time 1 00 19 CB 04 BA E8 00 00 20 17 2 18 Ea i9 4 20 5 21 7 23 8 24 E 25 10 26 an 27 az 28 a 29 a 30 s 31 16 32 _Rettesn P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorial 3 3 3 Configuring the Wireless Client This section describes how to connect the wireless client to a network 3 3 3 1 Connecting to a Wireless LAN The following sections show you how to join a wireless network using the ZyXEL utility as in the following diagram The wireless client is labeled C and the access point is labeled AP There are three ways to connect the client to an access point e Configure nothing and leave the wireless client to automatically scan for and connect to any available network that has no wireless security configured e Ma
41. 2 Select your product on the ZyXEL home page to go to that product s page 3 Select the certification you wish to view from this page ZyXEL Limited Warranty ZyXEL warrants to the original end user purchaser that this product is free from any defects in materials or workmanship for a period of up to two years from the date of purchase During the warranty period and upon proof of purchase should the product have indications of failure due to faulty workmanship and or materials ZyXEL will at its discretion repair or replace the defective products or components without charge for either parts or labor and to whatever extent it shall deem necessary to restore the product or components to proper operating condition Any replacement will consist of a new or re manufactured functionally equivalent product of equal or higher value and will be solely at the discretion of ZyXEL This warranty shall not apply if the product has been modified misused tampered with damaged by an act of God or subjected to abnormal working conditions Note Repair or replacement as provided under this warranty is the exclusive remedy of the purchaser This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties express or implied including any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular use or purpose ZyXEL shall in no event be held liable for indirect or consequential damages of any kind to the purchaser To obtain the services of this warranty
42. 21 3 on page 249 to configure where the ZyXEL Device sends logs and which logs and or immediate alerts the ZyXEL Device records What You Need To Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read this chapter Alerts and Logs An alert is a type of log that warrants more serious attention They include system errors attacks access control and attempted access to blocked web sites Some categories such as System Errors consist of both logs and alerts You may differentiate them by their color in the View Log screen Alerts display in red and logs display in black Syslog Overview The syslog protocol allows devices to send event notification messages across an IP network to syslog servers that collect the event messages A syslog enabled device can generate a syslog message and send it to a syslog server Syslog is defined in RFC 3164 The RFC defines the packet format content and system log related information of syslog messages Each syslog message has a P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide 247 Chapter 21 Logs facility and severity level The syslog facility identifies a file in the syslog server Refer to the documentation of your syslog program for details The following table describes the syslog severity levels Table 72 Syslog Severity Levels CODE SEVERITY Emergency The system is unusable Alert Action must be taken immediately Critical The system condition is critical Error Ther
43. 2236 is an improvement over version 1 RFC 1112 but IGMP version 1 is still in wide use If you would like to read more detailed information about interoperability between IGMP version 2 and version 1 please see sections 4 and 5 of RFC 2236 The class D IP address is used to identify host groups and can be in the range 224 0 0 0 to 239 255 255 255 The address 224 0 0 0 is not assigned to any group and is used by IP multicast computers The address 224 0 0 1 is used for query messages and is assigned to the permanent group of all IP hosts including gateways All hosts must join the 224 0 0 1 group in order to participate in IGMP The address 224 0 0 2 is assigned to the multicast routers group At start up the ZyXEL Device queries all directly connected networks to gather group membership After that the ZyXEL Device periodically updates this information DNS Server Address Assignment Use Domain Name System DNS to map a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa for instance the IP address of www zyxel com is 204 217 0 2 The DNS server is extremely important because without it you must know the IP address of a computer before you can access it The ZyXEL Device can get the DNS server addresses in the following ways P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup 1 The ISP tells you the DNS server addresses usually in the form of an information sheet when you sign up If your ISP gives you DNS server
44. 2364 282 RFC 2516 281 282 RFC 2684 282 RFC 3164 247 RFC 3261 285 Ringer Equivalence Number see REN romfile 253 router features 22 RTCP 285 RTP 176 285 RTS Request To Send 348 threshold 347 348 S safety warnings 7 scan 135 scheduling wireless LAN 146 SDP 285 seamless rate adaptation 282 security network 206 server 245 service access control 240 service set 134 Service Set Dentification see SSID Session Description Protocol 285 Session Initiation Protocol see SIP shared secret 142 sharing files 185 silence suppression 165 284 SIP 172 account 172 accounts 284 ALG 285 Application Layer Gateway 285 call progression 176 client 174 P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Index identities 172 INVITE request 177 number 173 proxy server 174 redirect server 175 register server 176 servers 174 service domain 173 URI 172 user agent 174 version 2 285 SNMP 282 speed dial 170 SRA 282 SSID 134 stateful inspection 281 static DHCP 125 static route 219 static VLAN status 85 status bar 32 status indicators 24 storage humidity 279 storage temperature 279 subnet 293 subnet mask 127 294 subnetting 296 supplementary services 179 Sustain Cell Rate SCR 103 Sustained Cell Rate SCR 115 syntax conventions 5 syslog protocol 247 severity levels 247 system name 86 244 T Tag Control Information See TCI Tag Protocol Identifier See TPID TCI TCP IP port 58 Telnet 24 temperature 27
45. 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 20 System Table 71 Maintenance gt System gt Time Setting continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Daylight Savings Daylight saving is a period from late spring to early fall when many countries set their clocks ahead of normal local time by one hour to give more daytime light in the evening Select this option if you use Daylight Saving Time Start Date Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time starts if you selected Daylight Savings The o clock field uses the 24 hour format Here are a couple of examples Daylight Saving Time starts in most parts of the United States on the second Sunday of March Each time zone in the United States starts using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A M local time So in the United States you would select Second Sunday March and type 2 in the o clock field Daylight Saving Time starts in the European Union on the last Sunday of March All of the time zones in the European Union start using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment 1 A M GMT or UTC So in the European Union you would select Last Sunday March The time you type in the o clock field depends on your time zone In Germany for instance you would type 2 because Germany s time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC GMT 1 End Date Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time ends if you selected Daylight Savings The o clock field uses the 24 hour format Here are a c
46. 34 3 35 4 36 5 37 6 38 7 39 8 40 9 41 10 42 11 43 12 a4 13 45 14 46 15 47 16 48 17 49 18 50 19 51 20 52 21 53 22 54 23 55 24 56 25 57 26 58 27 59 28 60 29 61 30 62 31 63 32 64 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 6 WLAN Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Set This is the index number of an associated wireless station MAC Address This field displays the MAC Media Access Control address of an associated wireless station Association This field displays the time a wireless station first associated with the Time ZyXEL Device Refresh Click this to reload this screen P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 4 Status Screens 4 4 Packet Statistics Click Status gt Packet Statistics to access this screen Read only information here includes port status and packet specific statistics Also provided are system up time and poll interval s The Poll Interval s field is configurable The screen varies slightly depending on the WAN mode you set using the DSL WAN switch Figure 11 Packet Statistics interface Description Received Trensmitted een Le es re e e eth0 14 ipoe_1_1_1 36506956 83046 o o 10060847 38317 0 LAN Statistics CS Received O ne OO Cs a Cod Lani Lan2 13002530 63118 0 42627190 72814 0 Lan3 o o o o o o Lan4 1926956 9042 0 2474132 8326 0 WLAN Statistics WLAN Poll interval s MEE sec The fol
47. 38 332 SO OUI ihe Wireless Cheni coorsennsssmsanee senwrdenctanerseaneeteudadeenecate 41 ee peting UY NAT POR Forwarding sierica coinean raer E nO NEERA 47 JoHN io Mea VOIR Ca sainia aaia sash aE D a NANAS 48 3 5 1 VolP Calls With a Registered SIP ACCOUNT a c ccccccccccccenoccsiscceneescescenneausecaenetenseasnnesians 48 96 Usingitke Fie Shang PU aieiaa a aheieseaaautealis paaauteetepaees 50 ao Sr Up RIE SNA a a rarer meni aranrr 50 3 6 2 Access Your Shared Files From a GOmMputer ccccccccscccccssctscssececctisedsnserenstenonssiierassecens 51 3 7 Using the Media Server FOgUe eniaint Ean NAA 52 Sra a ONO ME ZyXEL DECE wroce e 53 9 7 2 Using Windows Media Player sassis sirsie aina asa 53 3 7 9 Using a Digital Media Adapter sccssis iss casstsesace asst muaecsatenancnaabeeiadiiuthneasdiaues desecdunbebiadens 56 968 Usmg ihe Pin Serner PCTS encina e ES 58 3 9 Configuring the MAG Address Filler snrsusisnisnnnannnnei tanner inenvansessantees 73 3 10 Configuring Static Route for Routing to Another Network c cccssccceesscsteeeeeesesteeeeeeeaes 74 3 11 Gontiguring QoS Queue and Class Setup cccuisscsisccedisserendecatseatieieciisaetaanieeenvieepiandes 77 mole Access ihe ZyXEL Device Using DONS sicariets savssthebauiresseesesticins an aeeseae santas 80 3 12 1 Registering a DDNS Account on www dyndns org ssssssssssseisssrisssrssrrresrrresrrnsssenens 81 3 122 Coniig ring DONS oni Your ZyXEL DEVI E icccsscccstisetassnisemescceteanseaincce
48. 9 Voice Table 42 SIP Call Progression continued A B 5 Dialogue voice traffic 6 BYE _ ______ gt lt gq ee i 7 OK A sends a SIP INVITE request to B This message is an invitation for B to participate in a SIP telephone call B sends a response indicating that the telephone is ringing B sends an OK response after the call is answered A then sends an ACK message to acknowledge that B has answered the call Now A and B exchange voice media talk After talking A hangs up and sends a BYE request B replies with an OK response confirming receipt of the BYE request and the call is terminated Voice Coding A codec coder decoder codes analog voice signals into digital signals and decodes the digital signals back into analog voice signals The ZyXEL Device supports the following codecs e G 711 is a Pulse Code Modulation PCM waveform codec PCM measures analog signal amplitudes at regular time intervals and converts them into digital samples G 711 provides very good sound quality but requires 64 kbps of bandwidth e G 726 is an Adaptive Differential PCM ADPCM waveform codec that uses a lower bitrate than standard PCM conversion ADPCM converts analog audio into digital signals based on the difference between each audio sample and a prediction based on previous samples The more similar the audio sample is to the prediction the less space needed to describe it G 726 operates
49. Account SIP Account Number ChangeMe Authentication User Name ChangeMe Password p URL Type URL Type SIP Voice Features Primary Compression Type G 711MuLaw gt Secondary Compression Type 6 729 gt Third Compression Type G 711ALaw 7 Speaking Volume Control Middle x Listening Volume Control Middle V Active 6 168 Echo Cancellation V Active VAD Voice Active Detector Q Note VAD will not be active while G 722 is used Call Features IV Send Caller ID IV Active Call Transfer IV Active Call Waiting Call Waiting Reject Timer 24 Second Apply Cancel 166 P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 9 Voice Each field is described in the following table Table 38 VoIP gt SIP gt SIP Account LABEL DESCRIPTION SIP Account Selection SIP Account Select the SIP account you want to see in this screen If you change this Selection field the screen automatically refreshes General Active SIP Select this if you want the ZyXEL Device to use this account Clear it if Account you do not want the ZyXEL Device to use this account SIP Account Enter your SIP number In the full SIP URI this is the part before the Number symbol You can use up to 127 printable ASCII characters Authentication User Name Enter the user name for registering this SIP account exactly as it was given to you You can use up to 95 printable ASCII characters
50. Account to open the screen shown next Figure 105 Maintenance gt Account gt Admin Admin Old Password New Password Retype to confirm m m m Apply Reset Figure 106 Maintenance gt Account gt User User Old Password New Password Retype to confirm Apply Reset P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 24 Account 270 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 84 Maintenance gt Account gt Admin User ITEM DESCRIPTION Old Type the default password or the existing password you use to access the Password system in this field New Type your new system password up to 30 characters Note that as you Password type a password the screen displays a for each character you type After you change the password use the new password to access the ZyXEL Device Retype to Type the new password again for confirmation Confirm Apply Click this to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device Cancel Click this to begin configuring this screen afresh P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Troubleshooting 25 1 Overview This chapter offers some suggestions to solve problems you might encounter The potential problems are divided into the following categories e Power Hardware Connections and LEDs e ZyXEL Device Access and Login Internet Access Phone Calls and VoIP Multiple SIP Accounts USB Device Connection 25 2 Power Hardware
51. Configuration Backup Using GUI based FTP Clients The following table describes some of the commands that you may see in GUI based FTP clients Table 82 General Commands for GUI based FTP Clients COMMAND DESCRIPTION Host Address Enter the address of the host server Login Type Anonymous This is when a user I D and password is automatically supplied to the server for anonymous access Anonymous logins will work only if your ISP or service administrator has enabled this option Normal The server requires a unique User ID and Password to login Transfer Type Transfer files in either ASCII plain text format or in binary mode Initial Remote Specify the default remote directory path Directory Initial Local Directory Specify the default local directory path Refer to Section 22 1 2 on page 253 to read about configurations that disallow TFTP and FTP over WAN P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 22 P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Diagnostic 23 1 Overview the ZyXEL Device These read only screens display information to help you identify problems with 23 1 1 What You Can Do in the Diagnostic Screens Use the General Diagnostic screen Section 23 2 on page 265 to check or reset your DSL connection 23 2 The General Diagnostic Screen Click Maintenance gt Diagnostic to open the screen shown next Figure 104 Maintenance gt Diagnostic gt General DSL Lin
52. Connections and LEDs The ZyXEL Device does not turn on None of the LEDs turn on 1 Make sure the ZyXEL Device is turned on 2 Make sure you are using the power adaptor or cord included with the ZyXEL Device 3 Make sure the power adaptor or cord is connected to the ZyXEL Device and plugged in to an appropriate power source Make sure the power source is turned on 4 Turn the ZyXEL Device off and on 5 Ifthe problem continues contact the vendor P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide 271 Chapter 25 Troubleshooting One of the LEDs does not behave as expected 1 Make sure you understand the normal behavior of the LED See Section 1 5 on page 24 2 Check the hardware connections See the Quick Start Guide 3 Inspect your cables for damage Contact the vendor to replace any damaged cables 4 Turn the ZyXEL Device off and on 5 Ifthe problem continues contact the vendor 25 3 ZyXEL Device Access and Login forgot the IP address for the ZyXEL Device 1 The default IP address is 192 168 1 1 2 Ifyou changed the IP address and have forgotten it you might get the IP address of the ZyXEL Device by looking up the IP address of the default gateway for your computer To do this in most Windows computers click Start gt Run enter cmd and then enter ipconfig The IP address of the Default Gateway might be the IP address of the ZyXEL Device it depends on the network so enter this IP address in your Inte
53. DSL ATM as the Interface and click Add Layer 2 Interface Interface ADSLCATM x DSL ATM Interface Configuration Choose Add or Remove to Configure DSL ATM interfaces Interface PI CI Category Link Type Connection Mode Remove Add Remove For this example the DSL connection has the following information P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorial VPI VCI 36 48 DSL Link Type EoA Encapsulation LLC SNAP Bridging Mode Service Category UBR without PCR Select Default Mode Connection Mode Enter or select these values and click Apply Save DSL ATM Interface Configuration ATM P C Configuration This screen allows you to configure an ATM PVC identifier VPI and VCI and select the DSL link type encapsulation mode and service category Otherwise select a Connection Mode to enable it vPI 0 255 fs VCI 32 65535 48 Select DSL Link Type Eo is for PPPoE IPoE and Bridge Eoa PPPoA C IPoA Encapsulation Mode LLC SN4 amp P BRIDGING z Service Category uR Without PCR z Select Connection Mode Default Mode Single service over one connection VLAN MUX Mode Multiple Vlan service over one connection Back Apply Save This creates your layer 2 ATM interface 3 Click WAN gt Internet Connection to open the following screen Click Add to enter your DSL connection details Internet Connection Wide Area Network WAN
54. Enabled MT SNMP Status Enabled public Inder fi Community Name SNMP Devic Add Standard TCP IP Printer Port Wizard xa Additional Post Informateon Rewined xX The dever could nat be werat Tie deron ie not hound on tbe network Bie sue lhat s ee netwerk is connected 3 The aora Leny 4 aa ay ap de pene ian Port Name IP_192 168 1 2 Adapter Type To complete this wizard click Finish hapetin eed epe chek Back in totum to the previews page Then corect Ing the Add Standard thease wrote the netwetk I the oat i correct J 3 pep aeeiiaii eae ATAA IN rinter Port Wizard i TNE le Standen Germ Netmeak Ca 7j ted a port with the following characteristics Cmon sgm No N LPR Ip1 cans e a 192 168 1 2 I Enable printer pooling lt Back C Finish i Cancel Add Pott Delete Port Enable bidirectional support HP LaserJet 8000 Canon iR5000 60 13 Repeat steps 1 to 12 to add this printer to other computers on your network P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorial Add a New Printer Using Windows This example shows how to connect a printer to your ZyXEL Device using the Windows XP Professional operating system Some menu items may look different on your operating system 1 Click Start gt Control Panel gt Printers and Faxes to open the Printers and Faxes screen Click Add a
55. I P over Ethernet in the previous section for an Ethernet WAN i nterface This screen does not show for the DSL WAN interface Figure 23 Network gt WAN gt Internet Connection IPoE Ethernet WAN Interface DSL Interface Configuration WAN IP Settings Notice If Obtain an IP addr I Enable DHCP Option 60 Vendor class Identifier Use the following Static Network Address Transla I Enable NAT IGMP Multicast Enter information provided to you by your ISP to configure the WAN IP settings If Use the following Static IP address is chosen enter the WAN IP address subnet mask and interface gateway Obtain an IP address automatically WAN IP Address 0 0 0 0 WAN Subnet Mask o oo WAN gateway IP Address foao I Enable IGMP Multicast Proxy ess automatically is chosen DHCP will be enabled for P C in MER mode IP address tion Back Next P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 16 Network gt WAN gt Internet Connection IPoE Ethernet WAN Interface automatically LABEL DESCRIPTION Obtain an IP A static IP address is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you A dynamic IP address address is not fixed the ISP assigns you a different one each time you connect to the Internet Select this if you do not have a static IP address Enable DHCP Option 60 Select this to identify the vendor and funct
56. ISP assigns you a different one each time you connect to the Internet Select this if you do not have a dynamic IP address P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup Table 15 Network gt WAN gt Internet Connection PPPoE or PPPoA LABEL DESCRIPTION IP Address Enter the static IP address provided by your ISP PPPoE This field is available when you select PPPoE encapsulation Passthrough va In addition to the ZyXEL Device s built in PPPoE client you can enable PPPoE pass through to allow up to ten hosts on the LAN to use PPPoE client software on their computers to connect to the ISP via the ZyXEL Device Each host can have a separate account and a public WAN IP address PPPoE pass through is an alternative to NAT for application where NAT is not appropriate Disable PPPoE pass through if you do not need to allow hosts on the LAN to use PPPoE client software on their computers to connect to the ISP Enable NAT Select this option to enable NAT on the ZyXEL Device Enable IGMP Select this check box to have the ZyXEL Device act as an IGMP proxy Multicast Proxy on this connection This allows the ZyXEL Device to get subscribing information and maintain a joined member list for each multicast group It can reduce multicast traffic significantly Back Click this button to return to the previous screen Next Click this button to continue IPoE This screen displays when you select
57. Igmpproxy 0 1 beta2 Iproute2 2 6 20 Iptables 1 3 8 linuxigd 1 logrotate 3 7 1 MIPS linux kernel 2 6 20 Mtd utils 1 0 0 Netatalk 2 0 3 Ntfs 3g 2009 4 4 P910nd 0 93 Ppp 2 4 4 Samba 3 0 36 Syslog ng 2 0 6 Sysstat 8 1 8 Updatedd 2 6 Usbmount 0 0 14 1 and Wireless tools 0 29 under below GPL license GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2 June 1991 Copyright C 1989 1991 Free Software Foundation Inc 59 Temple Place Suite 330 Boston MA 02111 1307 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document but changing it is not allowed Preamble The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it By contrast the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software to make sure the software is free for all its users This General Public License applies to most of the Free Software Foundation s software and to any other program whose authors P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Appendix F Open Software Announcements commit to using it Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by the GNU Library General Public License instead You can apply it to your programs too When we speak of free software we are referring to freedom not price Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software and charge for this service if you w
58. Intranet and control traffic flowing directions you may connect a router to the ZyXEL Device s LAN The router may be used to separate two department networks This tutorial shows how to configure a static routing rule for two network routings In the following figure router R is connected to the ZyXEL Device s LAN R connects to two networks N1 192 168 1 x 24 and N2 192 168 10 x 24 If you want to send traffic from computer A in N1 network to computer B in N2 P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorial network the traffic is sent to the ZyXEL Device s WAN default gateway by default In this case B will never receive the traffic You need to specify a static routing rule on the ZyXEL Device to specify R as the router in charge of forwarding traffic to N2 In this case the ZyXEL Device routes traffic from A to R and then R routes the traffic to B This tutorial uses the following example IP settings Table 3 IP Settings in this Tutorial DEVICE COMPUTER IP ADDRESS The ZyXEL Device s WAN 172 16 1 1 The ZyXEL Device s LAN 192 168 1 1 A 192 168 1 34 R s N1 192 168 1 253 P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorial Table 3 IP Settings in this Tutorial DEVICE COMPUTER IP ADDRESS R s N2 192 168 10 2 B 192 168 10 33 To configure a static route to route traffic from N1 to N2 Click Advanced gt Static Rou
59. Laserjet 1500L HP Laserjet 3015 HP Officejet 4255 HP Officejet 5510 HP Officejet 5610 HP Officejet 7210 HP Officejet Pro L7380 HP Photosmart 2610 HP Photosmart 3110 HP Photosmart 7150 HP Photosmart 7830 HP Photosmart C5280 HP Photosmart D5160 HP PSC 1350 HP PSC 1410 IBM Infoprint 1332 LEXMARK Z55 LEXMARK Z705 OKI B4350 SAMSUNG ML 1710 SAMSUNG SCX 4016 P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 12 Print Server P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide 13 1 13 1 1 13 1 2 MAC Filter Overview This chapter discusses MAC address filtering The MAC filter screen allows you to configure the ZyXEL Device to give exclusive access to up to 32 wireless clients Allow based on the MAC address of the wireless clients This applies to wired and wireless connections What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the MAC Filter screen Section 13 2 on page 202 to allow wireless clients access to the ZyXEL Device What You Need to Know Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC Media Access Control address The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters for example 00 A0 C5 00 00 02 You need to know the MAC address of the devices to configure this screen P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 13 MAC Filter 13 2 MAC Filter Screen To change your ZyXEL Device s MAC filter settings click Security gt MAC Filter The screen appears as shown Figure 68 Secur
60. Message Protocol ICMP is a message control and error reporting protocol between a host server and a gateway to the Internet ICMP uses Internet Protocol IP datagrams but the messages are processed by the TCP IP software and directly apparent to the application user Finding Out More See Section 14 3 on page 206 for advanced technical information on firewall 14 2 The Firewall Screen Use this screen to enable service blocking and to maintain the list of services you want to block To access this screen click Security gt Firewall P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 14 Firewall Note These rules specify which computers on the LAN can access which computers or services on the WAN Figure 70 Security gt Firewall Services Service Setup IT Enable LAN to WAN Services Blocking Available Services Blocked Services FTP TCP 20 21 HTTP TCP 80 PING ICMP 0 TELNET TCP 23 TFTP UDP 69 SSH TCP 22 Select Custom Port you can give new port range for blocking Type TCP x Port Number Delete Clear All Apply Reset Each field is described in the following table Table 54 Security gt Firewall LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable LAN to Select this to activate service blocking WAN Services Blocking Available This is a list of pre defined services destination ports you may prohibit Services your LAN computers from using Select the port you want to block and click Add to
61. Name Transmit Rate 2 Kbps gt Network Name SSID SSID_Example3 Receive Rate 0 Kbps gt AP MAC Address 00 40 C5 CD 1F 64 Authentication None gt Network Type Infrastructure Network Mode 802 119 gt Transmission Rate 18 Mbps Total Transmit 46 gt Security WPA PSK Total Receive 3 gt Channel 6 Link Quality 68 dBm Trend Chart Signal Strength Seee oc oe Link Quality 9608202800000 6 Open your Internet browser and enter http www zyxel com or the URL of any other web site in the address bar If you are able to access the web site your wireless connection is successfully configured If you cannot access the web site try changing the encryption type in the Security Settings screen check the Troubleshooting section of this User s Guide or contact your network administrator 3 3 3 2 Creating and Using a Profile A profile lets you easily connect to the same wireless network again later You can also configure different profiles for different networks for example if you connect a notebook computer to wireless networks at home and at work P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorial This example illustrates how to set up a profile and connect the wireless client to an AP configured for WPA PSK security In this example the SSID is SSID_Example3 the profile name is PN_Example3 and the pre shared key is ThisismyWPA PSKpre sharedkey You have chosen the profile name PN_Example3
62. Password Enter the user name for registering this SIP account exactly as it was given to you You can use up to 95 printable ASCII Extended set characters URL Type URL Type Select whether or not to include the SIP service domain name when the ZyXEL Device sends the SIP number SIP include the SIP service domain name TEL do not include the SIP service domain name Voice Features Primary Compression Type Secondary Compression Type Third Compression Type Select the type of voice coder decoder codec that you want the ZyXEL Device to use G 711 provides higher voice quality but requires more bandwidth 64 kbps e G 711MuLaw is typically used in North America and Japan e G 711ALaw is typically used in Europe e G 729 only requires 8 kbps e G 726 32 operates at 16 24 32 or 40 kbps G 722 operates at 48 56 and 64 kbps The ZyXEL Device must use the same codec as the peer When two SIP devices start a SIP session they must agree on a codec Select the ZyXEL Device s first choice for voice coder decoder Select the ZyXEL Device s second choice for voice coder decoder Select None if you only want the ZyXEL Device to accept the first choice Select the ZyXEL Device s third choice for voice coder decoder Select None if you only want the ZyXEL Device to accept the first or second choice Speaking Volume Control Enter the loudness that the ZyXEL Device uses for speech that it sends to
63. Positioning Antennas In general antennas should be mounted as high as practically possible and free of obstructions In point to point application position both antennas at the same height and in a direct line of sight to each other to attain the best performance For omni directional antennas mounted on a table desk and so on point the antenna up For omni directional antennas mounted on a wall or ceiling point the antenna down For a single AP application place omni directional antennas as close to the center of the coverage area as possible For directional antennas point the antenna in the direction of the desired coverage area WiFi Protected Setup Your ZyXEL Device supports WiFi Protected Setup WPS which is an easy way to set up a secure wireless network WPS is an industry standard specification defined by the WiFi Alliance WPS allows you to quickly set up a wireless network with strong security without having to configure security settings manually Each WPS connection works between two devices Both devices must support WPS check each device s documentation to make sure Depending on the devices you have you can either press a button on the device itself or in its configuration utility or enter a PIN a unique Personal Identification Number that allows one device to authenticate the other in each of the two devices When WPS is activated on a device it has two minutes to find another device that also has WP
64. Printer h Printers and Faxes DER Fie Edit View Favorites Tools Help ay D Piiniers din To 3 Go A p S ga gSa Sa Sa Acrobat Adobe PDF Microsoft Microsoft XPS PRT402 on PDF Writer Office Doc Document aytwpt0l Ba amp See Also PRT4050n WebWorks eytwpt0l Rasterizer Troubleshoot printing Get help with printing Other Places E Control Panel Dy Scanners and Cameras 3 My Documents aA My Pictures y My Computer 2 The Add Printer Wizard screen displays Click Next Add Printer Wizard Welcome to the Add Printer Q Wizard This wizard helps you install a printer or make printer connections O If you have a Plug and Play printer that connects 1 through a USB port for any other hot pluggable port such as IEEE 1394 infrared and so on you do not need to use this wizard Click Cancel to close the wizard and then plug the printer s cable into your computer or point the printer toward your computer s infrared port and turn the printer on Windows will automatically install the printer for you To continue click Next Cancel P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorial 3 Select Local printer attached to this computer and click Next Add Printer Wizard Local or Network Printer The wizard needs to know which type of printer to set up Select the option that describes the printer you want to use printer attached to this computer C Automaticall
65. RJ 45 WAN port PHONE Ports 2 RJ 11 FXS POTS ports RESET Button Restores factory defaults WLAN WPS Button 1 second Turn on or off WLAN 5 seconds Start WPS mounting USB Port Two USB v2 0 ports for file sharing or print server setup Antenna Two 2 dBi external fixed antennas 2 x 2 Operation 02e C 402 C Temperature Storage Temperature 202 602 C Operation Humidity 20 85 RH Storage Humidity 20 90 RH Distance between the 137 20mm centers of the holes for wall mounting on the device s back Screw size for wall M4 tap P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide 279 Chapter 26 Product Specifications Firmware Specifications Table 86 Firmware Specifications Default IP Address 192 168 1 1 Default Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 24 bits Default User Name admin Default Password 1234 DHCP Server IP Pool Starting Address 192 168 1 33 Size 32 Static DHCP 10 Addresses Static Routes 16 Device Management Use the web configurator to easily configure the rich range of features on the ZyXEL Device Wireless Functionality wireless devices only Allow the IEEE 802 11n IEEE 802 11b and or IEEE 802 11g wireless clients to connect to the ZyXEL Device wirelessly Enable wireless security WEP WPA 2 WPA 2 PSK and or MAC filtering to protect your wireless network Firmware Upgrade Download new firmware when
66. Reset Click this to set the fields in this screen to their defaults P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 10 File Sharing P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide 11 1 11 1 1 11 1 2 Media Server Overview The media server feature lets anyone on your network play video music and photos from the USB storage device connected to your ZyXEL Device without having to copy them to another computer The ZyXEL Device can function as a DLNA compliant media server The ZyXEL Device streams files to DLNA compliant media clients like Windows Media Player The Digital Living Network Alliance DLNA is a group of personal computer and electronics companies that works to make products compatible in a home network What You Can Do Use the Media Server screen Section 11 2 on page 194 to enable or disable the sharing of media files What You Need to Know in this Chapter The ZyXEL Device media server enables you to e Publish all shares for everyone to play media files in the USB storage device connected to the ZyXEL Device e Use hardware based media clients like the DMA 2500 to play the files Note Anyone on your network can play the media files in the published shares No user name and password or other form of security is used The media server is enabled by default with the video photo and music shares published P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 11 Media Server 11 2 The Media Server Screen To c
67. See Section 9 4 on page 169 for how to map a SIP account to a phone port Use this screen to maintain basic information about each SIP account You can also enable and disable each SIP account configure the volume echo cancellation and VAD Voice Activity Detection settings for each individual phone port on the ZyXEL Device Voice Activity Detection Silence Suppression Voice Activity Detection VAD detects whether or not speech is present This lets the ZyXEL Device reduce the bandwidth that a call uses by not transmitting silent packets when you are not speaking Comfort Noise Generation When using VAD the ZyXEL Device generates comfort noise when the other party is not speaking The comfort noise lets you know that the line is still connected as total silence could easily be mistaken for a lost connection Echo Cancellation G 168 is an ITU T standard for eliminating the echo caused by the sound of your voice reverberating in the telephone receiver while you talk To access this screen click Vol P gt SIP gt SIP Account P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 9 Voice Note Click Advanced to see all the fields in the screen You don t necessarily need to use all these fields to set up your account Click Basic to see and configure only the fields needed for this feature Figure 49 VoIP gt SIP gt SIP Account Advanced SIP Account Selection SIP Account Selection SIP1 General I Active SIP
68. Status This field displays whether the client is connected to the ZyXEL Device Host Name This field displays the computer host name IP Address This field displays the IP address relative to the field listed above MAC Address The MAC Media Access Control or Ethernet address on a LAN Local Area Network is unique to your computer six pairs of hexadecimal notation A network interface card such as an Ethernet adapter has a hardwired address that is assigned at the factory This address follows an industry standard that ensures no other adapter has a similar address Reserve Select the check box in the heading row to automatically select all check boxes or select the check box es in each entry to have the ZyXEL Device always assign the selected entry ies s IP address es to the corresponding MAC address es and host name s You can select up to 128 entries in this table Apply Click this to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device Reset Click this to begin configuring this screen afresh Refresh Click this to reload the DHCP table P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 4 Status Screens 4 3 WLAN Client List Click Status gt WLAN Status to access this screen Use this screen to view the wireless stations that are currently associated to the ZyXEL Device Figure 10 WLAN Status Association List Set MAc Address Association Time set MAC Address Association Time 1 33 2
69. Strong Strong Strong Moderate Deployment Difficulty Easy Hard Moderate Moderate Moderate Client Identity No No Yes Yes No Protection WPA and WPA2 Wi Fi Protected Access WPA is a subset of the IEEE 802 11i standard WPA2 IEEE 802 11i is a wireless security standard that defines stronger encryption authentication and key management than WPA Key differences between WPA or WPA2 and WEP are improved data encryption and user authentication If both an AP and the wireless clients support WPA2 and you have an external RADIUS server use WPA2 for stronger data encryption If you don t have an external RADIUS server you should use WPA2 PSK WPA2 Pre Shared Key that only requires a single identical password entered into each access point wireless gateway and wireless client As long as the passwords match a wireless client will be granted access to a WLAN P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs If the AP or the wireless clients do not support WPA2 just use WPA or WPA PSK depending on whether you have an external RADIUS server or not Select WEP only when the AP and or wireless clients do not support WPA or WPA2 WEP is less secure than WPA or WPA2 Encryption Both WPA and WPA2 improve data encryption by using Temporal Key Integrity Protocol TKIP Message Integrity Check MIC and IEEE 802 1x WPA and WPA2 use Advanced Encryption Standard AES in the Counter mode with Cipher block chaining Me
70. Tutorial 1 Open the Network gt Wireless LAN gt General screen in the AP s web configurator Wireless Setup M Enable Wireless LAN I multiple SSID SSID1 ESD _Exampie3 I Hide sID SSID2 I Enable I Hide SSID SSID3 I Enable I Hide SSID SSID4 yXEL_RT3062_AP4 T Enable I Hide SSID Mode Select 802 11big z Channel Selection Cranners zi Scan Operating Channel 1 q Note 1 If you set Channel Selection to Auto channel scanning can take some time Advanced Apply Reset 2 Make sure Active Wireless LAN is selected 3 Enter SSID_Example3 as the SSID and select a channel which is not used by another AP 4 Select 802 11b g in the Mode Select field Click Apply 5 Open Network gt Wireless LAN gt Security Set security mode to WPA PSK and enter ThisismyWPA PSKpre sharedkey in the Pre Shared Key field Click Apply oe ae Security Setup SSID SSID1 SSID_Example3 Security Mode naps x Pre Shared Key ThisismyWWPA PSKpre sharedkey Encryption Type TKIPAES Mx Apply Reset P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorial 6 Open the Status screen Verify your wireless and wireless security settings under Device Information and check if the WLAN connection is up under Interface Status ZyXEL Refresh Interval None iy Refresh Now Host Name P 2612HNU FL System Uptime 1 01 Model Name P 2612HNU F1 Current Date Time Wed Jan 20 03 58 10 CET 2010
71. USB Services gt File Sharing gt Share Configuration Add LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click this button to save your settings Cancel Click this button to return all fields in this screen to their previous values 10 2 1 1 Share Configuration Browse Screen To select the file path for the share directory click Browse in the previous screen Figure 60 USB Services gt File Sharing gt Share Configuration Browse Share Browser Volume O0004006DCA_1 Name amp ea O G Lei Cancel NA 2009 09 18 02 25 50 Each field is described in the following table Table 46 USB Services gt File Sharing gt Share Configuration Browse LABEL DESCRIPTION Volume Name This shows the volume in the USB storage device that was added as a share in the ZyXEL Device The table below shows the folders that are currently in the USB storage device that you have connected to the ZyXEL Device Select Click the folder that you want to add as a share in the ZyXEL Device Type This shows an icon representing the folders in the USB storage device Name This displays the name of the folder in the current directory of the connected USB storage device Click on a folder name to add that folder to the directory path for the share shows the current directory of the USB storage device Date This shows the date when the folder was last available Apply Click this button
72. VC based multiplexing may be dominant in environments where dynamic creation of large numbers of ATM VCs is fast and economical LLC based Multiplexing In this case one VC carries multiple protocols with protocol identifying information being contained in each packet header Despite the extra bandwidth and processing overhead this method may be advantageous if it is not practical to have a separate VC for each carried protocol for example if charging heavily depends on the number of simultaneous VCs Traffic Shaping Traffic Shaping is an agreement between the carrier and the subscriber to regulate the average rate and fluctuations of data transmission over an ATM network This agreement helps eliminate congestion which is important for transmission of real time data such as audio and video connections Peak Cell Rate PCR is the maximum rate at which the sender can send cells This parameter may be lower but not higher than the maximum line speed 1 ATM cell is 53 bytes 424 bits so a maximum speed of 832Kbps gives a maximum PCR of 1962 cells sec This rate is not guaranteed because it is dependent on the line speed Sustained Cell Rate SCR is the mean cell rate of each bursty traffic source It specifies the maximum average rate at which cells can be sent over the virtual connection SCR may not be greater than the PCR Maximum Burst Size MBS is the maximum number of cells that can be sent at the PCR After MBS is reached c
73. WAN Setup Summary Make sure that the settings below match the settings provided by your ISP Pie ea pppoe Service Name pppoe_2_1_1 IP Address 192 168 1 32 NAT Enabled pen a ater ca Enabled Click Save to apply this interface Click Back to modify the settings Back Save P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide 37 Chapter 3 Tutorial Click Save to start using your settings Try to connect to a website such as zyxel com to see if you have correctly set up your Internet connection Be sure to contact your service provider for any information you need to configure the WAN screens 3 3 How to Set up a Wireless Network This section gives you examples of how to set up an access point and wireless client for wireless communication using the following parameters The wireless clients can access the Internet through the ZyXEL Device wirelessly 3 3 1 Example Parameters SSID SSID_Example3 Security WPA PSK Pre Shared Key ThisismyWPA PSKpre sharedkey 802 11 mode 802 11b g An access point AP or wireless router is referred to as the AP and a computer with a wireless network card or USB adapter is referred to as the wireless client here The M 302 utility screens are used here as an example The screens may vary slightly for different models 3 3 2 Configuring the AP Follow the steps below to configure the wireless settings on your AP P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 3
74. With a Registered SIP Account To use a registered SIP account you should have applied for a SIP account with the VoIP service provider 3 5 1 1 SIP Account Registration Follow the steps below to register and activate your SIP account 1 Make sure your ZyXEL Device is connected to the Internet 2 Open the web configurator P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorial 3 Go to the Status screen to check if your SIP account has been registered successfully If registration failed check your Internet connection and click Register to register your SIP account again Registration Status P SIP 1 UnRegister On Register 7511097781 example com Register In Active ChangeMe example com 3 5 1 2 Analog Phone Configuration 1 Click VoIP gt Phone to open the Analog Phone screen 2 Select Phonel to configure the first phone port 3 Select SIP1 from the SIP Account drop down list box in the SIP Account to Make Outgoing Call section to have the phone connected to the first phone port use the registered SIP1 account to make outgoing calls 4 Select the SIP1 check box in the SIP Account s to Receive Incoming Call section to have the phone connected to the first phone port receive phone calls for the SIP1 account 5 Click Apply to save your changes Analog Phone Region Phone Port Selection Phone Port Selection Phonet x SIP Account to Make Outgoing Call SIP Account Association SIP Number Er 7
75. add the port to the Blocked Services field A custom port is a service that is not available in the pre defined Available Services list You must define it using the Type and Port Number fields See Appendix E on page 369 for some examples of services Blocked This is a list of services ports that are inaccessible to computers on Services your LAN when service blocking is effective To remove a service from this list select the service and click Delete Type Select TCP UDP or TCP and UDP based on which one the custom port uses Port Number Enter the range of port numbers that defines the service For example suppose you want to define the Gnutella service Select TCP type and enter a port range of 6345 6349 P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 14 Firewall 14 3 14 3 1 14 3 2 Table 54 Security gt Firewall LABEL DESCRIPTION Add Click this to add the selected service in Available Services to the Blocked Services list Note that the service is blocked immediately after clicking this Delete Select a service in the Blocked Services and click this to remove the service from the list Clear All Click this to remove all the services in the Blocked Services list Apply Click this to enable LAN to WAN services blocking Reset Click this to set every field in this screen to its last saved value Firewall Technical Reference This section provides some technical background informatio
76. asked to confirm this action P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 10 File Sharing 10 3 1 Account Management Add or Edit Screen Use the following screens to add or edit a user account To access these screens click Advanced gt File Sharing gt User Configuration and click the Add button or the Edit icon in the Modify column or the Add button Figure 63 USB Services gt File Sharing gt Account Management gt Add Account Management Add User User Name 5 to 15 characters Password 5 to 15 characters Retype Password 5 to 15 characters Apply Cancel Figure 64 USB Services gt File Sharing gt Account Management gt Edit Account Management Modify User User Name New Password 5 to 15 characters Retype New Password 5 to 15 characters Apply Cancel Each field is described in the following table Table 49 USB Services gt File Sharing gt Account Management gt Add Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION User Name This field is not configurable if you click the Edit icon in the Modify column to configure an existing user account Enter the user name of the account The user name can be 5 to 15 alpha numeric characters long New Password Enter the password for this account The password can be 5 to 15 Password alpha numeric characters long Retype New Retype the password Password Retype Password Apply Click this to save your changes to the ZyXEL Device
77. at 16 24 32 or 40 kbps e G 729 is an Analysis by Synthesis AbS hybrid waveform codec that uses a filter based on information about how the human vocal tract produces sounds G 729 provides good sound quality and reduces the required bandwidth to 8 kbps P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide 177 Chapter 9 Voice PSTN Call Setup Signaling Dual Tone MultiFrequency DTMF signaling uses pairs of frequencies one lower frequency and one higher frequency to set up calls It is also Known as Touch Tone Each of the keys on a DTMF telephone corresponds to a different pair of frequencies Pulse dialing sends a series of clicks to the local phone office in order to dial numbers MWI Message Waiting Indication Enable Message Waiting Indication MWI enables your phone to give you a message waiting beeping dial tone when you have a voice message s Your VoIP service provider must have a messaging system that sends message waiting status SIP packets as defined in RFC 3842 9 7 3 Quality of Service QoS Quality of Service QoS refers to both a network s ability to deliver data with minimum delay and the networking methods used to provide bandwidth for real time multimedia applications Type of Service ToS Network traffic can be classified by setting the ToS Type of Service values at the data source for example at the ZyXEL Device so a server can decide the best method of delivery that is the least cost fastest ro
78. automatically prefixes the translated number 1212 to the number you dialed before making the call This can be used for local calls in the US 9 Xxx XXxXxXxxx means the ZyXEL Device automatically removes the specified prefix 9 from the number you dialed before making the call This is always used for making outside calls from an office xx 123 456 xxxx means the ZyXEL Device automatically translates 123 to 456 in the number you dialed before making the call Calls with a number followed by the exclamation mark will be dropped Calls with a number followed by the termination character will be made immediately Any digit O 9 after the character will be ignored In this example dial plan 0 49 11 1 2 9 xx xxxxxxx 1 947 xxxxxxx you can dial 0 to call the local operator call 411 or 911 or make a long distance call with an area code starting from 2 to 9 in the US The calls with the area code 947 will be dropped P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 9 Voice 9 3 The SIP Account Screen The ZyXEL Device uses a SIP account to make outgoing VoIP calls and check if an incoming call s destination number matches your SIP account s SIP number In order to make or receive a VoIP call you need to enable and configure a SIP account and map it to a phone port The SIP account contains information that allows your ZyXEL Device to connect to your VoIP service provider
79. bandwidth and giving priority to certain types of traffic and or to particular computers Remote Management This allows you to decide whether a service HTTP or FTP traffic for example from a computer on a network LAN or WAN for example can access the ZyXEL Device PPPoE Support RFC2516 PPPoE Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet emulates a dial up connection It allows your ISP to use their existing network configuration with newer broadband technologies such as ADSL The PPPoE driver on your device is transparent to the computers on the LAN which see only Ethernet and are not aware of PPPoE thus saving you from having to manage PPPoE clients on individual computers Other PPPoE Features PPPoE idle time out PPPoE dial on demand Multiple PVC Permanent Virtual Circuits Support Your device supports one Permanent Virtual Circuits PVCs Packet Filters Your device s packet filtering function allows added network security and management P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 26 Product Specifications Table 86 Firmware Specifications continued ADSL Standards Support ITU G 992 1 G dmt EOC specified in ITU T G 992 1 ADSL2 G dmt bis G 992 3 ADSL 2 2 AnnexM ADSL2 G 992 5 Reach Extended ADSL RE ADSL SRA Seamless Rate Adaptation Auto negotiating rate adaptation ADSL physical connection AAL5 ATM Adaptation Layer type 5 Multi protocol over AAL5 RFC 2684
80. below then wireless devices never have to get permission to send information to the ZyXEL Device Authentication The process of verifying whether a wireless device is allowed to use the wireless network Fragmentation Threshold A small fragmentation threshold is recommended for busy networks while a larger threshold provides faster performance if the network is not very busy Refer to Appendix D on page 345 for more information P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Network Address Translation NAT 8 1 Overview NAT Network Address Translation NAT RFC 1631 is the translation of the IP address of a host in a packet for example the source address of an outgoing packet used within one network to a different IP address known within another network 8 1 1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the Port Forwarding screen Section 8 2 on page 150 to configure forward incoming service requests to the server s on your local network 8 1 2 What You Need To Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read this chapter Inside Outside and Global Local Inside outside denotes where a host is located relative to the ZyXEL Device for example the computers of your subscribers are the inside hosts while the web servers on the Internet are the outside hosts Global local denotes the IP address of a host in a packet as the packet traverses a router for example the local address refers to the IP a
81. blink and then release it When the POWER LED begins to blink the defaults have been restored and the device restarts 1 7 The WPS WLAN Button Use the WPS WLAN button O on the top of the device to turn the wireless LAN off or on You can also use it to activate WPS in order to quickly set up a wireless network with strong security Make sure the POWER LED is on not blinking before using the WLAN button e Press the WLAN button for one second and release it The WLAN LED should change from on to off or vice versa e Press the WLAN button for five seconds to turn on WPS See Section 7 5 on page 143 for more on using WPS to configure your wireless clients P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Introducing the Web Configurator 2 1 Overview The web configurator is an HTML based management interface that allows easy device setup and management via Internet browser Use Internet Explorer 6 0 and later or Netscape Navigator 7 0 and later versions The recommended screen resolution is 1024 by 768 pixels In order to use the web configurator you need to allow e Web browser pop up windows from your device Web pop up blocking is enabled by default in Windows XP SP Service Pack 2 e JavaScripts enabled by default e Java permissions enabled by default See Appendix C on page 335 if you need to make sure these functions are allowed in Internet Explorer 2 1 1 Accessing the Web Configurator Make sure your ZyXEL Device hardwa
82. both FTP and web service it might be better to specify a range of port numbers You can allocate a server IP address that corresponds to a port or a range of ports The most often used port numbers and services are shown in Appendix E on page 369 Please refer to RFC 1700 for further information about port numbers Note Many residential broadband ISP accounts do not allow you to run any server processes such as a Web or FTP server from your location Your ISP may periodically check for servers and may suspend your account if it discovers any active services at your location If you are unsure refer to your ISP Configuring Servers Behind Port Forwarding Example Let s say you want to assign ports 21 25 to one FTP Telnet and SMTP server A in the example port 80 to another B in the example and assign a default server IP address of 192 168 1 35 to a third C in the example You assign the LAN IP P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 8 Network Address Translation NAT addresses and the ISP assigns the WAN IP address The NAT network appears as a single host on the Internet Figure 44 Multiple Servers Behind NAT Example A 192 168 1 33 LAN WAN nee ne te IP Address assigned by ISP C 192 168 1 35 D 192 168 1 36 8 2 1 Configuring the Port Forwarding Screen Click Network gt NAT gt Port Forwarding to open the following screen See Appendix E on page 369 for port numbers commonly used for particular services
83. bro IP Address NAT Disabled ste TEE Disabled Click Save to apply this interface Click Back to modify the settings Back Save The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 18 Network gt WAN gt Internet Connection Bridging LABEL DESCRIPTION Connection Type This is the encapsulation method used by this connection Service Name This is the name of the service IP Address This shows whether the WAN IP address is assigned by the ISP manually configured or not configurable NAT This shows whether NAT is active or not for this connection IGMP Multicast This shows whether IGMP multicasting is active or not for this connection Back Click this button to return to the previous screen Save Click this button to save your changes P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide a1 Chapter 5 WAN Setup 5 3 1 4 Routing and DNS Server Click Next in the screens shown in Section 5 3 1 3 on page 107 This screen shows for both Ethernet and DSL WAN interfaces except when you select Bridging as a service type Note If you configure only one IPoA connection using the ATM interface on the ZyXEL Device you must enter the static DNS server address Figure 26 Network gt WAN gt Internet Connection PPPoE PPPOA IPoE or IPoA Primary DNS server Routing Default Gateway and Default DNS Server Select a preferred WAN interface as the system default gateway and defau
84. button press the WLAN button for one second to turn the WLAN on or turn off five seconds to turn on WPS IEEE 802 11i IEEE 802 11e Wired Equivalent Privacy WEP Data Encryption 64 128 256 bit WLAN bridge to LAN Up to 32 MAC Address filters IEEE 802 1x External RADIUS server using EAP MD5 TLS TTLS Scheduling lets you set when the WLAN is on The following list which is not exhaustive illustrates the standards supported in the ZyXEL Device Table 89 Standards Supported STANDARD DESCRIPTION RFC 867 Daytime Protocol RFC 868 Time Protocol RFC 1058 RIP 1 Routing Information Protocol RFC 1112 IGMP v1 RFC 1157 SNMPv1 Simple Network Management Protocol version 1 RFC 1305 Network Time Protocol NTP version 3 RFC 1441 SNMPv2 Simple Network Management Protocol version 2 RFC 1483 Multiprotocol Encapsulation over ATM Adaptation Layer 5 RFC 1631 IP Network Address Translator NAT RFC 1661 The Point to Point Protocol PPP RFC 1723 RIP 2 Routing Information Protocol RFC 1901 SNMPv2c Simple Network Management Protocol version 2c RFC 2236 Internet Group Management Protocol Version 2 RFC 2364 PPP over AAL5 PPP over ATM over ADSL P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 26 Product Specifications Table 89 Standards Supported continued STANDARD DESCRIPTION RFC 2408 Internet Security Association and Key Man
85. client device that originally sent the request can send requests to the IP address that it received back from the redirect server Redirect servers do not initiate SIP requests In the following example you want to use client device A to call someone who is using client device C 1 Client device A sends a call invitation for C to the SIP redirect server B 2 The SIP redirect server sends the invitation back to A with C s IP address or domain name P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide 1 75 Chapter 9 Voice 3 Client device A then sends the call invitation to client device C Figure 55 SIP Redirect Server AED ip C SIP Register Server A SIP register server maintains a database of SIP identity to IP address or domain name mapping The register server checks your user name and password when you register RTP When you make a VoIP call using SIP the RTP Real time Transport Protocol is used to handle voice data transfer See RFC 1889 for details on RTP Pulse Code Modulation Pulse Code Modulation PCM measures analog signal amplitudes at regular time intervals and converts them into bits SIP Call Progression The following figure displays the basic steps in the setup and tear down of a SIP call A calls B Table 42 SIP Call Progression A B 1 INVITE M lt ____ 2 Ringing 4 3 OK 4 ACK _______ gt 176 P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter
86. contain letters Once you have configured a speed dial rule you can use a shortcut the speed dial number 01 for example on your phone s keypad to call the phone number 170 P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 9 Voice To access this screen click VolP gt Phonebook gt Speed Dial Figure 52 VoIP gt Phone Book gt Speed Dial Speed Dial Speed Dial Phone Book 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 tact he esecintion an EAE lodify amp ti Egu amp ti amp ti Efn EAn Egu EAn Egni Egu Clear Cancel Each field is described in the following table Table 41 VolP gt Phone Book gt Speed Dial LABEL DESCRIPTION Speed Dial Use this section to create or edit speed dial entries Select the speed dial number you want to use for this phone number Number Enter the SIP number you want the ZyXEL Device to call when you dial the speed dial number Description Enter a short description to identify the party you call when you dial the speed dial number You can use up to 127 printable ASCII characters Add Click this to use the information in the Speed Dial section to update the Speed Dial Phone Book section Phone Book Use this section to look at all the speed dial entries and to erase them This field displays the speed dial number you should dial to use this entry Number This field displays the SIP number the ZyXEL Device ca
87. decrypt data on a Wi Fi network than WEP and difficult for an intruder to break into the network The encryption mechanisms used for WPA 2 and WPA 2 PSK are the same The only difference between the two is that WPA 2 PSK uses a simple common password instead of user specific credentials The common password approach makes WPA 2 PSK susceptible to brute force password guessing attacks but it s still an improvement over WEP as it employs a consistent single alphanumeric password to derive a PMK which is used to generate unique temporal encryption P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide 355 Appendix D Wireless LANs keys This prevent all wireless devices sharing the same encryption keys a weakness of WEP User Authentication WPA and WPA2 apply IEEE 802 1x and Extensible Authentication Protocol EAP to authenticate wireless clients using an external RADIUS database WPA2 reduces the number of key exchange messages from six to four CCMP 4 way handshake and shortens the time required to connect to a network Other WPA2 authentication features that are different from WPA include key caching and pre authentication These two features are optional and may not be supported in all wireless devices Key caching allows a wireless client to store the PMK it derived through a successful authentication with an AP The wireless client uses the PMK when it tries to connect to the same AP and does not need to go with the authentication proces
88. derivative or collective works based on the Library In addition mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library with the Library or with a work based on the Library on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License 3 You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public License instead of this License to a given copy of the Library To do this you must alter all the notices that refer to this License so that they refer to the ordinary GNU General Public License version 2 instead of to this License If a newer version than version 2 of the ordinary GNU General Public License has appeared then you can specify that version instead if you wish Do not make any other change in these notices Once this change is made in a given copy it is irreversible for that copy so the ordinary GNU General Public License applies to all subsequent copies and derivative works made from that copy This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of the Library into a program that is not a library 4 You may copy and distribute the Library or a portion or derivative of it under Section 2 in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you accompany it with the complete corresponding machine readable source code which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software int
89. determines the forwarding behavior the PHB Per Hop Behavior that each packet gets across the DiffServ network Based on the marking rule different kinds of traffic can be marked for different priorities of forwarding Resources can then be allocated according to the DSCP values and the configured policies VLAN Tagging Virtual Local Area Network VLAN allows a physical network to be partitioned into multiple logical networks Only stations within the same group can communicate with each other Your ZyXEL Device can add IEEE 802 1Q VLAN ID tags to voice frames that it sends to the network This allows the ZyXEL Device to communicate with a SIP server that is a member of the same VLAN group Some ISPs use the VLAN tag to identify voice traffic and give it priority over other traffic 9 7 4 Phone Services Overview Supplementary services such as call hold call waiting and call transfer are generally available from your VoIP service provider The ZyXEL Device supports the following services e Call Hold e Call Waiting e Making a Second Call e Call Transfer e Three Way Conference P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide 1 79 Chapter 9 Voice e Internal Calls e Call Park and Pickup e Do not Disturb Note To take full advantage of the supplementary phone services available through the ZyXEL Device s phone ports you may need to subscribe to the services from your VoIP service provider The Flash Key Flashing means to press
90. diagnostic or routing purposes ICQ UDP 4000 This is a popular Internet chat program IGMP User Defined 2 Internet Group Management Protocol MULTI CAST is used when sending packets to a specific group of hosts IKE UDP 500 The Internet Key Exchange algorithm is used for key distribution and management IRC TCP UDP 6667 This is another popular Internet chat program MSN Messenger TCP 1863 Microsoft Networks messenger service uses this protocol NEW ICQ TCP 5190 An Internet chat program NEWS TCP 144 A protocol for news groups NFS UDP 2049 Network File System NFS is a client server distributed file service that provides transparent file sharing for network environments NNTP TCP 119 Network News Transport Protocol is the delivery mechanism for the USENET newsgroup service PING User Defined 1 Packet INternet Groper is a protocol that sends out ICMP echo requests to test whether or not a remote host is reachable POP3 TCP 110 Post Office Protocol version 3 lets a client computer get e mail from a POP3 server through a temporary connection TCP IP or other P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Appendix E Common Services Table 105 Commonly Used Services continued NAME PROTOCOL PORT S DESCRIPTION PPTP TCP 1723 Point to Point Tunneling Protocol enables secure transfer of data over public networks This is the control channel PPTP_
91. different BSSs If two stations have different SSIDs but have the same WEP keys they may hear each other s communications but not communicate with each other Radio Channels In the radio spectrum there are certain frequency bands allocated for unlicensed civilian use For the purposes of wireless networking these bands are divided into numerous channels This allows a variety of networks to exist in the same place without interfering with one another When you create a network you must select a channel to use Since the available unlicensed spectrum varies from one country to another the number of available channels also varies Wireless Security By their nature radio communications are simple to intercept For wireless data networks this means that anyone within range of a wireless network without P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide 131 Chapter 7 Wireless LAN security can not only read the data passing over the airwaves but also join the network Once an unauthorized person has access to the network s he can either steal information or introduce malware malicious software intended to compromise the network For these reasons a variety of security systems have been developed to ensure that only authorized people can use a wireless data network or understand the data carried on it These security standards do two things First they authenticate This means that only people presenting the right credentials often a
92. eRe Mice Meee RPM eee Mem eer REM een emo rere ret ee 157 9 41 1 Whal You Can Do in this Chapter csicosccascacsarcegeesncviaanttacsincasde ae Ea 157 aTe ea EN Te EO a 158 ALS BEDO VOU EOT seren a a E 159 9 2 The SIP Senice Provider SCRE secssccceeceeesciconsmciteanindaiorondene saa dacededauseniniesdaudensaceeaetedas 159 Sa DA aE srna a a a 163 go TNE SIP Account Sredi isoremora E 165 wa The Analog Phone SOCON scatecncescpesencaetasntacatevencdss ea A a 169 g5 The Phone Region SGrGei onaniaa aa anaa aa ERa 170 96 The Speed Dial Seal unnan n a 170 9 7 SIP Technical Reference oecssonnsnsnssimsoniiiii nian tM nItieH HuNIERE aa 172 A E EN E E P T A A A E A T E A ani saiaiaaninaiianes 172 Fe SOUP eta E E E E E E E E E E E E eens 172 SMe Qushi epee bg JOS saa E E rer rrerrrrr tery 178 9 74 Phone Services Ovaro seas cncidd ccccncicseaacrsassieeenoncaxenetn eapasesaed AEEA RA 179 Chapter 10 EU e E E E E niin A E deedateecetecectandecle 183 TO Ce TA o nines Mame Nea ENN MeN 183 10 1 1 What You Can Do ti this Chapter sccenncciseseciese teak iisuteicucs woslaasearanes senda denier neti as 183 101 2 What You Need to KNOW cccsscncdecscasondccciasernatetoameccdersaneesceeratarnenadammndnincmumnaeasanunbace 184 PO Eob TU GSCI costana iran mines ioxaeatiimaxdyynacagay LNexxSeinNs 184 10 2 The Share Coniiguralion Sareat faces esccsig soiaxcccinesdaccduuhaavigcergenaxeagereeinedseiacaiadacbemncegueeld 185 102 1 Share Contiguration Add SOGN fo ccsicccaitssecctiseteeac
93. for which the ZyXEL Device is well suited P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 1 Introducing the ZyXEL Device 1 2 1 Internet Access Your ZyXEL Device provides shared Internet access by connecting the DSL port to the DSL or MODEM jack on a splitter or your telephone jack If you prefer not to use a DSL line and you have another broadband modem or router such as ADSL available you can push the DSL WAN switch on the rear panel to the WAN side and connect the WAN port to the broadband modem or router This way you can access the Internet via an Ethernet connection and still use the QoS Firewall and VoIP functions on the ZyXEL Device Computers can connect to the ZyXEL Device s LAN ports or wirelessly Figure 1 ZyXEL Device s Internet Access Application WAN fers You can also configure firewall on the ZyXEL Device for secure Internet access When the firewall is on all incoming traffic from the Internet to your network is blocked unless it is initiated from your network This means that probes from the outside to your network are not allowed but you can safely browse the Internet and download files Bridging ADSL only IPoE IPoA PPPoE PPPoA ADSL Ethernet Use QoS to efficiently manage traffic on your network by giving priority to certain types of traffic and or to particular computers For example you could make sure that the ZyXEL Device gives voice over Internet calls high priority and or lim
94. given a distinguishing version number If the Program specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and any later version you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation If the P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Appendix F Open Software Announcements Program does not specify a version number of this License you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation 10 If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution conditions are different write to the author to ask for permission For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation write to the Free Software Foundation we sometimes make exceptions for this Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally NO WARRANTY 11 BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FORA PARTICULAR PURPOSE THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANC
95. hour You also upload data files such as logs and e mail archives to the FTP server throughout the day Your colleagues use the Internet for research as well as chat applications for communicating with other branch offices In the following figure your Internet connection has an upstream transmission bandwidth of 10 000 kbps For this example you want to configure QoS so that e mail traffic gets the highest priority with at least 5 000 kbps You can do the following e Configure a queue to assign the highest priority queue 7 to e mail traffic from the LAN interface so that e mail traffic would not get delayed when there is network congestion e Note the IP address 192 168 1 23 for example and or MAC address AA FF AA FF AA FF for example of your computer and map it to queue 7 Note QoS is applied to traffic flowing out of the ZyXEL Device Traffic that does not match this class is assigned a priority queue based on the internal QoS mapping table on the ZyXEL Device ZyXEL Device DSL 10 000 kbps Your computer IP 192 168 1 23 and or MAC AA FF AA FF AA FF 4 E mail Queue 7 A colleague s computer Other traffic Automatic classifier P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorial Click Advanced gt QoS gt General and check Active Set your WAN Managed Upstream Bandwidth to 10 000 kbps or leave this blank to have the ZyXEL Device automatically determine this figure General MV ac
96. if you want to lessen radio interference with other wireless devices in your neighborhood Apply Click this to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device Reset Click this to reload the previous configuration for this screen 7 3 The Security Screens Use this screen to set up wireless security of your ZyXEL Device Click Network gt Wireless LAN gt Security to open the following screen The screen varies depending on the wireless security you select Figure 35 Network gt Wireless LAN gt Security Security Setup SSID Security Mode q Note Please select AES as Encryption Mode if you want to access N mode WLAN Select TKIP as Encryption Mode might cause you access b g mode WLAN SSID1 SSID_Example3 v No Security M Zo P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 25 Network gt Wireless LAN gt Security LABEL DESCRIPTION SSID Select the SSID security profile you want to configure Security Mode Select Static WEP Shared WEP WPA PSK WPA2 PSK WPA or WPA2 to add security on this wireless network The wireless clients which want to associate to this network must have same wireless security settings as this device After you select to use a security additional options appears in this screen See 7 3 2 7 3 3 7 3 4 sections Or you can select No Security to allow any clien
97. interface this field displays Down line is down Up line is up or connected if you re using Ethernet encapsulation and Down line is down Up line is up or connected Idle line ppp idle Dial starting to trigger a call and Drop dropping a call if you re using PPPoE encapsulation For the WAN interface this field displays Up when the ZyXEL Device is using the interface and Down when the ZyXEL Device is not using the interface For the LAN interface this field displays Up when the ZyXEL Device is using the interface and Down when the ZyXEL Device is not using the interface For the WLAN interface it displays Active when WLAN is enabled or InActive when WLAN is disabled Speed For the LAN interface this displays the port speed and duplex setting For the WAN interface this displays the port speed and duplex setting For the DSL interface it displays the downstream and upstream transmission rate For the WLAN interface it displays the maximum transmission rate when WLAN is enabled or N A when WLAN is disabled Summary DHCP Client List Click this link to view current DHCP client information See Section 6 4 on page 124 WLAN Client List Click this link to display the MAC address es of the wireless stations that are currently associating with the ZyXEL Device See Section 4 2 on page 90 VoIP Status Click this link to view statistics about your VolP usage See Section 4 5 on page 93
98. key and leave the encryption type at the default setting Security settings E gt Encryption Type reir bi ThisismyWPA PSKpre sharedkey gt Pre Shared Key Back Next Exit 6 Inthe next screen leave both boxes selected Wireless Protocol Settings z M 802 11b M 802 119 Back Next Exit P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorial 7 10 11 Verify the profile settings in the read only screen Click Save to save and go to the next screen onfirm Save gt Network Name SSID SSID_Example3 gt Network Type Infrastructure gt Network Mode 802 11b q gt Channel Auto gt Security WPA PSK Back Save Exit Click Activate Now to use the new profile immediately Otherwise click the Activate Later button If you clicked Activate Later you can select the profile from the list in the Profile screen and click Connect to activate it Note Only one profile can be activated and used at any given time 0 Your network has been configured successfully Activate Now Activate Later When you activate the new profile the ZyXEL utility returns to the Link Info screen while it connects to the AP using your settings When the wireless link is established the ZyXEL utility icon in the system tray turns green and the Link Info screen displays details of the active connection Open your Internet browser enter http www
99. mode the WMM feature is turned on by default Apply P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 29 Network gt Wireless LAN gt QoS LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable WMM of Check this to have the ZyXEL Device automatically give a service a SSID1 4 priority level according to the ToS value in the IP header of packets it sends WMM QoS Wifi MultiMedia Quality of Service gives high priority to voice and video which makes them run more smoothly Enable WMM Click this to increase battery life for battery powered wireless clients Automatic APSD uses a longer beacon interval when transmitting traffic that does Power Save not require a short packet exchange interval Deliver APSD Apply Click this to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device 7 5 WPS Use this screen to configure WiFi Protected Setup WPS on your ZyXEL Device WPS allows you to quickly set up a wireless network with strong security without having to configure security settings manually Set up each WPS connection between two devices Both devices must support WPS See Appendix D on page 345 for more information about WPS Note The ZyXEL Device applies the security settings of the SSID1 profile see Section 7 2 on page 133 If you want to use the WPS feature make sure you have set the security mode of SSID1 to WPA PSK WPA2 PSK or No Security P 2
100. multiple logical networks Devices on a logical network belong to one group A device can belong to more than one group With VLAN a device cannot directly talk to or hear from devices that are not in the same group s the traffic must first go through a router In Multi Tenant Unit MTU applications VLAN is vital in providing isolation and security among the subscribers When properly configured VLAN prevents one subscriber from accessing the network resources of another on the same LAN thus a user will not see the printers and hard disks of another user in the same building VLAN also increases network performance by limiting broadcasts to a smaller and more manageable logical broadcast domain In traditional switched environments all broadcast packets go to each and every individual port With VLAN all broadcasts are confined to a specific broadcast domain Introduction to IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN A tagged VLAN uses an explicit tag VLAN ID in the MAC header to identify the VLAN membership of a frame across bridges they are not confined to the switch on which they were created The VLANs can be created statically by hand or dynamically through GVRP The VLAN ID associates a frame with a specific VLAN and provides the information that switches need to process the frame across the network A tagged frame is four bytes longer than an untagged frame and contains two bytes of TPID Tag Protocol Identifier residing within the type lengt
101. navigation panel then the Log sub menu and finally the Log Setting tab to get to that screen e Units of measurement may denote the metric value or the scientific value For example k for kilo may denote 1000 or 1024 M for mega may denote 1000000 or 1048576 and so on e e g is a Shorthand for for instance and i e means that is or in other words P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide 5 Document Conventions Icons Used in Figures Figures in this User s Guide may use the following generic icons The ZyXEL Device icon is not an exact representation of your device ZyXEL Device Computer Notebook computer Server DSLAM Telephone Switch Router J o 5 6 P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Safety Warnings Safety Warnings e Do NOT use this product near water for example in a wet basement or near a swimming pool Do NOT expose your device to dampness dust or corrosive liquids Do NOT store things on the device e Do NOT install use or service this device during a thunderstorm There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning e Connect ONLY suitable accessories to the device Do NOT open the device or unit Opening or removing covers can expose you to dangerous high voltage points or other risks ONLY qualified service personnel should service or disassemble this device Please contact y
102. only numerical parameters data structure layouts and accessors and small macros and small inline functions ten lines or less in length then the use of the object file is unrestricted regardless of whether it is legally a derivative work Executables containing this object code plus portions of the Library will still fall under Section 6 Otherwise if the work is a derivative of the Library you may distribute the object code for the work under the terms of Section 6 Any executables containing that work also fall under Section 6 whether or not they are linked directly with the Library itself 6 As an exception to the Sections above you may also combine or link a work that uses the Library with the Library to produce a work containing portions of the Library and distribute that work under terms of your choice provided that the terms permit modification of the work for the customer s own use and reverse engineering for debugging such modifications You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the Library is used in it and that the Library and its use are covered by this License You must supply a copy of this License If the work during execution displays copyright notices you must include the copyright notice for the Library among them as well as a reference directing the user to the copy of this License Also you must do one of these things a Accompany the work with the complete corresponding machine readable source
103. other networks from going to the LAN The following figure illustrates the default firewall action User A can initiate an IM Instant Messaging session from the LAN to the WAN 1 Return traffic for this session is also allowed 2 However other traffic initiated from the WAN is blocked 3 and 4 Figure 69 Default Firewall Action LAN WAN eo a ANTERNED 14 1 1 What You Can Do in the Firewall Screens Use the Firewall screen Section 14 2 on page 204 to enable LAN to WAN services blocking on the ZyXEL Device 14 1 2 What You Need to Know About Firewall The following terms and concepts may help as you read this chapter P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 14 Firewall DoS Denials of Service DoS attacks are aimed at devices and networks with a connection to the Internet Their goal is not to steal information but to disable a device or network so users no longer have access to network resources The ZyXEL Device is pre configured to automatically detect and thwart all known DoS attacks Anti Probing If an outside user attempts to probe an unsupported port on your ZyXEL Device an ICMP response packet is automatically returned This allows the outside user to know the ZyXEL Device exists The ZyXEL Device supports anti probing which prevents the ICMP response packet from being sent This keeps outsiders from discovering your ZyXEL Device when unsupported ports are probed ICMP Internet Control
104. ports translated Internal End This shows the last port of the translated port range Port Protocol Type Select the protocol supported by this virtual server Choices are TCP UDP or TCP UDP Apply Click this to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device Cancel Click this to begin configuring this screen afresh 8 3 NAT Technical Reference This section provides some technical background information about the topics covered in this chapter 8 3 1 NAT Definitions Inside outside denotes where a host is located relative to the ZyXEL Device for example the computers of your subscribers are the inside hosts while the web servers on the Internet are the outside hosts Global local denotes the IP address of a host in a packet as the packet traverses a router for example the local address refers to the IP address of a host when the packet is in the local network while the global address refers to the IP address of the host when the same packet is traveling in the WAN side Note that inside outside refers to the location of a host while global local refers to the IP address of a host used in a packet Thus an inside local address ILA is the IP address of an inside host in a packet when the packet is still in the local network while an inside global address IGA is the IP address of the same inside P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 8 Network Address Translation NAT host when the packe
105. printer sharing function Add Standard TCP IP Printer Port Wizard Add Port For which device do you want to add a port Enter the Printer Name or IP address and a port name for the desired device Printer Name or IP Address 192 168 1 1 Port Name IP_192 168 1 1 P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide 65 Chapter 3 Tutorial 7 Select Custom under Device Type and click Settings Add Standard TCP IP Printer Port Wizard Additional Port Information Required The device could not be identified The device is not found on the network Be sure that 1 The device is tumed on 2 The network is connected 3 The device is properly configured 4 The address on the previous page is correct If you think the address is not correct click Back to retum to the previous page Then correct the address and perform another search on the network If you are sure the address is correct select the device type below Device Type O Standard 8 Confirm the IP address of the ZyXEL Device in the Printer Name or IP Address field 9 Select LPR under Protocol 10 Type LP1 in the Queue Name field and click OK to go back to the previous screen and click Next Configure Standard TCP IP Port Monitor Port Settings Port Name P1 92 168 1 1 Printer Name or IP Address 192 168 1 1 O Raw LPR Raw Settings Protocol LPR Settings Queue Name LP1 CILPR Byte Counting Enabled C SNMP Status Enabled
106. s Guide Wireless LANs Wireless LAN Topologies This section discusses ad hoc and infrastructure wireless LAN topologies Ad hoc Wireless LAN Configuration The simplest WLAN configuration is an independent Ad hoc WLAN that connects a set of computers with wireless adapters A B C Any time two or more wireless adapters are within range of each other they can set up an independent network which is commonly referred to as an ad hoc network or Independent Basic Service Set IBSS The following diagram shows an example of notebook computers using wireless adapters to form an ad hoc wireless LAN Figure 174 Peer to Peer Communication in an Ad hoc Network __ Ss A W Ne Ne B G BSS A Basic Service Set BSS exists when all communications between wireless clients or between a wireless client and a wired network client go through one access point AP Intra BSS traffic is traffic between wireless clients in the BSS When Intra BSS is enabled wireless client A and B can access the wired network and communicate P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs with each other When Intra BSS is disabled wireless client A and B can still access the wired network but cannot communicate with each other Figure 175 Basic Service Set vd a senese x a ESS An Extended Service Set ESS consists of a series of overlapping BSSs each containing an access p
107. sent openChan is the number of times that the ZyXEL Device has opened a logical DSL channel closeChan is the number of times that the ZyXEL Device has closed a logical DSL channel txRate is the number of bytes transmitted per second rxRate is the number of bytes received per second ATM Loopback Test Click this button to start the ATM loopback test Make sure you have configured at least one PVC with proper VPIs VClIs before you begin this test The ZyXEL Device sends an OAM F5 packet to the DSLAM ATM switch and then returns it loops it back to the ZyXEL Device The ATM loopback test is useful for troubleshooting problems with the DSLAM and ATM network P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 23 Diagnostic Table 83 Maintenance gt Diagnostic gt General ITEM DESCRIPTION DSL Line Click this button to view statistics about the DSL connections Status noise margin downstream is the signal to noise ratio for the downstream part of the connection coming into the ZyXEL Device from the ISP It is measured in decibels The higher the number the more signal and less noise there is output power upstream is the amount of power in decibels that the ZyXEL Device is using to transmit to the ISP attenuation downstream is the reduction in amplitude in decibels of the DSL signal coming into the ZyXEL Device from the ISP Discrete Multi Tone DMT modulation divides up a line s bandwidth into sub
108. server addresses manually configured If you do not configure a DNS server you must know the IP address of a computer in order to access it Apply Click this to save the changes Reset Click this to begin configuring this screen afresh 6 4 The Client List Screen Use this table to assign IP addresses on the LAN to specific individual computers based on their MAC Addresses Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC Media Access Control address The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters for example 00 A0 C5 00 00 02 P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 6 LAN Setup Click Network gt LAN gt Client List to open the following screen Use this screen to change your ZyXEL Device s static DHCP settings Figure 31 Network gt LAN gt Client List DHCP Client Table IP Address Poser is SS HostName IP Address MAC Address Reserve 1 TWPC13262 01 192 168 1 35 00 19 b 41 78 10 DO 2 9 twpce1 3665 01 192 168 1 34 00 1 9 cb d4 4d c5 D 3 TA PC 192 168 1 33 00 02 e3 56 16 9d O Apply Reset Refresh MAC Address Add The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 23 Network gt LAN gt Client List LABEL DESCRIPTION IP Address Enter the IP address that you want to assign to the computer on your LAN with the MAC address that you will also specify MAC Address Enter the MAC address of a computer on
109. settings 5 Use the following IP address Obtain DNS server address automatically i Use the following DNS server addresses Advanced cancel _ 8 Select Obtain an I P address automatically if your network administrator or ISP assigns your IP address dynamically Select Use the following I P Address and fill in the I P address Subnet mask and Default gateway fields if you have a static IP address that was assigned to you by your network administrator or ISP You may also have to enter a Preferred DNS server and an Alternate DNS server if that information was provided Click Advanced 9 Click OK to close the Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties window 10 Click OK to close the Local Area Connection Properties window Verifying Settings 1 Click Start gt All Programs gt Accessories gt Command Prompt 312 P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address In the Command Prompt window type ipconfig and then press ENTER You can also go to Start gt Control Panel gt Network Connections right click a network connection click Status and then click the Support tab to view your IP address and connection information Windows 7 1 2 This section shows screens from Windows 7 Enterprise Click Start gt Control Panel Figure 131 Windows 7 Start Menu RS Snipping Tool Calculator es XPS Viewer EY n gA Windows Fax and Scan Computer
110. sites Restricted sites f This zone contains all Web sites you Gree haven t placed in other zones Security level for this zone Move the slider to set the security level for this zone 3 Medium Safe browsing and still functional Prompts before downloading potentially unsafe content Unsigned ActiveX controls will not be downloaded Appropriate for most Internet sites C Custom Level D Default Level OK Cancel Apply 2 Click the Custom Level button 3 Scroll down to Scripting 4 Under Active scripting make sure that Enable is selected the default 5 Under Scripting of Java applets make sure that Enable is selected the default P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide 339 Appendix C Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions 6 Click OK to close the window Security Settings Settings Scripting B Active scripting Grom 3 Allow paste operations via script Disable Enable Prompt E Scripting of Java applets O Disable Enable Prompt Llenar Auikhanticestian Figure 169 Security Settings Java Scripting m Reset custom settings Reset to Medium x Reset cme Java Permissions 1 From Internet Explorer click Tools I nternet Options and then the Security tab 2 Click the Custom Level button 3 Scroll down to Microsoft VM 4 Under Java permissions make sure that a safety level is selected
111. some do not you can use WPS to set up your network and then add the non WPS devices manually although this is somewhat more complicated to do e What advanced options do you want to configure if any If you want to configure advanced options ensure that you know precisely what you want to do If you do not want to configure advanced options leave them alone 7 2 The Wireless LAN General Screen Use this screen to turn the wireless connection on or off create multiple SSI Ds and make other configuration changes The ZyXEL Device can broadcast up to four wireless network names at the same time This means that users can connect to the ZyXEL Device using different SSIDs You can secure the connection on each SSID profile so that wireless clients connecting to the ZyXEL Device using different SSIDs cannot communicate with each other Note If you are configuring the ZyXEL Device from a computer connected to the wireless LAN and you change the ZyXEL Device s SSID or security settings you will lose your wireless connection when you press Apply to confirm You must then change the wireless settings of your computer to match the ZyXEL Device s new settings P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide 133 Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Click Network gt Wireless LAN to open the General screen Figure 34 Network gt Wireless LAN gt General Wireless Setup v Multiple SSID SSID1 SSID2 SSID3 SSID4 Mode Select Ch
112. subnet mask is 26 bits 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 or 255 255 255 192 P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Appendix A IP Addresses and Subnetting Each subnet contains 6 host ID bits giving 2 2 or 62 hosts for each subnet a host ID of all zeroes is the subnet itself all ones is the subnet s broadcast address Table 94 Subnet 1 IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER LAST OCTET BIT VALUE IP Address Decimal 192 168 1 0 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 00000000 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 Subnet Address Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 1 192 168 1 0 Broadcast Address Highest Host ID 192 168 1 62 192 168 1 63 Table 95 Subnet 2 IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER LAST OCTET BIT VALUE IP Address 192 168 1 64 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 01000000 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 Subnet Address Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 65 192 168 1 64 Broadcast Address Highest Host ID 192 168 1 126 192 168 1 127 Table 96 Subnet 3 IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER LAST OCTET BIT VALUE IP Address 192 168 1 128 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 10000000 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 Subnet Address Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 129 192 168 1 128 Broadcast Address Highest Host ID 192 168 1 190 192 168 1 191 Table 97 S
113. subnet mask of your ZyXEL Device and configure the DNS server information that the ZyXEL Device sends to the DHCP client devices on the LAN Figure 29 Network gt LAN gt IP LAN TCP IP IP Address 192 168 1 1 IP Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Apply Reset The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 21 Network gt LAN gt IP LABEL DESCRIPTION IP Address Enter the LAN IP address you want to assign to your ZyXEL Device in dotted decimal notation for example 192 168 1 1 factory default IP Subnet Mask Type the subnet mask of your network in dotted decimal notation for example 255 255 255 0 factory default Your ZyXEL Device automatically computes the subnet mask based on the IP address you enter so do not change this field unless you are instructed to do so Apply Click this to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device Reset Click this to begin configuring this screen afresh 6 3 DHCP Server Screen Use this screen to configure the DNS server information that the ZyXEL Device sends to the DHCP client devices on the LAN Figure 30 Network gt LAN gt DHCP Server DHCP Setup M active DHCP Server IP Pool Starting Address 192 168 1 33 Pool Size 32 DNS Server From DHCP EF 16811 First DNS Server Server Second DNS Noe z Fa Server Third DNS None A Server Apply Reset P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide 123 Chapter 6 LA
114. the peer device Minimum is the quietest and Maximum is the loudest P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide 167 Chapter 9 Voice Table 38 VoIP gt SIP gt SIP Account LABEL DESCRIPTION Listening Enter the loudness that the ZyXEL Device uses for speech that it Volume receives from the peer device Control Minimum is the quietest and Maximum is the loudest Active G 168 Select this if you want to eliminate the echo caused by the sound of Echo your voice reverberating in the telephone receiver while you talk Cancellation Active VAD Select this if the ZyXEL Device should stop transmitting when you are Voice Active not speaking This reduces the bandwidth the ZyXEL Device uses Detector Call Features Send Caller ID Select this if you want to send identification when you make VolP phone calls Clear this if you do not want to send identification Active Call Select this to enable call transfer on the ZyXEL Device This allows you Transfer to transfer an incoming call that you have answered to another phone Active Call Select this to enable call waiting on the ZyXEL Device This allows you Waiting to place a call on hold while you answer another incoming call on the same telephone directory number Call Waiting Specify a time of seconds that the ZyXEL Device waits before rejecting Reject Timer the second call if you do not answer it Apply Click this to save your changes and t
115. to the ZyXEL Device e Make phone calls over the Internet as well as the regular phone network e Configure settings such as speed dial e Configure network settings to optimize the voice quality of your phone calls 9 1 1 What You Can Do in this Chapter These screens allow you to configure your ZyXEL Device to make phone calls over the Internet and your regular phone line and to set up the phones you connect to the ZyXEL Device e Use the SIP Service Provider screen Section 9 3 on page 165 to configure the SIP server information QoS for VoIP calls the numbers for certain phone functions and dialing plan e Use the SIP Account screen Section 9 3 on page 165 to set up information about your SIP account control which SIP accounts the phones connected to the ZyXEL Device use and configure audio settings such as volume levels for the phones connected to the ZyXEL Device e Use the Analog Phone screen Section 9 4 on page 169 to control which SIP accounts the phones connected to the ZyXEL Device use e Use the Region screen Section 9 5 on page 170 to change settings that depend on the country you are in e Use the Speed Dial screen Section 9 6 on page 170 to set up shortcuts for dialing frequently used VoIP phone numbers You don t necessarily need to use all these screens to set up your account In fact if your service provider did not supply information on a particular field in a screen it is usually best to leave it
116. traffic before it automatically disconnects the session Min SE Enter the minimum number of seconds the ZyXEL Device lets a SIP session remain idle without traffic before it automatically disconnects the session When two SIP devices start a SIP session they must agree on an expiration time for idle sessions This field is the shortest expiration time that the ZyXEL Device accepts Dialing Interval Selection Dialing Interval Selection Enter the number of seconds the ZyXEL Device should wait after you stop dialing numbers before it makes the phone call The value depends on how quickly you dial phone numbers If you select Immediate Dial Enable you can press the pound key to tell the ZyXEL Device to make the phone call immediately regardless of this setting Bound Interface Name Bound Interface Name If you select LAN or AnyWAN the ZyXEL Device automatically activates the VoIP service when any LAN or WAN connection is up If you select MultiWAN you also need to select the pre configured WAN connections The VoIP service is activated only when the selected WAN connection in ATM mode is up Apply Click this to save your changes and to apply them to the ZyXEL Device Cancel Click this to set every field in this screen to its last saved value 9 2 1 Dial Plan Rules A dial plan defines the dialing patterns such as the length and range of the digits for a telephone number It al
117. upload them Upload Click Upload to begin the upload process This process may take up to two minutes P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide 255 Chapter 22 Tools After you see the Firmware Upload in Progress screen wait two minutes before logging into the ZyXEL Device again Figure 93 Firmware Upload In Progress Firmware Upgrade In Progress Do not Turn Off the Device Please Wait Please wait for the device to finish restarting This should take about three minutes To access the device after a successful firmware upgrade you need to log in again Check your new firmware version in the system status menu The ZyXEL Device automatically restarts in this time causing a temporary network disconnect In some operating systems you may see the following icon on your desktop Figure 94 Network Temporarily Disconnected D Local Area Connection Network cable unplugged After two minutes log in again and check your new firmware version in the Status screen If the upload was not successful the following screen will appear Click Return to go back to the Firmware screen Figure 95 Error Message Bystem Upload Software upload error The uploaded file was not accepted by the router Please return to the previous page and select a valid upgrade file Click Help for more information Return 22 3 The Configuration Screen See Section 22 5 on page 260 for transf
118. use to access certain features on the ZyXEL Device such as call waiting call return and call forward The phone config table is configurable in command interpreter mode HTTP pincode If your service provider uses an auto provisioning server you need to enter a personal identification number supplied by your service provider before you first use the feature P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 26 Product Specifications Table 87 Voice Features Firmware update enable disable If your service provider uses this feature you hear a recorded message when you pick up the phone when new firmware is available for your ZyXEL Device Enter 99 in your phone s keypad to have the ZyXEL Device upgrade the firmware or enter 99 to not upgrade If your service provider gave you different numbers to use enter them instead If you enter the code to not upgrade you can make a call as normal You will hear the recording again each time you pick up the phone until you upgrade Call waiting This feature allows you to hear an alert when you are already using the phone and another person calls you You can then either reject the new incoming call put your current call on hold and receive the new incoming call or end the current call and receive the new incoming call Call forwarding With this feature you can set the ZyXEL Device to forward calls to a specified number either unconditionally always when
119. was designed to extend the features of IEEE 802 11 to support extended authentication as well as providing additional accounting and control features It is supported by Windows XP and a number of network devices Some advantages of IEEE 802 1x are e User based identification that allows for roaming e Support for RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service RFC 2138 2139 for centralized user profile and accounting management on a network RADIUS server e Support for EAP Extensible Authentication Protocol RFC 2486 that allows additional authentication methods to be deployed with no changes to the access point or the wireless clients RADIUS RADIUS is based on a client server model that supports authentication authorization and accounting The access point is the client and the server is the RADIUS server The RADIUS server handles the following tasks e Authentication Determines the identity of the users Authorization Determines the network services available to authenticated users once they are connected to the network e Accounting Keeps track of the client s network activity RADIUS is a simple package exchange in which your AP acts as a message relay between the wireless client and the network RADIUS server Types of RADIUS Messages The following types of RADIUS messages are exchanged between the access point and the RADIUS server for user authentication e Access Request Sent by an access point re
120. your LAN Add Click Add to add a static DHCP entry This is the index number of the static IP table entry row Status This field displays whether the client is connected to the ZyXEL Device Host Name This field displays the computer host name IP Address This field displays the IP address relative to the field listed above MAC Address The MAC Media Access Control or Ethernet address on a LAN Local Area Network is unique to your computer six pairs of hexadecimal notation A network interface card such as an Ethernet adapter has a hardwired address that is assigned at the factory This address follows an industry standard that ensures no other adapter has a similar address Reserve Select the check box in the heading row to automatically select all check boxes or select the check box es in each entry to have the ZyXEL Device always assign the selected entry ies s IP address es to the corresponding MAC address es and host name s You can select up to 128 entries in this table Apply Click this to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device Reset Click this to begin configuring this screen afresh Refresh Click this to reload the DHCP table P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 6 LAN Setup 6 5 Technical Reference This section provides some technical background information about the topics covered in this chapter LANs WANs and the ZyXEL Device The actual
121. your number is busy or when you do not answer You can also forward incoming calls from one specified number to another Caller ID The ZyXEL Device supports caller ID which allows you to see the originating number of an incoming call on a phone with a suitable display REN A Ringer Equivalence Number REN is used to determine the number of devices like telephones or fax machines that may be connected to the telephone line Your device has a REN of three so it can support three devices per telephone port Dynamic Jitter Buffer The built in adaptive buffer helps to smooth out the variations in delay jitter for voice traffic This helps ensure good voice quality for your conversations Multiple SIP You can simultaneously use multiple voice SIP accounts and assign Accounts them to the telephone port Multiple Voice Your device can simultaneously handle multiple voice channels Channels telephone calls Additionally you can answer an incoming phone call on a VoIP account even while someone else is using the account for a phone call Voice Activity Detection Silence Suppression Voice Activity Detection VAD reduces the bandwidth that a call uses by not transmitting when you are not speaking Comfort Noise Generation Your device generates background noise to fill moments of silence when the other device in a call stops transmitting because the other party is not speaking as total silence could
122. 0 5 Network Preferences gt Ethernet e00 Network e Internal Modem ta Not Connected Status Not Connected The cable for Ethernet is connected but PPPoE Lost your computer does not have an IP address Not Connected Ethernet Sienra Ca Configure Using DHCP E FireWire Not Connected e AirPort Off DNS Server Search Domains 802 1X WPA ZyXELO4 A rr Click the lock to prevent further changes Apply 4 From the Configure list select Using DHCP for dynamically assigned settings 5 For statically assigned settings do the following e From the Configure list select Manually e In the IP Address field enter your IP address e In the Subnet Mask field enter your subnet mask 322 P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address e In the Router field enter the IP address of your ZyXEL Device Figure 147 Mac OS X 10 5 Network Preferences gt Ethernet B OO Location Automatic E e Internal Modem QS Not Connected Status Not Connected The cable for Ethernet is connected but PPPoE Q your computer does not have an IP address Not Connected Ethernet f Configure FireWire ws Not Connected 2 Subnet Mask AirPort A or a Router DNS Server Search Domains 802 1X WPA ZyXELO4 en a Click the lock to prevent further changes 6 Click Apply and close the window P 2612HNU Fx User s G
123. 00 m min Sat 00 v hour 00 min 00 hour 00 m min Sun 00 x hour 00 min 00 x hour 00 min q Note If the begin and end times are the same this means the entire day 24 hours Reset P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 31 Network gt Wireless LAN gt Scheduling LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable Select this to activate wireless LAN scheduling on your ZyXEL Device Wireless LAN Scheduling WLAN status Select On or Off to enable or disable the wireless LAN Day Select the day s you want to turn the wireless LAN on or off The following times Specify the time period during which to apply the schedule For example you want the wireless network to be only available during work hours Check Mon Fri in the day column and specify 8 00 18 00 in the time table Apply Click this to save your changes Reset Click this to restore your previously saved settings P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN 7 7 Association List Screen Use this screen to view wireless stations that are currently associated with the ZyXEL Device Click Network gt Wireless LAN gt Association List to open the following screen The screen varies depending on the wireless security you select Figure 43 Network gt Wireless LAN gt Association List
124. 11111 11111111 00000000 255 255 255 0 29 bit mask 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111000 255 255 255 248 Network Size The size of the network number determines the maximum number of possible hosts you can have on your network The larger the number of network number bits the smaller the number of remaining host ID bits An IP address with host IDs of all zeros is the IP address of the network 192 168 1 0 with a 24 bit subnet mask for example An IP address with host IDs of all ones is the broadcast address for that network 192 168 1 255 with a 24 bit subnet mask for example As these two IP addresses cannot be used for individual hosts calculate the maximum number of possible hosts in a network as follows Table 92 Maximum Host Numbers SUBNET MASK HOST ID SIZE Ea eae 8 bits 255 0 0 0 24 bits 224 2 16777214 16 bits 255 255 0 0 16 bits 216_ 2 65534 24 bits 255 255 255 0 8 bits 28 2 254 29 bits 255 255 255 248 3 bits 23 2 6 P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Appendix A IP Addresses and Subnetting Notation Since the mask is always a continuous number of ones beginning from the left followed by a continuous number of zeros for the remainder of the 32 bit mask you can simply specify the number of ones instead of writing the value of each octet This is usually specified by writing a followed by the number of bits in the mask
125. 12HNU Fx User s Guide 173 Chapter 9 Voice 174 SIP Servers SIP is a client server protocol A SIP client is an application program or device that sends SIP requests A SIP server responds to the SIP requests When you use SIP to make a VoIP call it originates at a client and terminates at a server A SIP client could be a computer or a SIP phone One device can act as both a SIP client and a SIP server SIP User Agent A SIP user agent can make and receive VoIP telephone calls This means that SIP can be used for peer to peer communications even though it is a client server protocol In the following figure either A or B can act as a SIP user agent client to initiate a call A and B can also both act as a SIP user agent to receive the call Figure 53 SIP User Agent SIP Proxy Server A SIP proxy server receives requests from clients and forwards them to another server In the following example you want to use client device A to call someone who is using client device C The client device A in the figure sends a call invitation to the SIP proxy server B P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 9 Voice 2 The SIP proxy server forwards the call invitation to C Figure 54 SIP Proxy Server A SIP Redirect Server A SIP redirect server accepts SIP requests translates the destination address to an IP address and sends the translated IP address back to the device that sent the request Then the
126. 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 5 The Properties dialog box opens Figure 153 Ubuntu 8 Network Settings gt Properties m eO Propernes Ea Connection Settings Configuration lt IP address Subnet mask Gateway address cancel e In the Configuration list select Automatic Configuration DHCP if you have a dynamic IP address e In the Configuration list select Static IP address if you have a static IP address Fill in the I P address Subnet mask and Gateway address fields 6 Click OK to save the changes and close the Properties dialog box and return to the Network Settings screen P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide 327 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 7 Ifyou know your DNS server IP address es click the DNS tab in the Network Settings window and then enter the DNS server information in the fields provided Figure 154 Ubuntu 8 Network Settings gt DNS Fs Network Settings Be Location s E Connections General DNS Hosts DNS Servers pease badd Search Domains Help EJ close 8 Click the Close button to apply the changes Verifying Settings Check your TCP IP properties by clicking System gt Administration gt Network Tools and then selecting the appropriate Network device from the Devices P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Appendi
127. 5 Table of Contents Chapter 17 Guality or Service 0S ee one eee Be te ie Be RB SSE SP Me nne s ioler Senn ner Wille Se ssrnit eee semen 223 NP AG FO OE EAA EANA IE AES E E oe pa ns a AA a ac cn great Ree heeded ng eee 223 17 1 1 What You Can Do in this Chaplet xsccccccaitcaccccasecaicocnteda aona 223 171 2 What You Need to Know sciiiciccsscsisccodeecinesdontcuscwtsadinaurendatullaendamecindcentedenasrnadwantis wets 224 172 Wie QoS Gansl SCE arraina lies eaaudsteet did seg ik eaieass anda enidad ee aeablotaeads 224 170 Tha DUGU SEUR SOEN epee eee reer E ee reer Tree r reer ec er rmntyerr rrr Terre err rer rrrTe 226 1733 1 Adding Editing a QOS QUEUS csi ce erussses iene aside austere a auaa iei udan aiia 227 ITA The Liss GOUD EY dicra ae naain a aa E AS 227 ITAIT SCRS AGI ECI arimani a aa a 229 17 5 The QoS Monitor SOROS eonceo nan A Ae EIEE 233 170 O06 technical TATE NC asas e aaa 233 176 1 JEEE SUZ TO TAU ceiaio aa a a E aa 234 Wy Oe FeDe ean E 234 T aa E ate etn aed ek ngendeeeed eens 234 Chapter 18 Dynami DNS CUUN Yc sss secre tnct accetascamadoncasacaataaavansauandassmacadasunsasusascaacacancasucsaaatuesedisacearsenancas 237 MN ME isi cece aout usecase cies nce ca elec kag dee aa gel weet iiaii 237 18 1 1 What You Can Do in the DDNS Screen cece cece eeececesee see eeceseeseaueueeeesaeanees 237 18 1 2 What You Need To Know About DDNS uu co cc cece ececeece cee eeceseeseaneeeeeeeeneanees 237 162 Connguing Dynamie DNG
128. 55 255 255 0 Server 1 Unconfigured EI Z off WPA PSK ZyXEL KMKCA9 off No Security ZyXEL 7EPHMM T Refresh Now System Status System Uptime 2 28 Current 128 Date Time Sat Jan 1 03 28 13 CET 2000 CPU Usage Memory Usage NAT Sessions ron ni 0 0 147 7 N A N A 1000Mbps N A 1000Mbps Summary DHCP Client List WLAN Client List DHCP cient tist WANGlentlist A P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator As illustrated above the main screen is divided into these parts e A title bar e B navigation panel e C main window e D status bar 2 2 1 Title Bar The title bar shows the following icon in the upper right corner Click this icon to log out of the web configurator 2 2 2 Navigation Panel Use the menu items on the navigation panel to open screens to configure ZyXEL Device features The following table describes each menu item Table 2 Navigation Panel Summary LINK TAB FUNCTION Status This screen shows the ZyXEL Device s general device and network status information Use this screen to access the statistics and client list Network WAN Layer 2 Use this screen to view remove or add a layer 2 Interface WAN interface Internet Use this screen to configure ISP parameters WAN IP Connection address assignment DNS servers and other advanced properties LAN IP Use this screen to con
129. 612HNU Fx User s Guide Legal Information Copyright Copyright 2010 by ZyXEL Communications Corporation The contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any part or as a whole transcribed stored in a retrieval system translated into any language or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic mechanical magnetic optical chemical photocopying manual or otherwise without the prior written permission of ZyXEL Communications Corporation Published by ZyXEL Communications Corporation All rights reserved Disclaimer ZyXEL does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any products or software described herein Neither does it convey any license under its patent rights nor the patent rights of others ZyXEL further reserves the right to make changes in any products described herein without notice This publication is subject to change without notice Your use of the ZyXEL Device is subject to the terms and conditions of any related service providers Certifications Notices Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment This device has been designed for the WLAN 2 4 GHz network throughout the EC region and Switzerland with restrictions in France P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide 397 Appendix G Legal Information Viewing Certifications 1 Go to http www zyxel com
130. 612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Click Network gt Wireless LAN gt WPS The following screen displays Figure 41 Network gt Wireless LAN gt WPS WPS Setup V Enable WPS q Note WPS Status Status 802 11 Mode SSID Security Pre Shared Key q Note Add Station by WPS PIN Number 11403647 1 The PIN code is applied immediately after the Generate button is clicked 1 If you enable WPS it will turned on UPnP service automatically 2 This feature is available only when WPA PSK WPA2 PSK or No Security mode is configured Click the Button below to add WPS stations to wireless network Push Button Or input station s PIN number q Note 1 The Push Button Configuration requires pressing a button on both the station and AP within 120 seconds 2 You can find the PIN number in the station s utility Configured Release_Configuration 802 11 B G mixed SSID_Example3 WPA PSK ThisismyWPA PSKpre sharedkey Refresh The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 30 Network gt Wireless LAN gt WPS LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable WPS Select the check box to activate WPS on the ZyXEL Device PIN Number This shows the PIN Personal Identification Number of the ZyXEL Device Enter this PIN in the configuration utility of the device you want to connect to using WPS The PIN is not necessary when you use WPS push button metho
131. 9 Temporal Key Integrity Protocol see TKIP TFTP file upload 262 TFTP and FTP over WAN 254 The 98 three way conference 181 TKIP 355 TLS 286 ToS 178 TPID 117 traffic shaping 115 transparent bridging 282 trusted CAs and certificates 214 TTLS 286 tutorial VolP 48 wireless 38 Type of Service see ToS U unicast 118 Uniform Resource Identifier 172 upload firmware 261 USB printer sharing 195 USB features 23 USB printer 23 V VAD 165 284 version firmware version 86 VID Virtual Circuit VC 115 Virtual Local Area Network See VLAN Virtual Local Area Network see VLAN VLAN 117 179 group 179 ID 179 P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Index ID tags 179 Introduction 117 number of possible VIDs priority frame static VLAN ID 117 VLAN Identifier See VID VLAN tag 117 voice activity detection 165 284 voice channels 284 voice coding 177 VoIP 172 features 23 peer to peer calls 170 standards compliance 284 tutorial 48 VoIP features 23 W WAN Wide Area Network see WAN 97 warnings 7 warranty 398 note 398 Web Configurator 27 WEP 138 285 Wi Fi Protected Access see WPA Wired Equivalent Privacy see WEP wireless client configuration 41 profile 43 security 350 tutorial 38 wireless client 129 wireless client WPA supplicants 356 wireless LAN channel 135 MAC address filter 285 scheduling 146 wireless network example 129 overview 129 wireless security 350 WLAN 129 authenticat
132. A AAA 22 tez WF ie EIS roai A Ae aA EEA aae A EAA xtc 23 he ZYXEL Devies USB SUPPOR cusccasscctceuctncas ceaiti n a e a airia 23 12 Ways to Manage the ZyXEL DOVICO crerecctssusuiseeis sondanzava peas iin 23 1 4 Good Habits for Managing the ZyXEL Device eeeeecceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeenaeeseeaeeeteaeeeees 24 We LE TIS iiai 24 TO The RESET BION acxcencisatcautacttaanraonktaadsnadh a aa Aae a aAA EEA 26 Meck The WPSWLAN BUHON as 5 c3e tact ss cecadeds hievigiaes asasdecs a aaa 26 Chapter 2 introducing the Web Configurator cscssciccccccescccssccessncacacccsceeseseseavcasatonssescacncceacctesctasnadaseabeeceie 27 Oe AIE EEN NEA A E NEEE ANA A OA E at ATAA AA EE 27 2 1 1 Accessing ihe Web ContigitatOr ssc cceviderdeacavisdatiasacdead seeiaicdocaaduiedaccoigiidshiensceiaasiiacuiads 2r 2 2 Web Configurator Main OPEN sirist a aa ann aa aa ade eeedaeeaes 28 Se ML IME E MI a AA T de peewee gate are seat oat 29 ee Lean F ANG E E AR E A Re eR E 29 Be POAT NNO asni agente aie denildel cacumuatue atria AA 32 ee OS BA cc darters tata erik ahead aa a nada aaa A a aa A daR 32 Chapter 3 UPON TAN EINN E EE A A E AE A 33 et VEN EY rerainan E EE E AER 33 P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide a Table of Contents 32 seting LI Your DSL COnne RON aimer narin irinn A ian ebay helenae 33 ga How TO Setup a Wireless NEWT ss cesoureseccinuamsiuibee oivuatissonnudass seadusear aaa Daa NANNES 38 9 9 1 Example Paramelors cracino A 38 Dae GONO INE AP inaa a A
133. Advanced gt QoS gt General General Active QoS WAN Managed Upstream Bandwidth kbps You can assign the upstream bandwidth manually If the field is empty the CPE set the value automatically Ta The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 61 Advanced gt QoS gt General LABEL DESCRIPTION Active QoS Select the check box to turn on QoS to improve your network performance You can give priority to traffic that the ZyXEL Device forwards out through the WAN interface Give high priority to voice and video to make them run more smoothly Similarly give low priority to many large file downloads so that they do not reduce the quality of other applications WAN Managed Upstream Bandwidth Enter the amount of bandwidth for the WAN interface that you want to allocate using QoS The recommendation is to set this speed to match the interface s actual transmission speed For example set the WAN interface speed to 100000 kbps if your Internet connection has an upstream transmission speed of 100 Mbps Setting this number higher than the interface s actual transmission speed will stop lower priority traffic from being sent if higher priority traffic uses all of the actual bandwidth If you set this number lower than the interface s actual transmission speed the ZyXEL Device will not use some of the interface s available bandwidth Leave this field blank to h
134. BEL DESCRIPTION General Setup Host Name Choose a descriptive name for identification purposes It is recommended you enter your computer s Computer name in this field This name can be up to 30 alphanumeric characters long Spaces are not allowed but dashes and underscores _ are accepted Domain Name Enter the domain name if you know it here If you leave this field blank the ISP may assign a domain name via DHCP The domain name entered by you is given priority over the ISP assigned domain name Administrator Type how many minutes a management session either via the web Inactivity configurator can be left idle before the session times out The default is Timer 5 minutes After it times out you have to log in with your password again Very long idle timeouts may have security risks A value of 0 means a management session never times out no matter how long it has been left idle not recommended Apply Click this to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device Reset Click this to begin configuring this screen afresh P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 20 System 20 3 The Time Setting Screen To change your ZyXEL Device s time and date click Maintenance gt System gt Time Setting The screen appears as shown Use this screen to configure the ZyXEL Device s time based on your local time zone Figure 89 Maintenance gt System gt Time Setting
135. E OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING REPAIR OR CORRECTION 12 IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES INCLUDING ANY GENERAL SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS All other trademarks or trade names mentioned herein if any are the property of their respective owners This Product includes Dropbear 0 52 and Ncureses 5 7 under the MIT Style License P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Appendix F Open Software Announcements The MIT License Copyright c lt year gt lt copyright holders gt Permission is hereby granted free of charge to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files the Software to deal in the Software without restriction including without limitation the rights to use copy modify merge publish distribute sublicense and or sell copies of the Software and to permit person
136. Guide 137 Chapter 7 Wireless LAN the wireless stations can associate with any AP or peer computer and listen to any transmitted data that is not encrypted Shared key mode involves a shared secret key to authenticate the wireless station to the AP or peer computer This requires you to enable the wireless LAN security and use same settings on both the wireless station and the AP or peer computer In order to configure and enable WEP encryption click Network gt Wireless LAN gt Security Select Static WEP or Shared WEP from the Security Mode list Figure 37 Network gt Wireless LAN gt Security Static WEP Shared WEP Security Setup SSID Security Mode WEP Keys q Note network q Note The WEP Wired equivalency privacy key is like password that you need to gain access to the Type your manual WEP key using one of the following guidelines 5 to 13 ASCII keyboard characters 10 to 26 HEX characters containing 0 9 and A F only Longer WEP keys are more secure than short ones Please select AES as Encryption Mode if you want to access N mode WLAN Select TKIP as Encryption Mode might cause you access b g mode WLAN SSID1 SSID1_Test M Shared WEP M Reset The following table describes the wireless LAN security labels in this screen Table 26 Network gt Wireless LAN gt Security Static WEP Shared WEP LABEL DESCRIPTION SSID Select the SSID security profile you want
137. L Device rather than individual computers the computers on the LAN do not need PPPoE software installed since the ZyXEL Device does that part of the task Furthermore with NAT all of the LANs computers will have access PPPoA PPPoA stands for Point to Point Protocol over ATM Adaptation Layer 5 AAL5 A PPPoA connection functions like a dial up Internet connection The ZyXEL Device encapsulates the PPP session based on RFC1483 and sends it through an ATM PVC Permanent Virtual Circuit to the Internet Service Provider s ISP DSLAM digital access multiplexer Please refer to RFC 2364 for more information on PPPOA Refer to RFC 1661 for more information on PPP RFC 1483 RFC 1483 describes two methods for Multiprotocol Encapsulation over ATM Adaptation Layer 5 AAL5 The first method allows multiplexing of multiple protocols over a single ATM virtual circuit LLC based multiplexing and the second method assumes that each protocol is carried over a separate ATM virtual circuit VC based multiplexing Please refer to RFC 1483 for more detailed information P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup Multiplexing There are two conventions to identify what protocols the virtual circuit VC is carrying Be sure to use the multiplexing method required by your ISP VC based Multiplexing In this case by prior mutual agreement each protocol is assigned to a specific virtual circuit for example VC1 carries IP etc
138. L Device deletes the VLAN ID of the frames before forwarding them out If you select Add the ZyXEL Device treat all matched traffic untagged and add a second VLAN ID If you select Unchange the ZyXEL Device keep the VLAN ID in the packets To Queue Select a queue that applies to this class You should have configured a queue in the Queue Setup screen already Criteria Configuration Use the following fields to configure the criteria for traffic classification Basic From Interface Select whether the traffic class comes from the LAN or a wireless interface P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 17 Quality of Service QoS Table 65 Advanced gt QoS gt Class Setup Add Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION Ether Type Select a predefined application to configure a class for the matched traffic If you select IP you also need to configure source or destination MAC address IP address DHCP options DSCP value or the protocol type If you select 8021Q you can configure an 802 1p priority level and VLAN ID in the Others section Source MAC Address Select the check box and enter the source MAC address of the packet MAC Mask Type the mask for the specified MAC address to determine which bits a packet s MAC address should match Enter f for each bit of the specified source MAC address that the traffic s MAC address should match Enter O for the bit s of the matched traffic s MAC a
139. LAN ID number assigned to traffic sent through this connection Type This shows the method of encapsulation used by this connection Vlan8021p This indicates the 802 1P priority level assigned to traffic sent through this connection This displays N A when there is no priority level assigned VlanMuxld This indicates the VLAN ID number assigned to traffic sent through this connection This displays N A when there is no VLAN ID number assigned IGMP This shows whether IGMP Internet Group Multicast Protocol is activated or not for this connection IGMP is not available when the connection uses the bridging service NAT This shows whether NAT is activated or not for this interface NAT is not available when the connection uses the bridging service Modify Click the Edit icon to configure the WAN connection Click the Remove icon to delete the WAN connection Add Click Add to create a new connection P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup 5 3 1 WAN Connection Configuration Click the Edit or Add button in the Network gt WAN gt Internet Connection screen to configure a WAN connection 5 3 1 1 WAN Interface This screen displays when you add a new WAN connection Figure 19 Network gt WAN gt Internet Connection Adding a WAN Interface nasi v WAN Service Interface Configuration Select a layer 2 interface for this service Back Next The following table describes the labels in this
140. MF dynamic DNS 237 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol see DHCP dynamic jitter buffer 284 dynamic WEP key exchange 354 DYNDNS wildcard 237 E EAP Authentication 352 EAP MD5 286 echo cancellation 165 284 Encapsulation 113 MER 113 PPP over Ethernet 114 PPPoA 114 encapsulation 98 RFC 1483 114 encryption 355 ESS 346 Europe type call service mode 180 Extended Service Set see ESS external antenna 285 external authentication server 142 external RADIUS 286 F F4 F5 OAM 282 file sharing 23 185 and workgroup 190 P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Index web configurator 190 191 filename conventions 253 254 firewalls 203 anti probing 204 configuration 204 DoS 204 ICMP 204 rules 206 security 206 firmware upload 255 upload error 256 flash key 180 flashing 180 fragmentation threshold 349 frequency range 286 FTP 150 file upload 261 restrictions 254 FTP restrictions 254 G G 168 165 284 G 711 285 G 729 285 G 992 1 282 G 992 3 282 G 992 5 282 group key update timer 141 H hidden node 347 hide SSID 134 host 270 host name 86 HTTP Hypertext Transfer Protocol 255 humidity 279 IAD 21 IANA 127 302 IBSS 345 ICMP 204 IEEE 802 11g 349 IEEE 802 119 wireless LAN 285 IEEE 802 11i 285 IEEE 802 1Q 117 IEEE 802 1Q VLAN 179 IGMP 118 version 118 IGMP proxy 282 IGMP v1 282 IGMP v2 282 importing trusted CAs 215 Independent Basic Service Set see IBSS initiali
141. N Setup The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 22 Network gt LAN gt DHCP Server LABEL DESCRIPTION DHCP Setup Active DHCP Select this to have your ZyXEL Device assign IP addresses an IP default Server gateway and DNS servers to LAN computers and other devices that are DHCP clients If you do not check this the DHCP server will be disabled You need to manually configure the IP addresses of the computers and other devices on your LAN When DHCP is used the following fields need to be set IP Pool Starting This field specifies the first of the contiguous addresses in the IP address Address pool Pool Size This field specifies the size or count of the IP address pool DNS Server First DNS Select From ISP if your ISP dynamically assigns DNS server information Server and the ZyXEL Device s WAN IP address Second DNS Select User Defined if you have the IP address of a DNS server Enter Server the DNS server s IP address in the field to the right If you chose User f Defined but leave the IP address set to 0 0 0 0 User Defined Third DNS changes to None after you click Apply If you set a second choice to Server User Defined and enter the same IP address the second User Defined changes to None after you click Apply Select None if you do not want to configure DNS servers You must have another DHCP sever on your LAN or else the computers must have their DNS
142. NS LABEL DESCRIPTION Dynamic DNS Setup Active Select this check box to use dynamic DNS Dynamic DNS Service This is the name of your Dynamic DNS service provider Provider Dynamic DNS Select the type of service that you are registered for from your Dynamic Type DNS service provider Host Name Type the domain name assigned to your ZyXEL Device by your Dynamic DNS provider You can specify up to two host names in the field separated by a comma Cu User Name Type your user name Password Type the password assigned to you Apply Click this to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device Reset Click this to begin configuring this screen afresh P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide 19 1 19 1 1 19 1 2 Service Control Overview This chapter provides information on the Service Control screens Service Control allows you to manage your ZyXEL Device from a remote location through the following interfaces e LAN and WLAN e WAN only Note The ZyXEL Device is managed using the Web Configurator What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the Service Control screens Section 19 2 on page 240 to configure through which interface s users can use which service s to manage the ZyXEL Device What You Need to Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read this chapter TR 064 TR 064 is a LAN Side DSL CPE Configuration protocol defined by the DSL Forum TR 064 is built
143. P 2612HNU Fx 802 11n ADSL2 VoIP IAD User s Guide oooo0oo0o0000000 oooo0oo00000000 oooo0oo0o0000000 ooo0oo0oo00000000 oooo0oo00000000 oooo0oo00000000 oooo0oo00000000 oooo0oo00000000 oooo0oo0o0000000 oooo0oo00000000 oooo0oo00000000 oooo0oo00000000 oooo0oo0o0000000 oooo0oo00000000 oooo0oo0o0000000 oooo0oo0o0000000 oooo0oo00000000 oooo0oo00000000 oooo0oo0o0000000 oooo0oo00000000 oooo0oo0o0000000 use WAN INTERNET L PHONE 4 F DAA e000 00000000 oooo0oo0o0000000 oooo0oo00000000 eo0o0000000000 A a o00000000000 Default Login Details Sonne on omer IP Address _https 192 168 1 1 000000000000 oooo0oo0o0000000 User Name Admin account admin ees Se clots oooo0oo0o0000000 User account user 000000000000 eo0000000000 0 Password Admin account 1234 User account 1234 ETHERNET _ WLAN WPS DSL POWER ON OFF Firmware Version 3 0 Edition 1 2 2010 www zyxel com Copyright 2010 ZyXEL Communications Corporation About This User s Guide About This User s Guide Intended Audience This manual is intended for people who want to configure the ZyXEL Device using the web configurator Related Documentation e Quick Start Guide The Quick Start Guide is designed to help you get up and running right away It contains information on setting up your network and configuring for Internet access e Support Disc Refer to the included CD for support documents Documentat
144. R OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS PERMITTED ABOVE BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES INCLUDING ANY GENERAL SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE LIBRARY INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCHDAMAGES END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS This Product includes Db under the 4 2 52 License Oracle BerkelyDB This open source database delivers the core data management functionality power scalability and flexibility of enterprise relational databases but without the overhead of a query processing layer It is available under the Open Source License for Oracle BerkelyDB The license permits you to use the software at no charge under the condition that if you use the software in an application you P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Appendix F Open Software Announcements redistribute the complete source code for your application must be available and freely redistributable under reasonable conditions If you do not want to release the source code or your application you may wish to obtain a separate commercial license for this component directly from Oracle P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Appendix F Open Software Announcements P 2
145. R ANY CLAIM BY ANY OTHER PARTY EVEN IF ZyXEL HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES ZyXEL s AGGREGATE LIABILITY WITH RESPECT TO ITS OBLIGATIONS UNDER THIS AGREEMENT OR OTHERWISE WITH RESPECT TO THE SOFTWARE AND DOCUMENTATION OR OTHERWISE SHALL BE EQUAL TO THE PURCHASE PRICE BUT SHALL IN NO EVENT EXCEED THE PRODUCT S PRICE BECAUSE SOME STATES COUNTRIES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU 8 Export Restrictions THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT IS EXPRESSLY MADE SUBJECT TO ANY APPLICABLE LAWS REGULATIONS ORDERS OR OTHER RESTRICTIONS ON THE EXPORT OF THE SOFTWARE OR INFORMATION ABOUT SUCH SOFTWARE WHICH MAY BE IMPOSED FROM TIME TO TIME YOU SHALL NOT EXPORT THE SOFTWARE DOCUMENTATION OR INFORMATION ABOUT THE SOFTWARE AND DOCUMENTATION WITHOUT COMPLYING WITH SUCH LAWS REGULATIONS P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide 375 Appendix F Open Software Announcements 376 ORDERS OR OTHER RESTRICTIONS YOU AGREE TO INDEMNIFY ZyXEL AGAINST ALL CLAIMS LOSSES DAMAGES LIABILITIES COSTS AND EXPENSES INCLUDING REASONABLE ATTORNEYS FEES TO THE EXTENT SUCH CLAIMS ARISE OUT OF ANY BREACH OF THIS SECTION 8 9 Audit Rights ZyXEL SHALL HAVE THE RIGHT AT ITS OWN EXPENSE UPON REASONABLE PRIOR NOTICE TO PERIODICALLY INSPECT AND AUDIT YOUR RECORDS TO ENSURE YOUR COMPLIANCE WITH THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT 10 T
146. S activated Then the two devices connect and set up a secure network by themselves P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs Push Button Configuration WPS Push Button Configuration PBC is initiated by pressing a button on each WPS enabled device and allowing them to connect automatically You do not need to enter any information Not every WPS enabled device has a physical WPS button Some may have a WPS PBC button in their configuration utilities instead of or in addition to the physical button Take the following steps to set up WPS using the button 1 Ensure that the two devices you want to set up are within wireless range of one another 2 Look for a WPS button on each device If the device does not have one log into its configuration utility and locate the button see the device s User s Guide for how to do this for the ZyXEL Device see Section 7 5 on page 143 3 Press the button on one of the devices it doesn t matter which 4 Within two minutes press the button on the other device The registrar sends the network name SSID and security key through an secure connection to the enrollee If you need to make sure that WPS worked check the list of associated wireless clients in the AP s configuration utility If you see the wireless client in the list WPS was successful PIN Configuration Each WPS enabled device has its own PIN Personal Identification Number This may either be
147. SCII characters Encoded Format to convert the binary certificate into a printable form You can copy and paste the certificate into an e mail to send to friends or colleagues or you can copy and paste the certificate into a text editor and save the file on a management computer for later distribution via floppy disk for example Back Click this to return to the previous screen Apply Click this to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device You can only change the name and or set whether or not you want the ZyXEL Device to check the CRL that the certification authority issues before trusting a certificate issued by the certification authority Cancel Click this to quit and return to the Trusted CAs screen P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide 21 7 Chapter 15 Certificates P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Static Route 16 1 Overview The ZyXEL Device usually uses the default gateway to route outbound traffic from computers on the LAN to the Internet To have the ZyXEL Device send data to devices not reachable through the default gateway use static routes For example the next figure shows a computer A connected to the ZyXEL Device s LAN interface The ZyXEL Device routes most traffic from A to the Internet through the ZyXEL Device s default gateway R1 You create one static route to connect to services offered by your ISP behind router R2 You create another static route to communicate with a separate
148. SIP account with the SIP server the attempt failed The ZyXEL Device automatically tries to register the SIP account when you turn on the ZyXEL Device or when you activate it Account Status This shows Active when the SIP account has been registered and ready for use or In Active when the SIP account is not yet registered URI This field displays the account number and service domain of the SIP account You can change these in VoIP gt SIP gt SIP Settings P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 4 Status Screens 4 2 DHCP Client List Use this table to assign IP addresses on the LAN to specific individual computers based on their MAC Addresses Figure 9 Network gt LAN gt Client List DHCP Client Table IP Address MAC Address Add Status HostName IP Address MAC CY 1 TWPC13262 01 192 168 1 35 00 19 cb 41 78 10 DO 2 9 twpc1 3665 01 192 168 1 34 00 19 cb d4 4d c5 DO 3 9 TA PC 192 168 1 33 00 02 e3 56 16 9d O Apply Reset Refresh The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 5 Network gt LAN gt Client List LABEL DESCRIPTION IP Address Enter the IP address that you want to assign to the computer on your LAN with the MAC address that you will also specify MAC Address Enter the MAC address of a computer on your LAN Add Click Add to add a static DHCP entry This is the index number of the static IP table entry row
149. Screens ccccccccccscceccecsessessssaeceeceseeeeeeeseesees 203 14 1 2 What You Need to Know About Firewall ccccccccscsssssssseseseseeeseseseeeeseeeeeeeeseeaeaes 203 TE mhe Frowa SOreG i nornin d a SAA 204 14 3 Firewall Technical Reference sericsieiisinsennibnedsein aieeaa aio 206 143 1 Firewall Rules veri cdec encase one toace rena E E EE a EEE 206 14 3 2 Guidelines For Enhancing Security With Your Firewall c ccesseeeseeeesteeeees 206 143 3 Securty LGN GR AUONIS gaiccact dxtzdacncosanlonst ie A lama iacaedredaladienass 207 Chapter 15 MELEE EG U EAE E E E A aed 209 E OVAN E aaa E E a aes eas a aa eee 209 15 11 What You Gan Do in this Gia pier ssepius anai 209 1512 What You Needto KNOW coaira EE 209 AAS vennina a CRIES segiran a i 211 To My Came oE aaa E E E 212 AOD WEE CAR cissiepicBas bien i a a E a epee et wh ieee 214 TS TS eE A E A sind N E E N S EEN 215 19S METO CA DEGE oa a cediue Sakuma ap caede bee ocne enue xckeathoepades 216 Chapter 16 SUO ROUI ane ee en per ee nee ee een yer een iy renee tee gree eererrerer rer ere terete err rrr terre rere are 219 i Sei ny ae een eee Mereccer E mer ener eer AE ene eey eter er ny ene tr 219 16 1 1 What You Can Do inthis Chapter sscaielcciteesescsseiaeeicerde noxaagitdabeiccssateiddetxaknexoneanss 219 TS CGomounad SAG ANTE gonirioriiaiiirria Ra N A E 220 16 2 1 Static Route Ada Edit oeiia aa a aa i a aa iada rianan 221 P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide 1
150. Scripts and Java Permissions In order to use the web configurator you need to allow e Web browser pop up windows from your device e JavaScripts enabled by default e Java permissions enabled by default Note Internet Explorer 6 screens are used here Screens for other Internet Explorer versions may vary Internet Explorer Pop up Blockers You may have to disable pop up blocking to log into your device Either disable pop up blocking enabled by default in Windows XP SP Service Pack 2 or allow pop up blocking and create an exception for your device s IP address Disable Pop up Blockers 1 In Internet Explorer select Tools Pop up Blocker and then select Turn Off Pop up Blocker Figure 164 Pop up Blocker Tools Mail and News Pop up Blocker urn Off Pop up Blocker Manage Add ons Pop up Blocker Setting pom mee Synchronize Windows Update Windows Messenger Internet Options You can also check if pop up blocking is disabled in the Pop up Blocker section in the Privacy tab P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide 335 Appendix C Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions 1 In Internet Explorer select Tools Internet Options Privacy 2 Clear the Block pop ups check box in the Pop up Blocker section of the screen This disables any web pop up blockers you may have enabled Figure 165 Internet Options Privacy Internet Options PIR General Security Privacy Content Connections
151. Service Setup Choose Add Modify or Remove to configure a WAN service over a selected interface eS CE cH MeT raiy etho 14 ipoe_1_1_1 iPoE N A N A Disabled Enabled amp ti Add 4 Select nas1 as your layer 2 interface and click Next This is the interface you created in the WAN gt Layer 2 Interface screen WAN Service Interface Configuration Select a layer 2 interface for this service nas z Back Next P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorial 5 Choose the WAN Service Type specified by your DSL service provider For this example the service provider requires a username and password to establish Internet connection Therefore select PPPoE as the WAN service type and click Next You can also enter a brief description for this service or user the default name given by the ZyXEL Device which is pppoe_2_1_1 in this example C Bridging Internet Connection Connection WAN Service Configuration elect WAN ceruice type ppp over Ethernet PPPoE IP over Ethernet Enter Service Description pppoe_2_1_1 Back Next 6 Inthe following screen enter the account information provided to you The following values are used here PPP Username 1234 DSL Ex com PPP Password ABCDEF PPPoE Service My DSL Name Authentication AUTO Method Static IP 192 168 1 32 Address Others PPPoE Passthrough Disabled NAT Enabled IGMP Mult
152. TUNNEL User Defined 47 PPTP Point to Point Tunneling GRE Protocol enables secure transfer of data over public networks This is the data channel RCMD TCP 512 Remote Command Service REAL_AUDIO TCP 7070 A streaming audio service that enables real time sound over the web REXEC TCP 514 Remote Execution Daemon RLOGIN TCP 513 Remote Login RTELNET TCP 107 Remote Telnet RTSP TCP UDP 554 The Real Time Streaming media control Protocol RTSP is a remote control for multimedia on the Internet SFTP TCP 115 Simple File Transfer Protocol SMTP TCP 25 Simple Mail Transfer Protocol is the message exchange standard for the Internet SMTP enables you to move messages from one e mail server to another SNMP TCP UDP 161 Simple Network Management Program SNMP TRAPS TCP UDP 162 Traps for use with the SNMP RFC 1215 SQL NET TCP 1521 Structured Query Language is an interface to access data on many different types of database systems including mainframes midrange systems UNIX systems and network servers SSH TCP UDP 22 Secure Shell Remote Login Program STRM WORKS UDP 1558 Stream Works Protocol SYSLOG UDP 514 Syslog allows you to send system logs to a UNIX server TACACS UDP 49 Login Host Protocol used for Terminal Access Controller Access Control System TELNET TCP 23 Telnet is the login and terminal emulation protocol common on the Internet and in UNIX environments It operates over TCP IP networks Its prim
153. Tutorial 33 Introducing the ZyXEL Device 1 1 Overview The ZyXEL Device is an ADSL2 Integrated Access Device IAD that combines an ADSL2 router with Voice over IP VoIP communication capabilities to allow you to use a traditional analog telephone to make Internet calls By integrating DSL and NAT you are provided with ease of installation and high speed shared Internet access The ZyXEL Device is also a complete security solution with a robust firewall and content filtering Please refer to the following description of the product name format H denotes an integrated 4 port hub switch N denotes wireless functionality including 802 11n mode There is an embedded mini PCI module for IEEE 802 11b g n wireless LAN connectivity U denotes a USB port used to share files via a USB memory stick or a USB hard drive The ZyXEL Device can also function as a print server with an USB printer connected Models ending in 1 for example P 2612HNU F1 denote a device that works over the analog telephone system POTS Plain Old Telephone Service Models ending in 3 denote a device that works over ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network or T ISDN UR 2 Only use firmware for your ZyXEL Device s specific model Refer to the label on the bottom of your ZyXEL Device See the chapter on product specifications for a full list of features 1 2 Applications for the ZyXEL Device Here are some example uses
154. U Fx User s Guide 67 Chapter 3 Tutorial 16 If the following screen displays select Keep existing driver radio button and click Next if you already have a printer driver installed on your computer and you do not want to change it Otherwise select Replace existing driver to replace it with the new driver you selected in the previous screen and click Next Add Printer Wizard Use Existing Driver A driver is already installed for this printer You can use or replace the existing driver HP DeskJet 1220C Do you want to keep the existing driver or use the new one O Replace existing driver 17 Type a name to identify the printer and then click Next to continue Add Printer Wizard Name Your Printer You must assign a name to this printer Type a name for this printer Because some programs do not support printer and server name combinations of more than 31 characters it is best to keep the name as short as possible Printer name HP DeskJet 1220 Do you want to use this printer as the default printer Yes O No 18 The ZyXEL Device is a print server itself and you do not need to have your computer act as a print server by sharing the printer with other users in the same P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorial network just select Do not share this printer and click Next to proceed to the following screen Add Printer Wizard Printer Sharing You can share this printer with other ne
155. VC This reduces payload overhead since there is no need to carry protocol information in each Protocol Data Unit PDU payload e LLC ENCAPSULATION More than one protocol can be carried 7 over the same VC This is available only when you select PPPOA in the Select DSL Link Type field e LLC SNAP ROUTING In LCC encapsulation an IEEE 802 2 Logical Link Control LLC header is prefixed to each routed PDU to identify the PDUs The LCC header can be followed by an IEEE 802 1a SubNetwork Attachment Point SNAP header This is ae only when you select IPoA in the Select DSL Link Type ield e LLC SNAP BRIDGING In LCC encapsulation bridged PDUs are encapsulated by identifying the type of the bridged media in the SNAP header This is available only when you select EoA in the Select DSL Link Type field Service Category Select UBR Without PCR for applications that are non time sensitive such as e mail Select CBR Constant Bit Rate to specify fixed always on bandwidth for voice or data traffic Select Realtime VBR real time Variable Bit Rate for applications with bursty connections that require closely controlled delay and delay variation Select Non Realtime VBR non real time Variable Bit Rate for connections that do not require closely controlled delay and delay variation P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup Table 11 Network gt WAN gt Layer 2 Interface Configuration continued
156. XEL Device Cancel Click this to begin configuring this screen afresh P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 17 Quality of Service QoS 17 4 1 QoS Class Add Edit Click the Add button or the Edit icon in the Class Setup screen to configure a classifier Figure 84 Advanced gt QoS gt Class Setup Add Edit Class Configuration I Active Class Name l Classification Order Last gt Forward To Interface Unchange 7 DSCP Mark Unchange 0 63 802 1P Mark Unchange z VLAN ID Unchange st 4095 To Queue gt Criteria Configuration Basic I From Interface Lan id I Ether Type iP 0x0800 gt Source IT MAC Address l MAC Mask F Exclude I IP Address IP Subnet Mask I Exclude TCP UDP Port F Range 1 65535 IT Exclude Destination IT MAC Address l MAC Mask W Exclude IF IP Address IP Subnet Mask W Exclude TCP UDP Port E Range 1 65535 I Exclude Others m 802 1P fore E Tm Exclude TT VLAN ID rT 1 4095 I Exclude I IP Protocol he g 7 T Exclude m IP PacketLength 46 1504 TM Exclude DSCP os IE Exclude I TCP ACK I Exclude M DHCP YendorClassID DHCP Option 60 v Exclude Class ID D mmg I Serice Fr I Exclude Back Cancel P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 17 Quality of Service QoS The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 65 Advanced gt QoS gt Class Setup Add Edit
157. a 1970 Dodge Challenger and her favorite movie is Vanishing Point which you know was made in 1971 you could use 7Ododchal71lvanpoi as your security key Signal Problems Because wireless networks are radio networks their signals are subject to limitations of distance interference and absorption Problems with distance occur when the two radios are too far apart Problems with interference occur when other radio waves interrupt the data signal Interference may come from other radio transmissions such as military or air traffic control communications or from machines that are coincidental emitters such as electric motors or microwaves Problems with absorption occur when physical objects such as thick walls are between the two radios muffling the signal 132 P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN 7 1 3 Before You Begin Before you start using these screens ask yourself the following questions See Section 7 1 2 on page 130 if some of the terms used here do not make sense to you e What wireless standards do the other wireless devices support IEEE 802 11g for example What is the most appropriate standard to use e What security options do the other wireless devices support WPA PSK for example What is the best one to use e Do the other wireless devices support WPS Wi Fi Protected Setup If so you can set up a well secured network very easily Even if some of your devices support WPS and
158. a USB printer via your ZyXEL Device What You Need to Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read this chapter Print Server This is a computer or other device which manages one or more printers and which sends print jobs to each printer from the computer itself or other devices P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 12 Print Server 12 1 3 Operating System An operating system OS is the interface which helps you manage a computer Common examples are Microsoft Windows Mac OS or Linux TCP IP TCP IP Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol is a set of communications protocols that most of the Internet runs on Port A port maps a network service such as http to a process running on your computer such as a process run by your web browser When traffic from the Internet is received on your computer the port number is used to identify which process running on your computer it is intended for Line Printer Remote Protocol The Line Printer Remote LPR Protocol is software that provides printer spooling and print server features using TCP IP to connect printers and computers on a network Supported OSs Your operating system must support TCP IP ports for printing and be compatible with the LPR protocol The following OSs support ZyXEL Device s printer sharing feature e Microsoft Windows 95 Windows 98 SE Second Edition Windows Me Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 Windows XP or Macint
159. able bidirectional support I Enable printer pooling 5 A Printer Ports window appears Select Standard TCP IP Port and click New Port Available port types Adobe PDF Port Local Port Microsoft Document Imaging Writer Monitor Network Print Port DDE Dp Standard TCP IP Port 6 Add Standard TCP IP Printer Port Wizard window opens up Click Next to start configuring the printer port Add Standard TCP IP Printer Port Wizard x Welcome to the Add Standard TCP IP Printer Port Wizard You use this wizard to add a port for a network printer Before continuing be sure that 1 The device is tumed on 2 The network is connected and configured To continue click Next P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorial 7 Enter the IP address of the ZyXEL Device to which the printer is connected in the Printer Name or IP Address field In our example we use the default IP address of the ZyXEL Device 192 168 1 1 The Port Name field updates automatically to reflect the IP address of the port Click Next Note The computer from which you are configuring the TCP IP printer port must be on the same LAN in order to use the printer sharing function Add Standard TCP IP Printer Port Wizard xj Add Port RS For which device do you want to add a port gt Y Enter the Printer Name or IP address and a port name for the desired device Printer Name or IP A
160. ad a new or previously saved configuration file from your computer to your ZyXEL Device Table 81 Restore Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION File Path Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse to find it Browse Click Browse to find the file you want to upload Remember that you must decompress compressed ZIP files before you can upload them Upload Click Upload to begin the upload process P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide 257 Chapter 22 Tools Do not turn off the ZyXEL Device while configuration file upload is in progress After you see a restore configuration successful screen you must then wait one minute before logging into the ZyXEL Device again Figure 97 Configuration Upload Successful Router is restarting now Please wait As there will be no indication of when the process is complete please wait for two minute before attempting to access the router again The ZyXEL Device automatically restarts in this time causing a temporary network disconnect In some operating systems you may see the following icon on your desktop Figure 98 Network Temporarily Disconnected D Local Area Connection Network cable unplugged If you uploaded the default configuration file you may need to change the IP address of your computer to be in the same subnet as that of the default device IP address 192 168 1 1
161. addresses manually enter them in the DNS server fields 2 If your ISP dynamically assigns the DNS server IP addresses along with the ZyXEL Device s WAN IP address set the DNS server fields to get the DNS server address from the ISP P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide LAN Setup 6 1 Overview A Local Area Network LAN is a shared communication system to which many computers are attached A LAN is usually located in one immediate area such as a building or floor of a building The LAN screens can help you configure a LAN DHCP server and manage IP addresses e See Section 6 5 on page 126 for more information on LANs e See Appendix A on page 293 for more information on IP addresses and subnetting 6 1 1 What You Can Do in this Chapter e Use the IP screen Section 6 2 on page 122 to set the LAN IP address and subnet mask of your ZyXEL device e Use the DHCP Server screen Section 6 3 on page 123 to configure the DNS server information that the ZyXEL Device sends to the DHCP client devices on the LAN e Use the Client List screen Section 6 4 on page 124 to assign IP addresses on the LAN to specific individual computers based on their MAC Addresses P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide 121 Chapter 6 LAN Setup 6 1 2 What You Need To Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read this chapter IP Address Similar to the way houses on a st
162. ae 248 2ko he LOG Ssinge SEREN cdcesccovcicscunaioresnespociaieseenssadticianaaaersouneunbeaden oadaaaeneeuees 249 ZTA LOG DOSCDIONS siccis ASS 250 Chapter 22 WOO a P A T T E A E E E A E A E T 253 EGER T OVON iaa a a a E E 253 22 1 1 What You Can Do in this Chaple ciccccccancssdsiacnceiasscondsdesacnscnedndhiondiesscantedasateaaetanss 253 22 1 2 What You Need TO KNOW sssrierrastoniiranisrinindan s ENa aE ia 253 Pee be Danes OU BIG enie 255 daa FPimwale Uporade GOGGI iscrisse a a a taceecebeateciue 255 22 3 MMe CONGEST Gereci enigann i N Ai 256 22A ROS a a E ETE 259 22 5 Technical PSIG Nee ercas E NA A A 260 LEI DEAN ENS iaoi se E EN E N AOSE SAA 260 E E A E E E A E r L E E 263 Chapter 23 DIAQIOSIG siisisnais eanne ARAA SEARA AANEEN TANARA 265 2O WAR naopen aa a a des aie gdiede aged t iy 265 23 1 1 What You Can Do in the Diagnostic Screens ccccccceessceceeeeeteeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeaaeens 265 23 2 The General Diagnostic Sereen ss iiasssssssisancsdsrransisesrsannissrerniederiannieerrauniaveranseirus 265 Chapter 24 PRE UN gia cece sande cvs hens pcm ge ame E E E E 269 2A A ec parent hanes nen setetiancanc thes ascan tae stimt cae tania deo bac asee nea ede 269 Piet PIRI CMMI PEN conte dds Aicccecn bate doehatci aoa a EOE EE 269 Chapter 25 THOUBIGS MOOT PPPT E TTT TTT A r TE 271 ES TONENE a a ed eaney eeaneonareetesa seamen ats 271 25 2 Power Hardware Connections and LEDS cscciscisssciceiacasncinesesennsbocdsdaneavei
163. after the address For example 192 1 1 0 25 is equivalent to saying 192 1 1 0 with subnet mask 255 255 255 128 The following table shows some possible subnet masks using both notations Table 93 Alternative Subnet Mask Notation SUBNETMASK NOTATION BINARY DECIMAL 255 255 255 0 24 0000 0000 0 255 255 255 128 25 1000 0000 128 255 255 255 192 26 1100 0000 192 255 255 255 224 27 1110 0000 224 255 255 255 240 28 1111 0000 240 255 255 255 248 29 1111 1000 248 255 255 255 252 30 1111 1100 252 Subnetting You can use subnetting to divide one network into multiple sub networks In the following example a network administrator creates two sub networks to isolate a group of servers from the rest of the company network for security reasons In this example the company network address is 192 168 1 0 The first three octets of the address 192 168 1 are the network number and the remaining octet is the host ID allowing a maximum of 28 2 or 254 possible hosts P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Appendix A IP Addresses and Subnetting The following figure shows the company network before subnetting Figure 114 Subnetting Example Before Subnetting Gm EEE HEHEHE HEHEHE EEE i 4 i I i I I I i 1 i Internet I I 4 I wa I E y I i a I I 192 168 1 0 24 4 4 eee eee ee ne You can borrow one of the host ID bits to divid
164. agement Protocol ISAKMP RFC 2516 A Method for Transmitting PPP Over Ethernet PPPoE RFC 2684 Multiprotocol Encapsulation over ATM Adaptation Layer 5 RFC 2766 Network Address Translation Protocol IEEE 802 11 Also known by the brand Wi Fi denotes a set of Wireless LAN WLAN standards developed by working group 11 of the IEEE LAN MAN Standards Committee IEEE 802 IEEE 802 11b Uses the 2 4 gigahertz GHz band IEEE 802 11g Uses the 2 4 gigahertz GHz band IEEE 802 11n Uses the 2 4 gigahertz GHz band and 5 gigahertz GHz band IEEE 802 11d Standard for Local and Metropolitan Area Networks Media Access Control MAC Bridges IEEE 802 11x Port Based Network Access Control IEEE 802 11e QoS IEEE 802 11 e Wireless LAN for Quality of Service ANSI T1 413 Issue 2 Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line ADSL standard G dmt G 992 1 G 992 1 Asymmetrical Digital Subscriber Line ADSL Transceivers ITU G 992 1 G DMT ITU standard for ADSL using discrete multitone modulation ITU G 992 2 G Lite ITU standard for ADSL using discrete multitone modulation ITU G 992 3 ITU standard also referred to as ADSL2 that extends the G dmt bis capability of basic ADSL in data rates ITU G 992 4 ITU standard also referred to as ADSL2 that extends the G lite bis capability of basic ADSL in data rates ITU G 992 5 ADSL2 ITU standard also referred to as ADSL2 that extends the capability of b
165. aintenance gt Tools gt Restart or when you reset it see Section 1 6 on page 26 Current This field displays the current date and time in the ZyXEL Device You Date Time can change this in Maintenance gt System gt Time Setting System This displays whether the ZyXEL Device is functioning as a router or a Mode bridge P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 4 Status Screens LABEL DESCRIPTION CPU Usage __ This field displays what percentage of the ZyXEL Device s processing ability is currently used When this percentage is close to 100 the ZyXEL Device is running at full load and the throughput is not going to improve anymore If you want some applications to have more throughput you should turn off other applications Memory This field displays what percentage of the ZyXEL Device s memory is Usage currently used Usually this percentage should not increase much If memory usage does get close to 100 the ZyXEL Device is probably becoming unstable and you should restart the device See Section 22 4 on page 259 or turn off the device unplug the power for a few seconds NAT This field displays what percentage of traffic passing through the ZyXEL Sessions Device is using NAT Usage Interface Status Interface This column displays each interface the ZyXEL Device has Status This field indicates whether or not the ZyXEL Device is using the interface For the DSL
166. all WAN interface and service types as well as all DSL link types as the last step in the WAN setup process Figure 27 Network gt WAN gt Internet Connection WAN Configuration Summary WAN Setup Summary Connection Type ipoe Make sure that the settings below match the settings provided by your ISP Service Name ipoe_1_1_1 IP Address Automatically assigned NAT Disabled e T TEE Disabled Click Save to apply this interface Click Back to modify the settings Back Save The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 20 WAN Configuration Configuration Summary LABEL DESCRIPTION Connection Type This is the encapsulation method used by this connection Service Name This is the name of the service IP Address This shows whether the WAN IP address is assigned by the ISP manually configured or not configurable NAT This shows whether NAT is active or not for this connection IGMP Multicast This shows whether IGMP multicasting is active or not for this connection Back Click this button to return to the previous screen Apply Save Click this button to save your changes 5 4 Technical Reference The following section contains additional technical information about the ZyXEL Device features described in this chapter Encapsulation Be sure to use the encapsulation method required by your ISP The ZyXEL Device can work in bridge mo
167. an application program that uses the facility other than as an argument passed when the facility is invoked then you must make a good faith effort to ensure that in the event an application does not supply such function or table the facility still operates and performs whatever part of its purpose remains meaningful For example a function in a library to compute square roots has a purpose that is entirely well defined independent of the application Therefore Subsection 2d requires that any application supplied function or table used by this function must be optional if the application does not supply it the square root function must still compute square roots These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Library and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves then this License and its terms do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Library the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it Thus it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you rather the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of
168. and test your rules after you configure them Consider these security ramifications before creating a rule Does this rule stop LAN users from accessing critical resources on the Internet For example if IRC is blocked are there users that require this service Is it possible to modify the rule to be more specific For example if IRC is blocked for all users will a rule that blocks just certain users be more effective Does a rule that allows Internet users access to resources on the LAN create a security vulnerability For example if FTP ports TCP 20 21 are allowed from the Internet to the LAN Internet users may be able to connect to computers with running FTP servers Does this rule conflict with any existing rules Once these questions have been answered adding rules is simply a matter of entering the information into the correct fields in the web configurator screens P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide 207 Chapter 14 Firewall P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide 15 1 15 1 1 15 1 2 2 Certificates Overview The ZyXEL Device can use certificates also called digital IDs to authenticate users Certificates are based on public private key pairs A certificate contains the certificate owner s identity and public key Certificates provide a way to exchange public keys for use in authentication What You Can Do in this Chapter e Use the My Certificate screens see Section 15 2 on page 212 to view and impo
169. annel Selection Note Output Power HT Parameters Y Short GI Channel Width V Enable Wireless LAN Operating Channel disabled 1 If you set Channel Selection to Auto channel scanning can take some time Wireless Advanced Setup Intra BSS Traffic Blocking A MSDU Aggregation SSID_Example3 Hide SSID Enable Hide SSID Enable Hide SSID Enable Hide SSID 802 11b g n v Channel1 v Scan High M Low Med High 20 40 Mhz v The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 24 Network gt Wireless LAN gt General LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable Check this to activate wireless LAN Wireless LAN Multiple SSID Check this to have the ZyXEL Device broadcast more than one SSID SSID1 The SSID Service Set Dentity identifies the service set with which a wireless device is associated Wireless devices associating to the access a point AP must have the same SSID Enter a descriptive name up to 32 SSID 4 printable 7 bit ASCII characters for the wireless LAN Enter the SSID you want to use If you want to use more than one SSID check Multiple SSID enter the SSID s in the field s and click Enable You can enable up to four SSIDs simultaneously and each SSID can have its own security configuration refer to Section 7 3 on page 136 for setting the wireless security Note SSID1 is enabled by default and cann
170. aranaveracanseveenss 271 26 3 Zy AEL Davicto Access and Logi eiscunisbasnisii isidi Boise haaueemmtaieannde 272 20A NEMEL POCO SS ehian EE 274 1a Phone CA ana VolP a 275 25 C USN ACCOUN aaa a a A a i a E 276 e Oon AUN n EE 276 eee CS INE E e IOE min EE A A A OAA ae 277 25 7 USB Deyice GME COM seriis ranangga ann aIr AAAA EADAE E AA ANNEN aaRS 278 P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Table of Contents Chapter 26 Prodiit Spee MC ANDI ae een ee ee gan fe ne ne See aaa ne eee on ee 279 Part IV Appendices and Index sseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 291 Appendix A IP Addresses and Subnetting sc iisiiccsdscscssusdsiccsasaesariereananssiceteiedianidrsectmennsaiaan 293 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address cceceecseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneaeeenneaes 305 Appendix C Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions cccceeeeeeeeeeeeees 335 Appendix D Wireless LANS sic ccsiieradiararierseidreoiaateimiesiacraianieieesiietediennmenniadioianmaernienteeian 345 Appendix E Common Ber OSS sncisscinnsnsdsicsecanearndinssenasiiesiviietemenaieahaaiediemddaniaieian 369 Appendix F Open Software Announcements sciciisiscieesiissiceierinserorieninsernieriavasrennataasersentannes 373 Appendix G Legal IMormat f srera EE i 397 e OO RiKaAbmAARAAnanNAsaniiaae 399 P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide PART Introduction Introducing the ZyXEL Device 21 Introducing the Web Configurator 27
171. art Menu Favorites Control Panel Settings Run uy Shut Down The Printers folder opens up First you need to open up the properties windows for the printer you want to configure a TCP IP port 2 Locate your printer 3 Right click on your printer and select Properties l Printers File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Back gt y GQsearch Gyrolders lt 4 MS GF X A Ea Address a Printers Ta iei Name J Documents Status 43 LJ B Add Printer Ti Gf Acrobat Distiller 0 Ready Printers Gf Adobe PDF 0 Ready Peere Qf Canon iR5000 6000 PCLSe 0 Ready EPSON Stylus C45 Series s 0 Ready oO Documents 0 pen v Set as Default Printer Status Ready Printing Preferences Model EPSON Stylus C45 Series Pause Printing Waiting Time 0 Cancel All Documents Sharing Use Printer Offline SON Suppo EPSON Support Create Shortcut Delete Rename P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorial 4 Select the Ports tab and click Add Port 2x Color Management paa ersion Information General Sharing Pots Advanced EPSON Stylus C45 Series Print to the following port s Documents will print to the first free checked port COLPT1 Printer Port WebWorks Rasterizer Cano OCOLPT2 Printer Port COLPT3 Printer Port COCOM1 Serial Port C COM2 Serial Port C COM3 Serial Port O COM4 Serial Port zi al aaa IV En
172. ary function is to allow users to log into remote host systems P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide 371 Appendix E Common Services 372 Table 105 Commonly Used Services continued NAME PROTOCOL PORT S DESCRIPTION TFTP UDP 69 Trivial File Transfer Protocol is an Internet file transfer protocol similar to FTP but uses the UDP User Datagram Protocol rather than TCP Transmission Control Protocol VDOLIVE TCP 7000 Another videoconferencing solution P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Open Software Announcements End User License Agreement for P 2612HNU F1 and or P 2612HNU F3 WARNING ZyXEL Communications Corp IS WILLING TO LICENSE THE SOFTWARE TO YOU ONLY UPON THE CONDITION THAT YOU ACCEPT ALL OF THE TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT PLEASE READ THE TERMS CAREFULLY BEFORE COMPLETING THE INSTALLATION PROCESS AS INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE WILL INDICATE YOUR ASSENT TO THEM IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THESE TERMS THEN ZyXEL IS UNWILLING TO LICENSE THE SOFTWARE TO YOU IN WHICH EVENT YOU SHOULD RETURN THE UNINSTALLED SOFTWARE AND PACKAGING TO THE PLACE FROM WHICH IT WAS ACQUIRED OR ZyXEL AND YOUR MONEY WILL BE REFUNDED 1 Grant of License for Personal Use ZyXEL Communications Corp ZyXEL grants you a non exclusive non sublicense non transferable license to use the program with which this license is distributed the Software including any docume
173. ased on it under Section 2 in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following a Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine readable source code which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above ona medium customarily used for software interchange or b Accompany it with a written offer valid for at least three years to give any third party for a charge no more than your cost of physically performing source distribution a complete machine readable copy of the corresponding source code to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange or c Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute corresponding source code This alternative is allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you received the program in object code or executable form with such an offer in accord with Subsection b above The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it For an executable work complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains plus any associated interface definition files plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the executable However as a special exception the source code distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed in either sour
174. asic ADSL by doubling the number of downstream bits Microsoft PPTP MS PPTP Microsoft s implementation of Point to Point Tunneling Protocol RFC 2383 ST2 over ATM Protocol Specification UNI 3 1 Version TR 069 TR 069 DSL Forum Standard for CPE Wan Management 1 363 5 Compliant AAL5 SAR Segmentation And Re assembly Wall mounting Instructions Do the following to hang your ZyXEL Device on a wall Note See Table 85 on page 279 for the size of screws to use and how far apart to place them Locate a high position on a wall that is free of obstructions Use a sturdy wall P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide 287 Chapter 26 Product Specifications 2 Drill two holes for the screws Make sure the distance between the centers of the holes matches what is listed in the product specifications appendix Be careful to avoid damaging pipes or cables located inside the wall when drilling holes for the screws 3 Do not screw the screws all the way into the wall Leave a small gap of about 0 5 cm between the heads of the screws and the wall 4 Make sure the screws are snugly fastened to the wall They need to hold the weight of the ZyXEL Device with the connection cables 5 Align the holes on the back of the ZyXEL Device with the screws on the wall Hang the ZyXEL Device on the screws Figure 111 Wall mounting Example HE 5 iN TT 288 P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 26 Product Specif
175. at its default setting P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide 1 57 Chapter 9 Voice 9 1 2 What You Need to Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read this chapter VoIP VoIP stands for Voice over IP IP is the Internet Protocol which is the message carrying standard the Internet runs on So Voice over IP is the sending of voice signals Speech over the Internet or another network that uses the Internet Protocol SIP SIP stands for Session Initiation Protocol SIP is a signalling standard that lets one network device like a computer or the ZyXEL Device send messages to another In VoIP these messages are about phone calls over the network For example when you dial a number on your ZyXEL Device it sends a SIP message over the network asking the other device the number you dialed to take part in the call SIP Accounts A SIP account is a type of VoIP account It is an arrangement with a service provider that lets you make phone calls over the Internet When you set the ZyXEL Device to use your SIP account to make calls the ZyXEL Device is able to send all the information about the phone call to your service provider on the Internet Strictly speaking you don t need a SIP account It is possible for one SIP device like the ZyXEL Device to call another without involving a SIP service provider However the networking difficulties involved in doing this make it tremendously impractical under normal circums
176. ate at which the AP if using Update Timer WPA 2 PSK key management or RADIUS server if using WPA 2 key management sends a new group key out to all clients Setting of the Group Key Update Timer is also supported in WPA 2 PSK mode The ZyXEL Device default is 1800 seconds 30 minutes ReKey Method e The ZyXEL Device can automatically disconnect a wireless station from the wired network after a period of inactivity or after a certain number of packets have been processed The wireless station needs to enter the username and password again before access to the wired network is allowed Select TIME to have the ZyXEL Device automatically disconnects a wireless station from the wired network after a period of inactivity e Select PKT to have the ZyXEL Device automatically disconnects a wireless station from the wired network after a certain number of packets have been processed e Select NONE if you do not want the connection between the ZyXEL Device and a wireless station to time out P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Table 28 Network gt Wireless LAN gt Security WPA WPA2 LABEL DESCRIPTION Encryption Type Select TKIP to enable Temporal Key Integrity Protocol TKIP security on your wireless network Use this if the other access points on your network support do not have an AES option Select AES to enable Advanced Encryption System AES security on your wireless network AES p
177. ation IP This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination Address Routing is always based on network number If you need to specify a route to a single host use a subnet mask of 255 255 255 255 in the subnet mask field to force the network number to be identical to the host ID IP Subnet Enter the IP subnet mask here Mask Gateway IP Enter the IP address of the gateway The gateway is a router or switch on Address the same network segment as the device s LAN or WAN port The gateway helps forward packets to their destinations Back Click this to return to the previous screen without saving Apply Click this to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device Reset Click this to begin configuring this screen afresh P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide 221 Chapter 16 Static Route 222 P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Quality of Service QoS 17 1 Overview 17 1 1 This chapter discusses the ZyXEL Device s QoS screens Use these screens to set up your ZyXEL Device to use QoS for traffic management Quality of Service QoS refers to both a network s ability to deliver data with minimum delay and the networking methods used to control the use of bandwidth QoS allows the ZyXEL Device to group and prioritize application traffic and fine tune network performance Without QoS all traffic data is equally likely to be dropped when the network is congested This can cause a
178. authenticate users attempting to establish a connection The method used to secure the data that you send through an established connection depends on the type of connection For example a VPN tunnel might use the triple DES encryption algorithm The certification authority uses its private key to sign certificates Anyone can then use the certification authority s public key to verify the certificates Certification Path A certification path is the hierarchy of certification authority certificates that validate a certificate The ZyXEL Device does not trust a certificate if any certificate on its path has expired or been revoked Certificate Directory Servers Certification authorities maintain directory servers with databases of valid and revoked certificates A directory of certificates that have been revoked before the scheduled expiration is called a CRL Certificate Revocation List The ZyXEL Device can check a peer s certificate against a directory server s list of revoked certificates The framework of servers software procedures and policies that handles keys is called PKI public key infrastructure Advantages of Certificates Certificates offer the following benefits e The ZyXEL Device only has to store the certificates of the certification authorities that you decide to trust no matter how many devices you need to authenticate e Key distribution is simple and very secure since you can freely distribute public key
179. available from the ZyXEL web site and use the web configurator an HTTP FTP SCP SFTP tool to put it on the ZyXEL Device Note Only upload firmware for your specific model Configuration Backup amp Restoration Make a copy of the ZyXEL Device s configuration You can put it back on the ZyXEL Device later if you decide to revert back to an earlier configuration Network Address Translation NAT Each computer on your network must have its own unique IP address Use NAT to convert your public IP address es to multiple private IP addresses for the computers on your network Port Forwarding If you have a server mail or web server for example on your network you can use this feature to let people access it from the Internet IEEE 802 1Q and IEEE 802 1P Use IEEE 802 1Q VLAN and IEEE 802 1P priority tags in implementing QoS Configure VLANs based on port PVC and SSID Specify a PVID to assign to untagged frames or priority tagged frames received on this port SSID or PVC Assign a priority for the traffic transmitted through a port SSID or PVC DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Use this feature to have the ZyXEL Device assign IP addresses an IP default gateway and DNS servers to computers on your Protocol network Your device can also act as a Surrogate DHCP server DHCP Relay where it relays IP address assignment from the actual real DHCP server to the clients Dynamic DNS With Dynamic DNS
180. ave the ZyXEL Device set this value automatically Apply Click this to save your settings back to the ZyXEL Device Cancel Click this to begin configuring this screen afresh P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 17 Quality of Service QoS 17 3 The Queue Setup Screen Use this screen to configure QoS queue assignment Click QoS gt Queue Setup to open the screen as shown next Figure 81 Advanced gt QoS gt Queue Setup Queue Setup Click the button to add a new queue Add maximum of 8 entries No Active Name Interface Priority Weight Buffer Management Rate Limit kbps Modify 1 r Example_1 WAN 7 1 DT 10000 g wi Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 62 Advanced gt QoS gt Queue Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Add Click this button to create a new entry No This is the index number of this entry Active Select the check box to enable the queue Name This shows the descriptive name of this queue Interface This shows the name of the ZyXEL Device s interface through which traffic in this queue passes Priority This shows the priority of this queue Weight This shows the weight of this queue Buffer This shows the queue management algorithm used by the ZyXEL Device Management Rate Limit This shows the maximum transmission rate allowed for traffic on this kbps queue Modify Click the Edit icon to go to t
181. ber in the External Port End field External Port End Enter the last port of the original destination port range To forward only one port enter the port number in the External Port Start field above and then enter it again in this field To forward a series of ports enter the last port number in a series that begins with the port number in the External Port Start field above Internal Port Start This shows the port number to which you want the ZyXEL Device to translate the incoming port Internal Port End This shows the last port of the translated port range Protocol Select the protocol supported by this virtual server Choices are TCP UDP or TCP UDP Add Click this button to add a rule to the table below The table below shows a summary of the values entered in the previous fields This is the rule index number read only Active This field indicates whether the rule is active or not Clear the check box to disable the rule Select the check box to enable it Service Name This is the service s name This shows User Defined if you manually added a service You can change this by clicking the edit icon WAN Interface This shows the WAN interface through which the service is forwarded External Start Port This is the first external port number that identifies a service External End Port This is the last external port number that identifies a service
182. bnet Enter the destination subnet mask Mask TCP UDP Port If you select TCP or UDP in the IP Protocol field select the check Range box and enter the port number s of the source Exclude Select this option to exclude the packets that match the specified criteria from this classifier Others P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide E Chapter 17 Quality of Service QoS Table 65 Advanced gt QoS gt Class Setup Add Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION 802 1P This field is available only when you select 802 1Q in the Ether Type field Select this option and select a priority level between 0 and 7 from the drop down list box 0 is the lowest priority level and 7 is the highest VLAN ID This field is available only when you select 802 1Q in the Ether Type field Select this option and specify a VLAN ID number between 1 and 4095 IP Protocol This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field Select this option and select the protocol service type from TCP or UDP If you select User defined enter the protocol service type number IP Packet Length This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field Select this option and enter the minimum and maximum packet length from 46 to 1504 in the fields provided DSCP This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field Select this option and specify a DSCP DiffServ Code Point
183. bottom of your ZyXEL Device 22 1 1 What You Can Do in this Chapter e Use the Firmware screen Section 22 2 on page 255 to upload firmware to your device e Use the Configuration screen Section 22 3 on page 256 to backup and restore device configurations You can also reset your device settings back to the factory default e Use the Restart screen Section 22 4 on page 259 to restart your ZyXEL device 22 1 2 What You Need To Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read this chapter Filename Conventions The configuration file often called the romfile or rom 0 contains the factory default settings in the menus such as password DHCP Setup and TCP IP Setup It arrives from ZyXEL with a rom filename extension Once you have customized P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide 253 Chapter 22 Tools the ZyXEL Device s settings they can be saved back to your computer under a filename of your choosing ftp gt put firmware bin ras This is a Sample FTP session showing the transfer of the computer file firmware bin to the ZyXEL Device If your T FTP client does not allow you to have a destination filename different than the source you will need to rename them as the ZyXEL Device only recognizes rom 0 and ras Be sure you keep unaltered copies of both files for later use The following table is a summary Please note that the internal filename refers to the filename on the ZyXEL Device and
184. c IP Precedence Similar to IEEE 802 1p prioritization at layer 2 you can use IP precedence to prioritize packets in a layer 3 network IP precedence uses three bits of the eight bit ToS Type of Service field in the IP header There are eight classes of services ranging from zero to seven in IP precedence Zero is the lowest priority level and seven is the highest DiffServ QoS is used to prioritize source to destination traffic flows All packets in the flow are given the same priority You can use CoS class of service to give different priorities to different packet types P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 17 Quality of Service QoS DiffServ Differentiated Services is a class of service CoS model that marks packets so that they receive specific per hop treatment at DiffServ compliant network devices along the route based on the application types and traffic flow Packets are marked with DiffServ Code Points DSCPs indicating the level of service desired This allows the intermediary DiffServ compliant network devices to handle the packets differently depending on the code points without the need to negotiate paths or remember state information for every flow In addition applications do not have to request a particular service or give advanced notice of where the traffic is going DSCP and Per Hop Behavior DiffServ defines a new DS Differentiated Services field to replace the Type of Service TOS fie
185. ce LABEL DESCRIPTION Interface Select an interface for which you want to configure here ATM The ZyXEL Device uses the ADSL technology for data transmission over the DSL port Ethernet The ZyXEL Device transmits data over the Ethernet WAN port Select this if you have a DSL router or modem in your network already Interface This is the name of the interface Name VPI This is the Virtual Path Identifier VPI VCI This is the Virtual Channel Identifier VCI Category This is the ATM traffic class Link Type This is the DSL link type of the ATM layer 2 interface Connection Mode This displays the connection mode of the layer 2 interface Remove Check this and click the Remove button to delete this interface from the ZyXEL Device A window displays asking you to confirm that you want to delete the interface Note You cannot remove the layer 2 interface when a WAN service is associated with it P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup Table 10 Network gt WAN gt Layer 2 Interface LABEL DESCRIPTION Add Click this button to create a new layer 2 interface Remove Check Remove and click this to delete this interface from the ZyXEL Device A window displays asking you to confirm that you want to delete the interface 5 2 1 Layer 2 Interface Configuration Use this screen to create a new layer 2 interface At the time of writing you can confi
186. ce is equipped with an attached antenna to provide a clear radio signal between the wireless stations and the access points Multiple SSID Multiple SSID allows the ZyXEL Device to operate up to 4 different wireless networks simultaneously each with independently configurable wireless and security settings WDS WDS Wireless Distribution System lets the ZyXEL Device act as a bridge with other ZyXEL access points Wireless LAN MAC Address Your device can check the MAC addresses of wireless stations Filtering against a list of allowed or denied MAC addresses WEP Encryption WEP Wired Equivalent Privacy encrypts data frames before transmitting over the wireless network to help keep network communications private Wi Fi Protected Access Wi Fi Protected Access WPA is a subset of the IEEE 802 11i security standard Key differences between WPA and WEP are user authentication and improved data encryption WPA2 WPA 2 is a wireless security standard that defines stronger encryption authentication and key management than WPA P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 26 Product Specifications Table 88 Wireless Features WPS Wi Fi Protected Setup Other Wireless Features IEEE 802 11g Compliance Frequency Range 2 4 GHz ISM Band Advanced Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing OFDM Data Rates 54Mbps 11Mbps 5 5Mbps 2Mbps and 1 Mbps Auto Fallback Turn on off WLAN by WLAN
187. ce or binary form with the major components compiler kernel and so on of the operating system on which the executable runs unless that component itself accompanies the executable If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place counts as distribution of the source code even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code 4 You may not copy modify sublicense or distribute the Program except as expressly provided under this License Any attempt otherwise to copy modify sublicense or distribute the Program is void and will automatically terminate your rights under this License However parties who have received copies or rights from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance 5 You are not required to accept this License since you have not signed it However nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Program or its derivative works These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License Therefore by modifying or distributing the Program or any work based on the Program you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so and P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Appendix F Open Software Announcements all its terms and conditions for copying distributing o
188. chnical information on WAN e See Chapter 3 on page 33 for WAN tutorials 5 1 3 Before You Begin You need to know your Internet access settings such as encapsulation and WAN IP address Get this information from your ISP 5 2 The Layer 2 Interface Screen The ZyXEL Device must have a layer 2 interface to allow users to use the Ethernet WAN port or DSL port to access the Internet The screen varies depending on the interface type you select Note The ATM and Ethernet layer 2 interfaces cannot work at the same time P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup Click Network gt WAN gt Layer 2 Interface The following screen opens Figure 14 Network gt WAN gt Layer 2 Interface Ethernet Layer 2 Interface Interface Ethernet ETHER WAN Interface Configuration Choose Add or Remove to Configure Ethernet interfaces Interface Name Connection Mode eth0 14 Default Mode O Add Remove Figure 15 Network gt WAN gt Layer 2 Interface ADSL ATM Layer 2 Interface nasi 8 34 Interface ADSL ATM DSL ATM Interface Configuration Choose Add or Remove to Configure DSL ATM interfaces Interface PI CI Category Link Type Connection Mode Remove UBR EoA Default Mode O Add Remove The following table describes the fields in this screen Some of the fields are not available for the Ethernet interface Table 10 Network gt WAN gt Layer 2 Interfa
189. code for the Library including whatever changes were used in the work which must be distributed under Sections 1 and 2 above and if the work is an executable linked with the Library with the complete machine readable work that uses the Library as object code and or source code so that the user can modify the Library and then relink to produce a modified executable containing the modified Library It is understood that the user who changes the contents of definitions files in the Library will not necessarily be able to recompile the application to use the modified definitions b Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with the Library A suitable mechanism is one that 1 uses at run time a copy of the library already present on the user s computer system rather than copying library functions into the executable and 2 will operate properly with a modified version of the library if the user installs one as long as the modified version is interface compatible with the version that the work was made with c Accompany the work with a written offer valid for at least three years to give the same user P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Appendix F Open Software Announcements the materials specified in Subsection 6a above for a charge no more than the cost of performing this distribution d If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy from a designated place offer equivalent access to copy the above specif
190. contact your vendor You may also refer to the warranty policy for the region in which you bought the device at http www zyxel com web support_warranty_ info php Registration Register your product online to receive e mail notices of firmware upgrades and information at www zyxel com P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Index A AAL5 282 access point See AP 129 ACK message 177 activation media server 194 wireless LAN scheduling 146 adding a printer example 63 ADSL2 282 Advanced Encryption Standard see AES AES 355 ALG 285 alternative subnet mask notation 296 antenna 279 directional 360 gain 359 omni directional 360 anti probing 204 AP Access Point 129 347 Application Layer Gateway 285 applications Internet access 22 media server 193 activation 194 iTunes server 193 VolP 23 Asynchronous Transfer Mode 266 ATM Adaptation Layer 5 AAL5 114 ATM Adaptation Layer 5 see AAL5 audience 3 authentication server 142 auto dial 283 automatic logout 28 auto negotiating rate adaptation 282 Index backup 257 bandwidth management 223 Basic Service Set see BSS blinking LEDs 24 broadcast 118 BSS 345 BYE request 177 C CA 209 353 call forwarding 284 call hold 181 call park and pickup 283 call return 283 call service mode 180 call transfer 181 call waiting 181 284 caller ID 284 Canonical Format Indicator See CFI CBR Constant Bit Rate 102 certificate factory default 213 Certificate A
191. ct Generic oo Printer List IP Printing x3 Printer s Address 192 168 1 1 Internet address or DNS name Complete and valid address _ Use default queue on server Queue Name LP1 Printer Model Generic 9 Cancel add screen Sk Printer List IP Printing E Printer s Address 192 168 1 1 Internet address or DNS name Complete and valid address Fl Use default queue on server Queue Name LPI Printer Model ESP i EPSON 24 Pin Series CUPS v1 1 EPSON New Stylus Color Series CUPS v1 1 EPSON New Stylus Photo Series CUPS v1 1 EPSON Stylus Color Series CUPS v1 1 printer Name displays in bold type 608 Printer List Ss SO Make Default Add Delete Name Status LP1 on 192 168 1 1 Stylus C43 Stopped 11 Select your Printer Model from the drop down list box If the printer s model is 12 Click Add to select a printer model save and close the Printer List configuration 13 The Name LP1 on 192 168 1 1 displays in the Printer List field The default Your Macintosh print server driver setup is complete You can now use the ZyXEL Device s print server to print from a Macintosh computer P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorial 3 9 Configuring the MAC Address Filter Thomas noticed that his daughter J osephine spends too much time surfing the web and downloading media files He decided to prevent J osephine from acc
192. d Generate Click this button to have the ZyXEL Device create a new PIN WPS Status This displays Configured when the ZyXEL Device has connected to a wireless network using WPS or Enable WPS is selected and wireless or wireless security settings have been changed The current wireless and wireless security settings also appear in the screen This displays Unconfigured if WPS is disabled and there is no wireless or wireless security changes on the ZyXEL Device or you click Release_ Configuration to remove the configured wireless and wireless security settings Release Configuration This button is available when the WPS status is Configured Click this button to remove all configured wireless and wireless security settings for WPS connections on the ZyXEL Device P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Table 30 Network gt Wireless LAN gt WPS LABEL DESCRIPTION WPS Add Station by Use this section to set up a WPS wireless network using either Push Button Configuration PBC or PIN Configuration Push Button Click this button to add another WPS enabled wireless device within wireless range of the ZyXEL Device to your wireless network This button may either be a physical button on the outside of device or a menu button similar to the Push Button on this screen Note You must press the other wireless device s WPS button within two minutes of pressing this bu
193. d sys stdio 0 to disable the management idle timeout so the TFTP transfer will not be interrupted Enter command sys stdio 5 to restore the five minute management idle timeout default when the file transfer is complete Launch the TFTP client on your computer and connect to the device Set the transfer mode to binary before starting data transfer Use the TFTP client see the example below to transfer files between the device and the computer The file name for the firmware is ras P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 22 Note that the telnet connection must be active and the device in Cl mode before and during the TFTP transfer For details on TFTP commands see following example please consult the documentation of your TFTP client program For UNIX use get to transfer from the device to the computer put the other way around and binary to set binary transfer mode TFTP Upload Command Example The following is an example TFTP command tftp i host put firmware bin ras Where i specifies binary image transfer mode use this mode when transferring binary files host is the device s IP address put transfers the file source on the computer firmware bin name of the firmware on the computer to the file destination on the remote host ras name of the firmware on the device Commands that you may see in GUI based TFTP clients are listed earlier in this chapter
194. d RTP protocols to communicate with other servers A SIP user agent has to register with the SIP registrar and must provide information about the users it represents as well as its current IP address for the routing of incoming SIP requests After successful registration the SIP server knows that the users identified by their dedicated SIP URIs are represented by the UA and knows the IP address to which the SIP requests and responses should be sent Registration is initiated by the User Agent Client UAC running in the VoIP gateway the ZyXEL Device The gateway must be configured with information letting it know where to send the REGISTER message as well as the relevant user and authorization data A SIP registration has a limited lifespan The User Agent Client must renew its registration within this lifespan If it does not do so the registration data will be deleted from the SIP registrar s database and the connection broken The ZyXEL Device attempts to register all enabled subscriber ports when it is switched on When you enable a subscriber port that was previously disabled the ZyXEL Device attempts to register the port immediately Authorization Requirements SIP registrations and subsequent SIP requests require a username and password for authorization These credentials are validated via a challenge response system using the HTTP digest mechanism as detailed in RFC3261 SIP Session Initiation Protocol P 26
195. d then 2 European Call Transfer Do the following to transfer an incoming call that you have answered to another phone 1 Press the flash key to put the caller on hold 2 When you hear the dial tone dial 98 followed by the number to which you want to transfer the call to operate the Intercom 3 After you hear the ring signal or the second party answers it hang up the phone European Three Way Conference Use the following steps to make three way conference calls P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 9 Voice When you are on the phone talking to someone press the flash key to put the caller on hold and get a dial tone Dial a phone number directly to make another call When the second call is answered press the flash key and press 3 to create a three way conversation Hang up the phone to drop the connection If you want to separate the activated three way conference into two individual connections one is on line the other is on hold press the flash key and press up P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide File Sharing 10 1 Overview 10 1 1 Share files on a USB memory stick or hard drive connected to your ZyXEL Device with users on your network The following figure is an overview of the ZyXEL Device s file server feature Computers A and B can access files on a USB device C which is connected to the ZyXEL Device Figure 57 File Sharing Overview e See Section 10 1 2 o
196. date user credentials This encryption standard is slightly older than WPA2 and therefore is more compatible with older devices P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Click Network gt Wireless LAN gt Security and select WPA or WPA2 from the Security Mode list Figure 39 Network gt Wireless LAN gt Security WPA WPA2 fo Ee Security Setup SSID SID1 SSID1_Test v Security Mode WPA2 v WPA Compatible Group Key Update 0 Timer Seconds Packets 0 disable ReKey Method TIME v Encryption Type TKIP v Q Note Please select AES as Encryption Mode if you want to access N mode WLAN Select TKIP as Encryption Mode might cause you access b g mode WLAN Radius Server IP Address Server Port 1812 Share Secret q Note ReKey Method means encryption keys are automatically changed after specified by 1 TIME period of time 1 seconds 2 PKT number of packets has been transmitted 1000 packets The following table describes the wireless LAN security labels in this screen Table 28 Network gt Wireless LAN gt Security WPA WPA2 LABEL DESCRIPTION SSID Select the SSID security profile you want to configure Security Mode Choose WPA or WPA2 from the drop down list box WPA Compatible This field is only available for WPA2 Select this if you want the ZyXEL Device to support WPA and WPA2 simultaneously Group Key The Group Key Update Timer is the r
197. ddress 192 168 1 1 Port Name jira 92 168 1 1 5 Cancel 8 Select Custom under Device Type and click Settings Add Standard TCP IP Printer Port Wizard 3 xj Additional Port Information Required RS The device could not be identified S Y The device is not found on the network Be sure that 1 The device is tumed on 2 The network is connected 3 The device is properly configured 4 The address on the previous page is correct If you think the address is not correct click Back to return to the previous page Then correct the address and perfom another search on the network If you are sure the address is correct select the device type below Device Type C Standard Generic lt Back Cancel 9 Confirm the IP address of the ZyXEL Device in the IP Address field 10 Select LPR under Protocol 11 Type the LPR queue name of your printer model in the Queue Name field and click OK Refer to your printer documentation for the LPR queue name Some P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide EE Chapter 3 Tutorial printer models accept any name you want to use in this case you can enter a short descriptive name for the Queue Name Configure Standard TCP IP Port Monitor Port Settings Port Name fiP_192 168 1 1 192 168 1 1 LPR Printer Name or IP Address m Protocol C Raw r Raw Settings Port Number i oo LPR Settings I LPR Byte Counting
198. ddress which can be of any hexadecimal character s For example if you set the MAC address to 00 13 49 00 00 00 and the mask to ff ff ff 00 00 00 a packet with a MAC address of 00 13 49 12 34 56 matches this criteria IP Address Select the check box and enter the source IP address in dotted decimal notation A blank source IP address means any source IP address IP Subnet Enter the source subnet mask Mask TCP UDP Port If you select TCP or UDP in the IP Protocol field select the check Range box and enter the port number s of the source Exclude Select this option to exclude the packets that match the specified criteria from this classifier Destination MAC Address Select the check box and enter the destination MAC address of the packet MAC Mask Type the mask for the specified MAC address to determine which bits a packet s MAC address should match Enter f for each bit of the specified source MAC address that the traffic s MAC address should match Enter O for the bit s of the matched traffic s MAC address which can be of any hexadecimal character s For example if you set the MAC address to 00 13 49 00 00 00 and the mask to ff ff ff 00 00 00 a packet with a MAC address of 00 13 49 12 34 56 matches this criteria IP Address Select the check box and enter the destination IP address in dotted decimal notation A blank source IP address means any source IP address IP Su
199. ddress of a host when the packet is in the local network while the global address refers to the IP address of the host when the same packet is traveling in the WAN side NAT In the simplest form NAT changes the source IP address in a packet received from a subscriber the inside local address to another the inside global address before forwarding the packet to the WAN side When the response comes back P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 8 Network Address Translation NAT NAT translates the destination address the inside global address back to the inside local address before forwarding it to the original inside host Port Forwarding A port forwarding set is a list of inside behind NAT on the LAN servers for example web or FTP that you can make visible to the outside world even though NAT makes your whole inside network appear as a single computer to the outside world Finding Out More See Section 8 3 on page 154 for advanced technical information on NAT 8 2 Port Forwarding Use the Port Forwarding screen to forward incoming service requests to the server s on your local network You may enter a single port number or a range of port numbers to be forwarded and the local IP address of the desired server The port number identifies a service for example web service is on port 80 and FTP on port 21 In some cases such as for unknown services or where one server can support more than one service for example
200. de or routing mode When the ZyXEL Device is in routing mode it supports the following methods IP over Ethernet IP over Ethernet IPoE is an alternative to PPPoE IP packets are being delivered across an Ethernet network without using PPP encapsulation They are routed P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide ms Chapter 5 WAN Setup between the Ethernet interface and the WAN interface and then formatted so that they can be understood in a bridged environment For instance it encapsulates routed Ethernet frames into bridged Ethernet cells PPP over Ethernet Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet PPPoE provides access control and billing functionality in a manner similar to dial up services using PPP PPPoE is an IETF standard RFC 2516 specifying how a personal computer PC interacts with a broadband modem DSL cable wireless etc connection For the service provider PPPoE offers an access and authentication method that works with existing access control systems for example RADIUS One of the benefits of PPPoE is the ability to let you access one of multiple network services a function known as dynamic service selection This enables the service provider to easily create and offer new IP services for individuals Operationally PPPoE saves significant effort for both you and the ISP or carrier as it requires no specific configuration of the broadband modem at the customer site By implementing PPPoE directly on the ZyXE
201. diate rate steps between the maximum and minimum data rates The IEEE 802 11g data rate and modulation are as follows Table 101 IEEE 802 119 MBPS MODULATION 1 DBPSK Differential Binary Phase Shift Keyed 2 DQPSK Differential Quadrature Phase Shift Keying 5 5 11 CCK Complementary Code Keying 6 9 12 18 24 36 OFDM Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing 48 54 Wireless Security Overview Wireless security is vital to your network to protect wireless communication between wireless clients access points and the wired network Wireless security methods available on the ZyXEL Device are data encryption wireless client authentication restricting access by device MAC address and hiding the ZyXEL Device identity The following figure shows the relative effectiveness of these wireless security methods available on your ZyXEL Device Table 102 Wireless Security Levels SECURITY LEVEL SECURITY TYPE Least Unique SSID Default Secure Unique SSID with Hide SSID Enabled MAC Address Filtering WEP Encryption EEE802 1x EAP with RADIUS Server Authentication Wi Fi Protected Access WPA WPA2 Most Secure Note You must enable the same wireless security settings on the ZyXEL Device and on all wireless clients that you want to associate with it P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs IEEE 802 1x In June 2001 the IEEE 802 1x standard
202. dit LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Clear the check box to disable the rule Select the check box to enable it Service Name Enter a name to identify this rule using keyboard characters A Z a z 1 2 and so on WAN Interface Select the WAN interface through which the service is forwarded You must have already configured a WAN connection with NAT enabled Server IP Enter the inside IP address of the virtual server here Address External Start Enter the original destination port for the packets Port To forward only one port enter the port number again in the External End Port field To forward a series of ports enter the start port number here and the end port number in the External End Port field P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide 153 Chapter 8 Network Address Translation NAT Table 35 Port Forwarding Edit continued LABEL DESCRIPTION External End Enter the last port of the original destination port range Port To forward only one port enter the port number in the External Start Port field above and then enter it again in this field To forward a series of ports enter the last port number in a series that begins with the port number in the External Start Port field above Internal Start This shows the port number to which you want the ZyXEL Device to Port translate the incoming port For a range of ports enter the first number of the range to which you want the incoming
203. dware hy a a Q gt E m 9 Bluetooth CDs amp DVDs Displays Energy Keyboard amp Print amp Fax Sound Saver Mouse Q a Internet amp Ne Mac QuickTime Sharing System D F5 u Accounts Date amp Time Software Speech Startup Disk Universal Update Access 3 When the Network preferences pane opens select Built in Ethernet from the network connection type list and then click Configure Figure 140 Mac OS X 10 4 Network Preferences 0900 Network 4 Showall Q Location Automatic iz Show Network Status iz Built in Ethernet is currently active and has the IP address Built in Ethernet 10 0 1 2 You are connected to the Internet via Built in Ethernet Internet Sharing is on and is using AirPort to share the connection AirPort Configure Q sconnect n Click the lock to prevent further changes Assist me Apply Now 318 P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 4 For dynamically assigned settings select Using DHCP from the Configure I Pv4 list in the TCP IP tab Figure 141 Mac OS X 10 4 Network Preferences gt TCP IP Tab ean Network a Showall Q Location Automatic Show Built in Ethernet H PPPoE AppleTalk Proxies Ethernet IP Address 0 0 0 0 Renew DHCP Lease Subnet Mask DHCP Client ID If required Router DNS Servers Search Domains
204. e DSL Line Start to reset ADSL Loading ADSL modem F W ATM Status ATM Loopback Test DSL Line Status Reset ADSL Line E P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 23 Diagnostic The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 83 Maintenance gt Diagnostic gt General ITEM DESCRIPTION ATM Status Click this button to view your DSL connection s Asynchronous Transfer Mode ATM statistics ATM is a networking technology that provides high speed data transfer ATM uses fixed size packets of information called cells With ATM a high QoS Quality of Service can be guaranteed The Segmentation and Reassembly SAR driver translates packets into ATM cells It also receives ATM cells and reassembles them into packets These counters are set back to zero whenever the device starts up inPkts is the number of good ATM cells that have been received inDiscards is the number of received ATM cells that were rejected outPkts is the number of ATM cells that have been sent outDiscards is the number of ATM cells sent that were rejected inF4Pkts is the number of ATM Operations Administration and Management OAM F4 cells that have been received See ITU recommendation 1 610 for more on OAM for ATM outF4Pkts is the number of ATM OAM F4 cells that have been sent inF5Pkts is the number of ATM OAM F5 cells that have been received outF5Pkts is the number of ATM OAM F5 cells that have been
205. e s PIN if you are using the ZyXEL Device see Section 7 5 on page 143 Enter the PIN from the enrollee device Activate WPS on both devices within two minutes Note Use the configuration utility to activate WPS not the push button on the device itself On a computer connected to the wireless client try to connect to the Internet If you can connect WPS was successful If you cannot connect check the list of associated wireless clients in the AP s configuration utility If you see the wireless client in the list WPS was successful P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs The following figure shows a WPS enabled wireless client installed in a notebook computer connecting to the WPS enabled AP via the PIN method Figure 180 Example WPS Process PIN Method ENROLLEE REGISTRAR WITHIN 2 MINUTES SECURE EAP TUNNEL S 4 D SSID WPA 2 PSK COMMUNICATION How WPS Works When two WPS enabled devices connect each device must assume a Specific role One device acts as the registrar the device that supplies network and security settings and the other device acts as the enrollee the device that receives network and security settings The registrar creates a secure EAP Extensible Authentication Protocol tunnel and sends the network name SSID and the WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK pre shared key to the enrollee Whether WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK is used depends on the standards support
206. e click Continue whenever Windows displays a screen saying that it needs your permission to continue P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 6 Select Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP I Pv4 and then select Properties Networking Figure 129 Windows Vista Local Area Connection Properties Connect using oy Intel R PRO 1000 MT Desktop Connection This connection uses the following items M o Client for Microsoft Networks M E Network Monitor3 Driver MI 5 File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks eme g wee nternet Protocol ersion 4 TCF IF v4 Re Mapper 1 0 Driver Link Layer Topology Discovery Responder Description Uninstall Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol The default wide area network protocol that provides communication across diverse interconnected networks a Properties 2 OK Cancel P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 7 The Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP 1Pv4 Properties window opens Figure 130 Windows Vista Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP IPv4 Properties Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP IPv4 Properties 8 E General Alternate Configuration You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Otherwise you need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP
207. e PMK to dynamically generate unique data encryption keys The keys are used to encrypt every data packet that is wirelessly communicated between the AP and the wireless clients Figure 178 WPA 2 with RADIUS Application Example L fs AN 3 N es Internet a E A l 5 _ S ot fo Li l WPA 2 PSK Application Example A WPA 2 PSK application looks as follows 1 First enter identical passwords into the AP and all wireless clients The Pre Shared Key PSK must consist of between 8 and 63 ASCII characters or 64 hexadecimal characters including spaces and symbols 2 The AP checks each wireless client s password and allows it to join the network only if the password matches 3 The AP and wireless clients generate a common PMK Pairwise Master Key The key itself is not sent over the network but is derived from the PSK and the SSID P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide 357 Appendix D Wireless LANs 4 The AP and wireless clients use the TKIP or AES encryption process the PMK and information exchanged in a handshake to create temporal encryption keys They use these keys to encrypt data exchanged between them Figure 179 WPA 2 PSK Authentication e Ss a an SS i N vr 2 wo Nete Security Parameters Summary Refer to this table to see what other security parameters you should configure for each authentication method or key management protocol type MAC address filters are not dependent o
208. e ZyXEL Device Using DDNS If you connect your ZyXEL Device to the Internet and it uses a dynamic WAN IP address it is inconvenient for you to manage the device from the Internet The ZyXEL Device s WAN IP address changes dynamically Dynamic DNS DDNS allows you to access the ZyXEL Device using a domain name http zyxelrouter dyndns org a b c d To use this feature you have to apply for DDNS service at www dyndns org P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorial 3 12 1 3 12 2 This tutorial shows you how to e Registering a DDNS Account on www dyndns org Configuring DDNS on Your ZyXEL Device e Testing the DDNS Setting Note If you have a private WAN IP address then you cannot use DDNS Registering a DDNS Account on www dyndns org Open a browser and type http www dyndns org Apply for a user account This tutorial uses UserNamel1 and 12345 as the username and password Log into www dyndns org using your account Add a new DDNS host name This tutorial uses the following settings as an example e Hostname zyxelrouter dyndns org e Service Type Host with IP address e IP Address Enter the WAN IP address that your ZyXEL Device is currently using You can find the IP address on the ZyXEL Device s Web Configurator Status page Then you will need to configure the same account and host name on the ZyXEL Device later Configuring DDNS on Your ZyXEL Device Configure the f
209. e entry Services This is the service you may use to access the ZyXEL Device LAN WLAN Select the Enable check box for the corresponding services that you want to allow access to the ZyXEL Device from the LAN and WLAN WAN Select the Enable check box for the corresponding services that you want to allow access to the ZyXEL Device from the WAN Port You may change the server port number for a service if needed however you must use the same port number in order to use that service for remote management Apply Click this button to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide PART III Troubleshooting and Specifications System 243 Logs 247 Tools 253 Diagnostic 265 Account 269 Troubleshooting 271 Product Specifications 279 20 1 20 1 1 20 1 2 System Overview This chapter shows you how to configure system related settings such as system time password name the domain name and the inactivity timeout interval What You Can Do in this Chapter e Use the General screen Section 20 2 on page 244 to configure system settings Use the Time Setting screen Section 20 3 on page 245 to set the system time What You Need to Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read this chapter Domain Name This is a network address that identifies the owner of a network connection For example in the net
210. e fields in this screen Table 11 Network gt WAN gt Layer 2 Interface Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION ATM PVC Configuration VPI Virtual Path Identifier and VCI Virtual Channel Identifier define a virtual circuit This section is available only when you configure a DSL ATM layer 2 interface VPI The valid range for the VPI is 0 to 255 Enter the VPI assigned to you VCI The valid range for the VCI is 32 to 65535 0 to 31 is reserved for local management of ATM traffic Enter the VCI assigned to you Select DSL Link Type Select EoA Ethernet over ATM to have an Ethernet header in the packet so that you can have multiple services connections over one PVC You can set each connection to have its own MAC address or all connections share one MAC address but use different VLAN IDs for different services EoA supports IPoE PPPoE and RFC1483 2684 bridging encapsulation methods Select PPPoA PPP over ATM to allow just one PPPoA connection over a PVC Select I POA IP over ATM to allow just one RFC 1483 2684 routing connection over a PVC Encapsulation Mode Select the method of multiplexing used by your ISP from the drop down list Choices are e VC MUX In VC multiplexing each protocol is carried on a single ATM virtual circuit VC To transport multiple protocols the ZyXEL Device needs separate VCs There is a binding between a VC and the type of the network protocol carried on the
211. e for incoming calls you cannot receive any calls on this phone port SIP Number Click this to go to a screen where you can configure the SIP number for the SIP account Apply Click this to save your changes and to apply them to the ZyXEL Device Cancel Click this to set every field in this screen to its last saved value P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 9 Voice 9 5 The Phone Region Screen Use this screen to maintain settings that depend on which region of the world the ZyXEL Device is in To access this screen click VoIP gt Phone gt Region Figure 51 VolP gt Phone gt Region Region Settings Region Settings Caution When Region Settings is changed you will need to reboot the device first for the new settings to take effect Norway Apply Cancel Each field is described in the following table Table 40 VoIP gt Phone gt Region LABEL DESCRIPTION Region Settings Select the place in which the ZyXEL Device is located Apply Click this to save your changes and to apply them to the ZyXEL Device Cancel Click this to set every field in this screen to its last saved value 9 6 The Speed Dial Screen Use this screen to add edit or remove speed dial numbers for outgoing calls Speed dial provides shortcuts for dialing frequently used VolP phone numbers You also have to create speed dial entries if you want to call SIP numbers that
212. e is an error condition on the system Warning There is a warning condition on the system Notice There is a normal but significant condition on the system Informational The syslog contains an informational message N ODO Om AJ WW N ej oO Debug The message is intended for debug level purposes 21 2 The View Log Screen Click Maintenance gt Logs to open the View Log screen Use the View Log screen to see the logs for the categories that you selected in the Log Settings screen see Section 21 3 on page 249 Log entries in red indicate alerts The log wraps around and deletes the old entries after it fills Click a column heading to sort the entries A triangle indicates ascending or descending sort order Figure 90 Maintenance gt Logs gt View Log View Logs Display all Logs Level All gt Clear Logs Log List Time Facility Level Message Pagel of 1 D no record P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 21 Logs The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 73 Maintenance gt Logs gt View Log LABEL DESCRIPTION Display The categories that you select in the Log Settings screen display in the drop down list box Select a category of logs to view select All Logs to view logs from all of the log categories that you selected in the Log Settings page Level Select the lowest severity level tha
213. e of the signal for better communications For an indoor site each 1 dB increase in antenna gain results in a range increase of approximately 2 5 For an unobstructed outdoor site each 1dB increase in gain results in a range increase of approximately 5 Actual results may vary depending on the network environment Antenna gain is sometimes specified in dBi which is how much the antenna increases the signal power compared to using an isotropic antenna An isotropic antenna is a theoretical perfect antenna that sends out radio signals equally well in all directions dBi represents the true gain that the antenna provides Types of Antennas for WLAN There are two types of antennas used for wireless LAN applications P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs e Omni directional antennas send the RF signal out in all directions on a horizontal plane The coverage area is torus shaped like a donut which makes these antennas ideal for a room environment With a wide coverage area it is possible to make circular overlapping coverage areas with multiple access points Directional antennas concentrate the RF signal in a beam like a flashlight does with the light from its bulb The angle of the beam determines the width of the coverage pattern Angles typically range from 20 degrees very directional to 120 degrees less directional Directional antennas are ideal for hallways and outdoor point to point applications
214. e phone is ringing for an incoming VoIP call Process There is a VoIP call in progress DISC The callee s line is busy the callee hung up or your phone was left off the hook Codec This field displays what voice codec is being used for a current VoIP call through a phone port Peer Number This field displays the SIP number of the party that is currently engaged in a VoIP call through a phone port Phone Status Phone This field displays each phone port in the ZyXEL Device P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 4 Status Screens Table 8 VolP Statistics LABEL DESCRIPTION Outgoing This is the SIP number this phone port uses for making outgoing calls Number Incoming This port will receive incoming calls for this SIP number Number Poll Interval s Enter how often you want the ZyXEL Device to update this screen and click Set Interval Set Interval Click this to make the ZyXEL Device update the screen based on the amount of time you specified in Poll Interval Stop Click this to make the ZyXEL Device stop updating the screen P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 4 Status Screens P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide WAN Setup 5 1 Overview This chapter discusses the ZyXEL Device s WAN screens Use these screens to configure your ZyXEL Device for Internet access A WAN Wide Area Network connection is an outside connection to another network
215. e the network 192 168 1 0 into two separate sub networks The subnet mask is now 25 bits 255 255 255 128 or 25 The borrowed host ID bit can have a value of either 0 or 1 allowing two subnets 192 168 1 0 25 and 192 168 1 128 25 P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide 297 Appendix A IP Addresses and Subnetting The following figure shows the company network after subnetting There are now two sub networks A and B Figure 115 Subnetting Example After Subnetting 17 B if ry be a D 3 i 2 i ana 1 192 168 1 0 25 4 192 168 1 128 255 eee eee eee DP Qum saa ss Dp In a 25 bit subnet the host ID has 7 bits so each sub network has a maximum of 2 2 or 126 possible hosts a host ID of all zeroes is the subnet s address itself all ones is the subnet s broadcast address 192 168 1 0 with mask 255 255 255 128 is subnet A itself and 192 168 1 127 with mask 255 255 255 128 is its broadcast address Therefore the lowest IP address that can be assigned to an actual host for subnet A is 192 168 1 1 and the highest is 192 168 1 126 Similarly the host ID range for subnet B is 192 168 1 129 to 192 168 1 254 Example Four Subnets The previous example illustrated using a 25 bit subnet mask to divide a 24 bit address into two subnets Similarly to divide a 24 bit address into four subnets you need to borrow two host ID bits to give four possible combinations 00 01 10 and 11 The
216. e to all other stations within its range to notify them to defer their transmission It also reserves and confirms with the requesting station the time frame for the requested transmission Stations can send frames smaller than the specified RTS CTS directly to the AP without the RTS Request To Send CTS Clear to Send handshake You should only configure RTS CTS if the possibility of hidden nodes exists on your network and the cost of resending large frames is more than the extra network overhead involved in the RTS Request To Send CTS Clear to Send handshake If the RTS CTS value is greater than the Fragmentation Threshold value see next then the RTS Request To Send CTS Clear to Send handshake will never occur as data frames will be fragmented before they reach RTS CTS size Note Enabling the RTS Threshold causes redundant network overhead that could negatively affect the throughput performance instead of providing a remedy P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs Fragmentation Threshold A Fragmentation Threshold is the maximum data fragment size between 256 and 2432 bytes that can be sent in the wireless network before the AP will fragment the packet into smaller data frames A large Fragmentation Threshold is recommended for networks not prone to interference while you should set a smaller threshold for busy networks or networks that are prone to interference If the Fragmentation Thresh
217. e year Genre Actors Rating Size E Library Playlists a s 4 JJ Music a a O Artis o i a i P Artist ZyXEL Celebration ZyXEL Connecting the Album bel Video bel Future 2 a minutes 3 minutes Genre a cakes ME Unknown E Videos Play all s Ea a E K a bel Recorded TV Sna 7 Add to f Other Libraries a P P2612HNU F Edit JI Music Rate E Videos A P rties Pictures PRS Recorded TV 3 7 3 Using a Digital Media Adapter This section shows you how you can use the ZyXEL Device with a ZyXEL DMA 2500 to play media files stored in the USB storage device in your TV screen Note For this tutorial your DMA 2500 should already be set up with the TV according to the instructions in the DMA 2500 Quick Start Guide 56 P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorial 1 Connect the DMA 2500 to an available LAN port in your ZyXEL Device is USB Storage Device aee DMA 2500 ZyXEL Device 2 Turn on the TV and wait for the DMA 2500 Home screen to appear Using the remote control go to MyMedia to open the following screen Select the ZyXEL Device as your media server oxi E 01 P2612HNU F 02 TWPC13262 01 P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorial 3 The screen shows you the list of available media files in the USB storage device Select the file you want to open and push the Play button in the remote control amp oxi IE 1 Videos gt
218. easily be mistaken for a lost connection Echo Cancellation You device supports G 168 an ITU T standard for eliminating the echo caused by the sound of your voice reverberating in the telephone receiver while you talk QoS Quality of Service Quality of Service QoS mechanisms help to provide better service on a per flow basis Your device supports Type of Service ToS tagging and Differentiated Services DiffServ tagging This allows the device to tag voice frames so they can be prioritized over the network P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 26 Product Specifications Table 87 Voice Features SIP ALG Your device is a SIP Application Layer Gateway ALG It allows VolP calls to pass through NAT for devices behind it such as a SI P based VoIP software application on a computer Other Voice SIP version 2 Session Initiation Protocol RFC 3261 Features SDP Session Description Protocol RFC 2327 RTP RFC 1889 RTCP RFC 1890 Voice codecs coder decoders G 711 G 729 Fax and data modem discrimination DTMF Detection and Generation DTMF In band and Out band traffic RFC 2833 PCM SIP INFO Point to point call establishment between two ADs Quick dialing through predefined phone book which maps the phone dialing number and destination URL Flexible Dial Plan RFC3525 section 7 1 14 Wireless Features Table 88 Wireless Features External Antenna The ZyXEL Devi
219. ecifies the IP network subnet mask of the final destination Gateway This is the IP address of the gateway The gateway is a router or switch on the same network segment as the device s LAN or WAN port The gateway helps forward packets to their destinations Modify Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can set up a Static route on the ZyXEL Device Click the Remove icon to remove a static route from the ZyXEL Device A window displays asking you to confirm that you want to delete the route P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 16 Static Route 16 2 1 Static Route Add Edit Select a static route index number and click Add or Edit The screen shown next appears Use this screen to configure the required information for a static route Figure 79 Advanced gt Static Route gt Add Edit IP Static Route Setup I Active Route Name Example1 Destination IP Address j92 168 1 77 IP Subnet Mask 255 255 2550 Gateway IP Address h92168 11 L Note The IP address and subnet mask fields must be matched e g host 255 255 255 255 or subnet 255 255 255 0 Back Apply Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 60 Advanced gt Static Route gt Add Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION Active This field allows you to activate deactivate this static route Route Name Enter the name of the IP static route Leave this field blank to delete this static route Destin
220. ed by the devices If the registrar is P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs already part of a network it sends the existing information If not it generates the SSID and WPA 2 PSK randomly The following figure shows a WPS enabled client installed in a notebook computer connecting to a WPS enabled access point Figure 181 How WPS works ACTIVATE ACTIVATE WPS WPS WITHIN 2 MINUTES D Tf WPS HANDSHAKE ENROLLEE REGISTRAR SECURE TUNNEL SECURITY INFO COMMUNICATION i The roles of registrar and enrollee last only as long as the WPS setup process is active two minutes The next time you use WPS a different device can be the registrar if necessary The WPS connection process is like a handshake only two devices participate in each WPS transaction If you want to add more devices you should repeat the process with one of the existing networked devices and the new device Note that the access point AP is not always the registrar and the wireless client is not always the enrollee All WPS certified APs can be a registrar and so can some WPS enabled wireless clients By default a WPS devices is unconfigured This means that it is not part of an existing network and can act as either enrollee or registrar if it supports both functions If the registrar is unconfigured the security settings it transmits to the enrollee are randomly generated Once a WPS
221. ed electrical ps and electronic products should not be mixed with general waste Used electrical and electronic equipment should be treated separately P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Safety Warnings P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Contents Overview Contents Overview es ee 19 INTGUE I The 27 EL DOVCO serna 21 Mtroducing ihe Web CNHI assiriana naisien aA NRE ANN bA 27 Teeni E e E E E E E E A E aaa E E TE duces 33 PIVONIGOG sssisisciecsensasiniesdsiiaiadiaian sareniasissinsasiasdesanseniatexsaaiahiaisaiaiaaseerandadissaaianiniecceveniainasiaanmasasi 83 oa ONEENS aa E sivas iecaciasdebeereaas 85 ES EE a cits rh ii E E A as NE OEE EES dione seanducieaannd 97 EAN SEND cnie E 121 malene EAN anaien aa A EASRA 129 Network Address Translation NAT ussissersuusisunuienurrineurnuuiineennussi nunueni sinnani i eenaa 149 ario te E EEE A E I A AE E E E E EE A EE EE 157 FIS TS ANE raa N E A 183 Neda SONET sonini 193 Pa ON a rent pect ees rite bere tree errr biter rer rite rere Pre rrr ce Gre ret te crear rir eres renee rr rere ree 195 POI F IMMER cy insted fu tere oynstsbtuacys Ubivkn da msiuuiial ava nsw sabslunutvanesUiadd ddan ryhANeaeiuNiNtvASIUEIdsinsnwnietaventiteiuss 201 PAPC Wall susuganan a T 203 OOS aas 209 Se A IL A EE AE N AE E A O N E AE E SA A EE T 219 Gua or STAN A DEG aaia Eaa eA bhart neenierdanenatpenes 223 Dwane BN o SSUP enn E EA AEN 237 SEE CITI rra O 239 Maintenance Troubleshooting and Specifications s
222. ed to configure the Enter Service Description field in this screen as follows Figure 21 Network gt WAN gt Internet Connection Service Type PPPoA or IPoA WAN Service Configuration Enter Service Description pppoa_2_2_1 Back Next P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 14 Network gt WAN gt Internet Connection Service Type LABEL DESCRIPTION Select WAN service type Select the method of encapsulation used by your ISP Choices are PPP over Ethernet PPPoE IP over Ethernet and Bridging PPP over Ethernet PPPoE PPPoE Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet provides access control and billing functionality in a manner similar to dial up services using PPP Select this if you have a username and password for Internet access e IP over Ethernet In this type of Internet connection IP packets are routed between the Ethernet interface and the WAN interface and then formatted so that they can be understood in a bridged environment e Bridging With bridging the ZyXEL Device has a static P address for the connection The ZyXEL Device passes traffic through to another device a computer or router for example that handles authenticating with the ISP Note This field does not show for a PPPoA or IPoA service type Enter Service Specify a name for this connection or use the automatically generated
223. een Click the details icon to open the Trusted CA Details screen Figure 76 Security gt Certificates gt Trusted CA gt Details _iycermicoles Sa Certificates Trusted CAs Edit Certificate Name cacert pem Certificate in PEM Base 64 Encoded Format MIIDkzCCAnugAwIBAglJ AlvpKOxbVmZoMAOGCSqGS Ib3 DOEBBQUANGKxEj AQBGNV BANUCV lvaXJ TKFNRTETMBEGA1 UECBOKUW9 1 LOTVEF URTELNAKGA1UEBhNCQO8x GTAXBgkqhkiG9wOBCQEWC 1 1PVVJ RULBSUwxF j AUBGNVBAOUDV LPVVJ T1JHX05B TUUwHhcNMDkwND ASMDM1MzAxWhcNMTAWNDASMDM1MzAxWjBpMRIWEAYDVQQDFA1Z n3 VyXOSBTUUXEZARBGNVBAgUC 1 lvaXJ U1RBVEUXC 2A BQNVBAYTAKNPMRKwF w d KoZhvcNAQKBF gp 2T1VSXOVNOU1NMRY uF AYDVQOKF Al ZT1VSX09SR190QU1FMIIB IJ ANBgkqhkiG9wOBAQEF AAOCAQSAMIIBCgKCAQEAte2 AstqS2 16zPKGrXR93D3H ruQlt52 pzE 12ZTD2zFnfpKbave i ikEQzDHoxMX PbvkgOubO3 90cC AOuRghuPDke qQ6Yqces7v44CalbO 77pOMnD m8TBuq1UDN7OOIF IbFVUyO ADk22xCTkzRO pkk xl Back Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 58 Security gt Certificates gt Trusted CA gt Details LABEL DESCRIPTION Certificate Name This field displays the identifying name of this certificate If you want to change the name type up to 31 characters to identify this key certificate You may use any character not including spaces Certificate in PEM This read only text box displays the certificate or certification request Base 64 in Privacy Enhanced Mail PEM format PEM uses 64 A
224. egion in which you bought the device See http www zyxel com web contact_us php for contact information Please have the following information ready when you contact an office Product model and serial number Warranty Information Date that you received your device Brief description of the problem and the steps you took to solve it P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Document Conventions Document Conventions Warnings and Notes These are how warnings and notes are shown in this User s Guide Warnings tell you about things that could harm you or your device Note Notes tell you other important information for example other things you may need to configure or helpful tips or recommendations Syntax Conventions e The P 2612HNU Fx may be referred to as the ZyXEL Device the device the system or the product in this User s Guide Product labels screen names field labels and field choices are all in bold font e A key stroke is denoted by square brackets and uppercase text for example ENTER means the enter or return key on your keyboard e Enter means for you to type one or more characters and then press the ENTER key Select or choose means for you to use one of the predefined choices e A right angle bracket gt within a screen name denotes a mouse click For example Maintenance gt Log gt Log Setting means you first click Maintenance in the
225. ell rates fall below SCR until cell rate averages to the SCR again At this time more cells up to the MBS can be sent at the PCR again If the PCR SCR or MBS is set to the default of 0 the system will assign a maximum value that correlates to your upstream line rate P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide 115 Chapter 5 WAN Setup The following figure illustrates the relationship between PCR SCR and MBS Figure 28 Example of Traffic Shaping Cell Rate PC ys SCR lt gt lt gt Time ATM Traffic Classes These are the basic ATM traffic classes defined by the ATM Forum Traffic Management 4 0 Specification Constant Bit Rate CBR Constant Bit Rate CBR provides fixed bandwidth that is always available even if no data is being sent CBR traffic is generally time sensitive doesn t tolerate delay CBR is used for connections that continuously require a specific amount of bandwidth A PCR is specified and if traffic exceeds this rate cells may be dropped Examples of connections that need CBR would be high resolution video and voice Variable Bit Rate VBR The Variable Bit Rate VBR ATM traffic class is used with bursty connections Connections that use the Variable Bit Rate VBR traffic class can be grouped into real time VBR RT or non real time VBR nRT connections The VBR RT real time Variable Bit Rate type is used with bursty connections that require closely controlled delay and delay variation I
226. enabled device has connected to another device using WPS it becomes configured A configured wireless client can still act as enrollee or registrar in subsequent WPS connections but a configured access point can no longer act as enrollee It will be the registrar in all P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs subsequent WPS connections in which it is involved If you want a configured AP to act as an enrollee you must reset it to its factory defaults Example WPS Network Setup This section shows how security settings are distributed in an example WPS setup The following figure shows an example network In step 1 both AP1 and Client 1 are unconfigured When WPS is activated on both they perform the handshake In this example AP1 is the registrar and Client 1 is the enrollee The registrar randomly generates the security information to set up the network since it is unconfigured and has no existing information Figure 182 WPS Example Network Step 1 ENROLLEE REGISTRAR lt iD SECURITY INFO CLIENT 1 AP1 In step 2 you add another wireless client to the network You know that Client 1 supports registrar mode but it is better to use AP1 for the WPS handshake with the new client since you must connect to the access point anyway in order to use the network In this case AP1 must be the registrar since it is configured it already has security information for the network AP1 supplies the exis
227. er an access point helps a wireless station and a RADIUS server perform authentication The type of authentication you use depends on the RADIUS server and an intermediary AP s that supports IEEE 802 1x For EAP TLS authentication type you must first have a wired connection to the network and obtain the certificate s from a certificate authority CA A certificate also called digital IDs can be used to authenticate users and a CA issues certificates and guarantees the identity of each certificate owner EAP MD5 Message Digest Algorithm 5 MD5 authentication is the simplest one way authentication method The authentication server sends a challenge to the wireless client The wireless client proves that it knows the password by encrypting the password with the challenge and sends back the information Password is not sent in plain text 352 P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs However MD5 authentication has some weaknesses Since the authentication server needs to get the plaintext passwords the passwords must be stored Thus someone other than the authentication server may access the password file In addition it is possible to impersonate an authentication server as MD5 authentication method does not perform mutual authentication Finally MD5 authentication method does not support data encryption with dynamic session key You must configure WEP encryption keys for data encryption EAP TLS Tra
228. er the correct number you cannot pickup the call This means that only someone who knows the number you have chosen can pick up the call You can have more than one call on hold at the same time but you must give each call a different number Call Return With call return you can place a call to the last number that called you either answered or missed The last incoming call can be through either SIP or PSTN Country Code Phone standards and settings differ from one country to another so the settings on your ZyXEL Device must be configured to match those of the country you are in The country code feature allows you to do this by selecting the country from a list rather than changing each setting manually Configure the country code feature when you move the ZyXEL Device from one country to another Do not Disturb This feature allows you to set your phone not to ring when someone DnD calls you You can set each phone independently using its keypad or configure global settings for all phones using the command line interpreter Auto Dial You can set the ZyXEL Device to automatically dial a specified number immediately whenever you lift a phone off the hook Use the Web Configurator to set the specified number Use the command line interpreter to have the ZyXEL Device wait a specified length of time before dialing the number Phone config The phone config table allows you to customize the phone keypad combinations you
229. erchange If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place satisfies the requirement to distribute the source code even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code 5 A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the Library but is designed to work with the Library by being compiled or linked with it is called a P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Appendix F Open Software Announcements work that uses the Library Such a work in isolation is not a derivative work of the Library and therefore falls outside the scope of this License However linking a work that uses the Library with the Library creates an executable that is a derivative of the Library because it contains portions of the Library rather than a work that uses the library The executable is therefore covered by this License Section 6 states terms for distribution of such executables When a work that uses the Library uses material from a header file that is part of the Library the object code for the work may be a derivative work of the Library even though the source code is not Whether this is true is especially significant if the work can be linked without the Library or if the work is itself a library The threshold for this to be true is not precisely defined by law If such an object file uses
230. erface ZyXEL_RT3062_AP1 SRC MAC AA BB AA1 1 22 11 DEST MAC AABBIAA 1 22 22 Apply Forward ToDSCP Mark 802 1P UnChange UnChange UnChange UnChange Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 64 Advanced gt QoS gt Class Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Add Click this button to create a new classifier Order This field displays the order number of the classifier Active Select the check box to enable the classifier Class Name This is the name of the classifier Classification This shows criteria specified in this classifier for example the interface Criteria from which traffic of this class should come and the source MAC address of traffic that matches this classifier Forward To This is the interface through which traffic that matches this classifier is forwarded out DSCP Mark This is the DSCP number added to traffic of this classifier 802 1P Mark This is the IEEE 802 1p priority level assigned to traffic of this classifier VLAN ID Tag This is the VLAN ID number assigned to traffic of this classifier To Queue This is the name of the queue in which traffic of this classifier is put Modify Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the classifier Click the Remove icon to delete an existing classifier Note that subsequent rules move up by one when you take this action Apply Click this to save your changes back to the Zy
231. ermination This License Agreement is effective until it is terminated You may terminate this License Agreement at any time by destroying or returning to ZyXEL all copies of the Software and Documentation in your possession or under your control ZyXEL may terminate this License Agreement for any reason including but not limited to if ZyXEL finds that you have violated any of the terms of this License Agreement Upon notification of termination you agree to destroy or return to ZyXEL all copies of the Software and Documentation and to certify in writing that all known copies including backup copies have been destroyed All provisions relating to confidentiality proprietary rights and non disclosure shall survive the termination of this Software License Agreement 11 General This License Agreement shall be construed interpreted and governed by the laws of Republic of China without regard to conflicts of laws provisions thereof The exclusive forum for any disputes arising out of or relating to this License Agreement shall be an appropriate court or Commercial Arbitration Association sitting in ROC Taiwan This License Agreement shall constitute the entire Agreement between the parties hereto This License Agreement the rights granted hereunder the Software and Documentation shall not be assigned by you without the prior written consent of ZyXEL Any waiver or modification of this License Agreement shall only be effective if it is in writin
232. erring configuration files using FTP TFTP commands 256 P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 22 Tools Click Maintenance gt Tools gt Configuration Information related to factory defaults backup configuration and restoring configuration appears in this screen as shown next Figure 96 Maintenance gt Tools gt Configuration Configuration Backup Configuration Click Backup to save the current configuration of your system to your computer Backup Restore Configuration To restore a previously saved configuration file to your system browse to the location ofthe configuration file and click Upload File Path Browse Upload Back to Factory Defaults Click Reset to clear all user entered configuration information and return to factory defaults After resetting the LAN IP address will be 192 168 1 1 DHCP will be reset to server Reset Backup Configuration Backup Configuration allows you to back up save the ZyXEL Device s current configuration to a file on your computer Once your ZyXEL Device is configured and functioning properly it is highly recommended that you back up your configuration file before making configuration changes The backup configuration file will be useful in case you need to return to your previous settings Click Backup to save the ZyXEL Device s current configuration to your computer Restore Configuration Restore Configuration allows you to uplo
233. es to your ZyXEL Device e Web Server This certificate secures HTTP connections e SIP TLS This certificate secures VolP connections e SSH SCP SFTP This certificate secures remote connections 212 P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 15 Certificates Click Security gt Certificates gt My Certificates to open the My Certificates screen Figure 73 Security gt Certificates gt My Certificates My Certificates Certificates My Certificates Replace PrivateKey Certificate file in PEM format Web Server Browse C IN ST Karnataka C IN ST Karnataka b L Bangalore O Multitech L Bangalore O Multitech 2006 04 24 2007 04 24 3 bl ea OU ODC OU 0DC 14 38 39 GMT 14 38 39 GMT CN localhost localdomain CN localhost localdomain SIP TLS Browse E I sip pem OU MSGSW1 CN 10 10 100 25 C CO emailAddress YOUR_EMAIL emailAddress P2612 zyxel com tw O YOUR_ORG_NAME C TW ST Hsinchu O ZyXEL CN Your_N4ME ST Your_STATE 2009 04 17 2010 04 17 08 55 24 GMT 08 55 24 GMT 2 SSH SCP SFTP Browse Key Type ssh rsa q Note RSA SSH SCP SFTP Maximum key length supported is up to 4096 bits default is 2048 bits and the initialization time is proportional to key length You need to adjust your application timeout settings to adapt this variation Replace Cancel The following table describes the labels in th
234. essing the Internet so that she can concentrate on preparing for her final exams Josephine s computer connects wirelessly to the Internet through the ZyXEL Device Thomas decides to use the Security gt MAC Filter screen to grant wireless network access to his computer but not to J osephine s computer Thomas G yx 1 Click Network gt LAN gt Client List to open the following screen Look for the MAC address of Thomas computer Client List Josephine DHCP Client Table z Address mac Address Add a E TWPC13262 01 192 168 1 33 Josephine PC 192 168 1 34 Apply Reset Refresh MAC Address 00 1c 04 84 e0 4b 00 19 cb 41 78 10 m P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorial 2 Click Security gt MAC Filter to open the MAC Filter screen Select Active Enter the MAC address you found in the Client List screen Click Apply MAC Filter MAC Address Filter M active Note Only devices listed here are granted access to the network MAC Address 00 1 c 4 84 e0 4b i 32 O Apply Reset Thomas can also grant access to the computers of other members of his family and friends However Josephine and others not listed in this screen will no longer be able to access the Internet through the ZyXEL Device 3 10 Configuring Static Route for Routing to Another Network In order to extend your
235. et access is through an ISP the ISP can provide you with the Internet addresses for your local networks On the other hand if you are part of a much larger organization you should consult your network administrator for the appropriate IP addresses Regardless of your particular situation do not create an arbitrary IP address always follow the guidelines above For more information on address assignment please refer to RFC 1597 Address Allocation for Private Internets and RFC 1466 Guidelines for Management of IP Address Space IP Address Conflicts Each device on a network must have a unique IP address Devices with duplicate IP addresses on the same network will not be able to access the Internet or other resources The devices may also be unreachable through the network Conflicting Computer IP Addresses Example More than one device can not use the same IP address In the following example computer A has a static or fixed IP address that is the same as the IP address that a DHCP server assigns to computer B which is a DHCP client Neither can access the Internet This problem can be solved by assigning a different static IP P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Appendix A IP Addresses and Subnetting address to computer A or setting computer A to obtain an IP address automatically Figure 116 Conflicting Computer IP Addresses Example i a a A Z i ENS i I a I 192 168 1 33 D e Internet I Pa i
236. ettings Use the following Static IP address Network Address Translation I Enable IGMP Multicast Proxy 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Back Next P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 17 Network gt WAN gt Internet Connection IPoA DSL WAN Interface LABEL DESCRIPTION WAN IP Address Enter the static IP address provided by your ISP WAN Subnet Enter the subnet mask provided by your ISP Mask Enable NAT Select this option to enable NAT on the ZyXEL Device Enable IGMP Select this check box to have the ZyXEL Device act as an IGMP proxy Multicast Proxy on this connection This allows the ZyXEL Device to get subscribing information and maintain a joined member list for each multicast group It can reduce multicast traffic significantly Back Click this button to return to the previous screen Next Click this button to continue Bridging This screen displays when you select Bridging in the previous section for an Ethernet WAN interface For the DSL WAN interface this shows if you set the DSL Link Type field in the Network gt WAN gt Layer 2 I nterface screen to EoA and select Bridging in the previous section Figure 25 Network gt WAN gt Internet Connection Bridging WAN Setup Summary Make sure that the settings below match the settings provided by your ISP Prat eae bridge Service Name
237. even WPA2 PSK The WPA2 PSK security mode is a newer more robust version of the WPA encryption standard It offers slightly better security although the use of PSK makes it less robust than it could be Use these options if you do not have RADIUS server on your network to verify user credentials Click Network gt Wireless LAN gt Security and select WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK from the Security Mode list Figure 38 Network gt Wireless LAN gt Security WPA PSK WPA2 PSK Security Setup SSID SSID1 SSID_Example3 v Security Mode WPA2 PSK v WPA Compatible Pre Shared Key ThisismyWPA PSKpre sharedkey Encryption Type TKIP v q Note Please select AES as Encryption Mode if you want to access N mode WLAN Select TKIP as Encryption Mode might cause you access b g mode WLAN Reset The following table describes the wireless LAN security labels in this screen Table 27 Network gt Wireless LAN gt Security WPA PSK WPA2 PSK LABEL DESCRIPTION SSID Select the SSID security profile you want to configure Security Mode Choose WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK from the drop down list box WPA Compatible This field is only available for WPA2 PSK Select this if you want the ZyXEL Device to support WPA PSK and WPA2 PSK simultaneously Pre Shared Key The encryption mechanisms used for WPA WPA2 and WPA PSK WPA2 PSK are the same The only difference between the two is that WPA PSK WPA2 PSK uses a simple common password in
238. f you distribute copies of the library or if you modify it For example if you distribute copies of the library whether gratis or for a fee you must give the recipients all the rights that we gave you You must make sure that they too receive or can get the source code If you link other code with the library you must provide complete object files to the recipients so that they can relink them with the library after making changes to the library and recompiling it And you must show them these terms so they know their rights We protect your rights with a two step method 1 we copyright the library and 2 we offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy distribute and or modify the library To protect each distributor we want to make it very clear that there is no warranty for the free library Also if the library is modified by someone else and passed on the recipients should know that what they have is not the original version so that the original author s reputation will not be affected by problems that might be introduced by others Finally software patents pose a constant threat to the existence of any free program We wish to make sure that a company cannot effectively restrict the P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide 387 Appendix F Open Software Announcements 388 users of a free program by obtaining a restrictive license from a patent holder Therefore we insist that any patent license obtained
239. field DTMF Mode Control how the ZyXEL Device handles the tones that your telephone makes when you push its buttons You should use the same mode your VolP service provider uses RFC2833 send the DTMF tones in RTP packets PCM send the DTMF tones in the voice data stream This method works best when you are using a codec that does not use compression like G 711 Codecs that use compression like G 729 and G 726 can distort the tones SI PI nfo send the DTMF tones in SIP messages Transport Type Transport Type Select the transport layer protocol TCP UDP or TLS used for SIP FAX Option This field controls how the ZyXEL Device handles fax messages G 711 Fax Select this if the ZyXEL Device should use G 711 to send fax messages Passthrough The peer devices must also use G 711 T 38 Fax Relay Select this if the ZyXEL Device should send fax messages as UDP or TCP IP packets through IP networks This provides better quality but it may have inter operability problems The peer devices must also use T 38 Outbound Proxy Enable Select this if your VoIP service provider has a SIP outbound server to handle voice calls This allows the ZyXEL Device to work with any type of NAT router and eliminates the need for STUN or a SIP ALG Turn off any SIP ALG on a NAT router in front of the ZyXEL Device to keep it from re translating the IP address since this is already handled by the outbound proxy ser
240. figure LAN TCP IP settings DHCP Server Use this screen to configure the DNS server information that the ZyXEL Device sends to the DHCP client devices on the LAN Client List Use this screen to view current DHCP client information and to always assign specific IP addresses to individual MAC addresses and host names P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator Table 2 Navigation Panel Summary LINK TAB FUNCTION Wireless LAN General Use this screen to turn the wireless connection on or off specify the SSID s and make other configuration changes Security Use this screen to configure the wireless LAN settings and WLAN authentication security settings Qos Use this screen to enable or disable wireless quality of service WPS Use this screen to use WPS Wi Fi Protected Setup to establish a wireless connection WPS Station Use this screen to enable or disable WPS generate a security PIN Personal Identification Number and see information about the ZyXEL Device s WPS status Scheduling Use this screen to configure when the ZyXEL Device enables or disables the wireless LAN Association Use this screen to view wireless stations that are List currently associated with the ZyXEL Device NAT Port Use this screen to make your local servers visible to Forwarding the outside world Vol P SIP SIP Service Use this screen to co
241. for a version of the library must be consistent with the full freedom of use specified in this license Most GNU software including some libraries is covered by the ordinary GNU General Public License This license the GNU Lesser General Public License applies to certain designated libraries and is quite different from the ordinary General Public License We use this license for certain libraries in order to permit linking those libraries into non free programs When a program is linked with a library whether statically or using a shared library the combination of the two is legally speaking a combined work a derivative of the original library The ordinary General Public License therefore permits such linking only if the entire combination fits its criteria of freedom The Lesser General Public License permits more lax criteria for linking other code with the library We call this license the Lesser General Public License because it does Less to protect the user s freedom than the ordinary General Public License It also provides other free software developers Less of an advantage over competing non free programs These disadvantages are the reason we use the ordinary General Public License for many libraries However the Lesser license provides advantages in certain special circumstances For example on rare occasions there may be a special need to encourage the widest possible use of a certain library so that it becomes a de facto
242. ftware Announcements You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients exercise of the rights granted herein You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License 11 If as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason not limited to patent issues conditions are imposed on you whether by court order agreement or otherwise that contradict the conditions of this License they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations then as a consequence you may not distribute the Library at all For example if a patent license would not permit royalty free redistribution of the Library by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Library If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance the balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribu
243. g About GNOME 6 About Ubuntu Quit pa Language Support EJ Login Window 3 Network Tools 2 When the Network Settings window opens click Unlock to open the Authenticate window By default the Unlock button is greyed out until clicked You cannot make changes to your configuration unless you first enter your admin password Figure 150 Ubuntu 8 Network Settings gt Connections Fal NeIWOrk Setnngs x ael Location lt Connections General DNS Hosts yProperties Point to point connec This network interface is not c P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide 325 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 3 Inthe Authenticate window enter your admin account name and password then click the Authenticate button Figure 151 Ubuntu 8 Administrator Account Authentication Q Authenticate x System policy prevents mi modifying the configuration An application is attempting to perform an action that requires privileges Authentication as one of the users below is required to perform this action Q CJ chris x gt Details 4 Inthe Network Settings window select the connection that you want to configure then click Properties Figure 152 Ubuntu 8 Network Settings gt Connections Ta Network Settings E Point to point connec This network interface is not c P
244. g A telephone connected to the phone port has its receiver off of the hook or there is an incoming call Orange On A SIP account is registered for the phone port and there is a voice message in the corresponding SIP account Blinking A telephone connected to the phone port has its receiver off of the hook and there is a voice message in the corresponding SIP account Off The phone port does not have a SIP account registered P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide 25 Chapter 1 Introducing the ZyXEL Device Table 1 LED Descriptions LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION USB Green On The ZyXEL Device recognizes a USB connection but there Orange is no traffic Blinking The ZyXEL Device is sending receiving data to from the USB device connected to it Off The ZyXEL Device does not detect a USB connection Refer to the Quick Start Guide for information on hardware connections 1 6 The RESET Button If you forget your password or cannot access the web configurator you will need to use the RESET button at the back of the device to reload the factory default configuration file This means that you will lose all configurations that you had previously and the passwords will be reset to the defaults 1 Make sure the POWER LED is on not blinking 2 To set the device back to the factory default settings press the RESET button for ten seconds or until the POWER LED begins to
245. g and signed by both parties hereto If any part of this License Agreement is found invalid or unenforceable by a court of competent jurisdiction the remainder of this License Agreement shall be interpreted so as to reasonably effect the intention of the parties NOTE Some components of this product incorporate source code covered under the open source code licenses To obtain the source code covered under those Licenses please check ZyXEL Technical Support support zyxel com tw to get it P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Appendix F Open Software Announcements Open Sourced Components 3RD PARTY VERSION WEB ADDRESS OF THE SOFTWARE LICENSE SOFTWARE TERM MIPS Linux Kernel 2 6 20 http www linux mips org bridge utils 1 4 http bridge sourceforge net busybox 1 10 4 http www busybox net db 4 2 52 http www spikesource com stacklicense sleepycat dnsmasq 2 49 http www thekelleys org uk dnsmasq dropbear 0 52 http matt ucc asn au dropbear dropbear html ebtables 2 0 8 1 http ebtables sourceforge net fuse 2 7 4 http fuse sourceforge net igmpproxy 0 1 beta2 http openports se net igmpproxy iproute2 2 6 20 http www linuxgrill com anonymous iproute2 iptables 1 3 8 http www netfilter org libbase64 0 0 1 http www gnu org software gnulib libedit 20080712 http libedit sourceforge net 2 11 libupnp 1 4 2
246. g rom See earlier in this chapter for more information on filename conventions 8 Enter quit to exit the ftp prompt P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 22 Tools FTP Session Example of Firmware File Upload Below is an example of an FTP session Figure 103 FTP Session Example of Firmware File Upload 230 ftp gt 331 Enter PASS command Password Logged in bin 200 ftp gt N ftp Etp gt Type I OK cd fw 250 OK Current directory is fw ftp gt put firmware bin ras 00 Port command okay 150 Opening data connection for STOR ras 226 File received OK 1103936 bytes sent in 1 10Seconds 297 89Kbytes sec quit More commands found in GUI based FTP clients are listed in this chapter Refer to Section 22 1 2 on page 253 to read about configurations that disallow TFTP and FTP over WAN TFTP File Upload The device also supports the uploading of firmware files using TFTP Trivial File Transfer Protocol over LAN Although TFTP should work over WAN as well it is not recommended To use TFTP your computer must have both telnet and TFTP clients To transfer the firmware and the configuration file follow the procedure shown next Use telnet from your computer to connect to the device and log in Because TFTP does not have any security checks the device records the IP address of the telnet client and accepts TFTP requests only from this address Enter the comman
247. gram which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder or other authorized party saying it may be distributed under the terms of this Lesser General Public License also called this License Each licensee is addressed as you A library means a collection of software functions and or data prepared so as to be conveniently linked with application programs which use some of those functions and data to form executables The Library below refers to any such software library or work which has been distributed under these terms A work based on the Library means either the Library or any derivative work under copyright law that is to say a work containing the Library or a portion of it either verbatim or with modifications and or translated straightforwardly into another language Hereinafter translation is included without limitation in the term modification Source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it For a library complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains plus any associated interface definition files plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the library Activities other than copying distribution and modification are not covered by this License they are outside its scope The act of running a program using the Library is not restricted and output from such a program is covered only if its contents constitute a wor
248. gure only one Ethernet layer 2 interface on the ZyXEL Device However you can create multiple ATM layer 2 interfaces The screen varies depending on the interface type you selected in the previous section Click Add in the Network gt WAN gt Layer 2 Interface screen to open the following Figure 16 Network gt WAN gt Layer 2 Interface Ethernet WAN Interface Configuration ETHER WAN Interface Configuration Select Connection Mode Default Mode Single service over one connection VLAN MUX Mode Multiple Vlan service over one connection Back Apply ATM P C Configuration vPI 0 255 P VCI 32 65535 4 EoA PPPoA IPoa Select Connection Mode This screen allows you to configure an ATM PVC identifier VPI and VCI and select the DSL link type encapsulation mode and service category Otherwise select a Connection Mode to enable it Select DSL Link Type Eo is for PPPoE IPoE and Bridge Encapsulation Mode LLC SNAP BRIDGING v Service Category UBR Without PCR C Default Mode Single service over one connection VLAN MUX Mode Multiple Vlan service over one connection Back Apply Save Note VLAN MUX Mode is not supported by the ZyXEL Device as of writing P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Figure 17 Network gt WAN gt Layer 2 Interface DSL ATM Interface Configuration DSL ATM Interface Configuration Chapter 5 WAN Setup The following table describes th
249. h followed by the IP address of the ZyXEL Device the default IP address of the ZyXEL Device is 192 168 1 1 and press ENTER A screen asking for password authentication appears Type the user name and password and click OK t NQ CIFS Server 192 168 1 1 File Edit View Favorites Tools Help D Search E Folders Ez Name i New My Documents Bob s share Adobe Connect to 192 168 1 1 O Corel User Files a a O etx O My eBooks A My Music E My Pictures O My Received Files 5 My Videos E Y My Computer My Network Places Entire Network Password eves O Microsoft Terminal Services E O Microsoft Windows Network C Remember my password 5 Workgroup O NQ CIFS Server 192 168 1 1 E O Web Client Network a E firmware fA twnas1 zyxel com tw a O firmware on twnas 1 zyxel com tw H O ftp2 zyxel com tw a O ftp zyxel cn O My Web Sites on MSN g Recycle Bin Connecting to 192 168 1 1 User name test 2 objects Once you login to the file Bob s Share via your ZyXEL Device you do not have to relogin unless you restart your computer 3 7 Using the Media Server Feature Use the media server feature to play files on a computer or on your television using DMA 2500 This section shows you how the media server feature works using the following media clients e Microsoft MS Windows Media Player Media Server works with Windows Vista and Windows 7 Make sure your computer i
250. h field of the Ethernet frame and two bytes of TCI Tag Control Information starts after the source address field of the Ethernet frame The CFI Canonical Format Indicator is a single bit flag always set to zero for Ethernet switches If a frame received at an Ethernet port has a CFI set to 1 then P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide 11 7 Chapter 5 WAN Setup that frame should not be forwarded as it is to an untagged port The remaining twelve bits define the VLAN ID giving a possible maximum number of 4 096 VLANs Note that user priority and VLAN ID are independent of each other A frame with VID VLAN Identifier of null 0 is called a priority frame meaning that only the priority level is significant and the default VID of the ingress port is given as the VID of the frame Of the 4096 possible VIDs a VID of 0 is used to identify priority frames and value 4095 FFF is reserved so the maximum possible VLAN configurations are 4 094 TPID User Priority CFI VLAN ID 2 Bytes 3 Bits 1 Bit 12 Bits Multicast IP packets are transmitted in either one of two ways Unicast 1 sender 1 recipient or Broadcast 1 sender everybody on the network Multicast delivers IP packets to a group of hosts on the network not everybody and not just 1 Internet Group Multicast Protocol IGMP is a network layer protocol used to establish membership in a Multicast group it is not used to carry user data IGMP version 2 RFC
251. hange your ZyXEL Device s media server settings click USB Services gt Media Server The screen appears as shown Figure 65 USB Services gt Media Server Configuration Media Server M Enable M Q Note If your system has no volume control Media Server cannot be enabled when the system starts edia Server Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this menu Table 50 USB Services gt Media Server LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable Media Server Check this to have the ZyXEL Device function as a DLNA compliant media server Turn on the media server to let DLNA compliant media clients on your network play media files located in the shares Otherwise clear this Apply Click this to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device Cancel Click this to reload the previous configuration for this screen P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Print Server 12 1 Overview 12 1 1 12 1 2 This chapter describes how you can share a USB printer via your ZyXEL Device The ZyXEL Device allows you to share a USB printer on your LAN You can do this by connecting a USB printer to one of the USB ports on the ZyXEL Device and then configuring a TCP IP port on the computers connected to your network Figure 66 Sharing a USB Printer What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the Print Server screen Section 12 2 on page 197 to enable or disable sharing of
252. he IPSEC AH Authentication IPSEC_TUNNEL Header tunneling protocol uses this service AI M New I CQ TCP 5190 AOL s Internet Messenger service It is also used as a listening port by ICQ AUTH TCP 113 Authentication protocol used by some servers BGP TCP 179 Border Gateway Protocol BOOTP_CLIENT UDP 68 DHOP Client BOOTP_SERVER UDP 67 DHCP Server CU SEEME TCP 7648 A popular videoconferencing solution from White Pines Software UDP 24032 DNS TCP UDP 53 Domain Name Server a service that matches web names for example www zyxel com to IP numbers P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Appendix E Common Services 370 Table 105 Commonly Used Services continued NAME PROTOCOL PORT S DESCRIPTION ESP User Defined 50 The IPSEC ESP Encapsulation IPSEC_TUNNEL Security Protocol tunneling protocol uses this service FINGER TCP 79 Finger is a UNIX or Internet related command that can be used to find out if a user is logged on FTP TCP 20 File Transfer Program a program to enable fast transfer of files including TCP 21 large files that may not be possible by e mail H 323 TCP 1720 NetMeeting uses this protocol HTTP TCP 80 Hyper Text Transfer Protocol a client server protocol for the world wide web HTTPS TCP 443 HTTPS is a secured http session often used in e commerce ICMP User Defined 1 Internet Control Message Protocol is often used for
253. he Login screen but cannot log in to the ZyXEL Device 1 Make sure you have entered the user name and password correctly The default user name is admin These fields are case sensitive so make sure Caps Lock is not on 2 You cannot log in to the web configurator while someone is using Telnet to access the ZyXEL Device Log out of the ZyXEL Device in the other session or ask the person who is logged in to log out 3 Turn the ZyXEL Device off and on 4 If this does not work you have to reset the device to its factory defaults See Section 25 2 on page 271 cannot Telnet to the ZyXEL Device See the troubleshooting suggestions for cannot see or access the Login screen in the web configurator Ignore the suggestions about your browser P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide 273 Chapter 25 Troubleshooting cannot use FTP to upload download the configuration file cannot use FTP to upload new firmware See the troubleshooting suggestions for cannot see or access the Login screen in the web configurator Ignore the suggestions about your browser 25 4 Internet Access cannot access the Internet Check the hardware connections and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected See the Quick Start Guide and Section 1 5 on page 24 Make sure you entered your ISP account information correctly These fields are case sensitive so make sure Caps Lock is not on If you are trying to access the In
254. he screen where you can edit the queue Click the Remove icon to delete an existing queue Note that subsequent rules move up by one when you take this action Apply Click this to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device Cancel Click this to begin configuring this screen afresh P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 17 Quality of Service QoS 17 3 1 Adding Editing a QoS Queue Use this screen to configure a queue Click the Add button or the edit icon in the Queue Setup screen Figure 82 Advanced gt QoS gt Queue Setup Add Edit I Active Name Priority Weight Rate Limit Queue Configuration Example 4 7 High Ta 10000 kbps Back Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 63 Advanced gt QoS gt Queue Setup Add Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select to enable or disable this queue Name Enter the descriptive name of this queue Priority Select the priority level from 1 to 7 of this queue The smaller the number the higher the priority level Traffic assigned to higher priority queues gets through faster while traffic in lower priority queues is dropped if the network is congested Weight Select the weight from 1 to 15 of this queue If two queues have the same priority level the ZyXEL Device divides the bandwidth across the queues according to their weights Queues with larger weight
255. http dries ulyssis org rpm packages libupnp info html linuxigd 1 http linux igd sourceforge net logrotate 3 7 1 http logrotate darwinports com mini_ httpd http www acme com software mini_httpd mtd utils 1 0 0 http www linux mtd infradead org ncurses 5 7 http www gnu org software ncurses netatalk 2 0 3 http liferea sourceforge net ntfs 3g 2009 4 4 http ntfs 3g org openssh 5 2p1 http www openssh com p910nd 0 93 http p910nd sourceforge net ppp 2 4 4 http samba org ppp index html pure ftpd 1 0 23 http pureftpd org samba 3 0 36 http www samba org syslog ng 2 0 6 http www balabit com network security syslog ng sysstat 8 1 8 http pagesperso orange fr sebastien godard P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide 377 Appendix F Open Software Announcements 378 updatedd 2 6 http www philipp benner de updatedd usbmount 0 0 14 1 http usbmount alioth debian org wireless tools 0 29 http www hpl hp com Notice Information herein is subject to change without notice Companies names and data used in examples herein are fictitious unless otherwise noted No part may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical for any purpose except the express written permission of ZyXEL Communications Corporation This Product includes Bridge utils 1 4 Busybox 1 10 4 Dnsmasq 2 49 Ebtables 2 0 8 1 Fuse 2 7 4
256. ic IP Address I PPPoE Passthrough I Enable NAT IGMP Multicast Network Address Translation I Enable IGMP Multicast Proxy Back Next The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 15 Network gt WAN gt Internet Connection PPPoE or PPPoA LABEL DESCRIPTION PPP User Name Enter the user name exactly as your ISP assigned If assigned a name in the form user domain where domain identifies a service name then enter both components exactly as given PPP Password Enter the password associated with the user name above PPPoE Service Name Type the name of your PPPoE service here This field is not available for a PPPoA connection DSL WAN interface Authentication Method The ZyXEL Device supports PAP Password Authentication Protocol and CHAP Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol CHAP is more secure than PAP however PAP is readily available on more platforms Use the drop down list box to select an authentication protocol for outgoing calls Options are AUTO Your ZyXEL Device accepts either CHAP or PAP when requested by this remote node CHAP Your ZyXEL Device accepts CHAP only PAP Your ZyXEL Device accepts PAP only MSCHAP Your ZyXEL Device accepts MSCHAP only MS CHAP is the Microsoft version of the CHAP Use Static IP Address A static IP address is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you A dynamic IP address is not fixed the
257. icast Proxy Enabled P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorial PPP Username and Password PPP usually requires that you have a user name and password to establish your connection In the boxes below enter the user name and password that your ISP has provided to you PPP Username fi234 DSL Excom PPP Password freee PPPoE Service Name y DSL Authentication Method auto M Use Static IP Address IP Address fis2a 68 1 32 I PPPoE Passthrough Network Address Translation V Enable NAT IGMP Multicast M Enable IGMP Multicast Proxy _Back _Next Click Next 7 In the following screen select pppoe_2_1_1 nas1 as your default Internet connection And enter the DNS server addresses provided to you such as 255 255 255 0 primary 255 255 254 0 secondary Click Next Routing Default Gateway and Default DNS Server Select a preferred WAN interface as the system default gateway and default DNS server Selected WAN Interface pppoe_21 Ahasi z DNS Server Configuration Get DNS server information dynamically OR enter static DNS server IP addresses If only a single PYC with IPoA or static IPoE protocol is configured you must enter static DNS server IP addresses Obtain DNS info dynamically Use the following Static DNS IP address Primary DNS server 255 255 255 255 Secondary DNS server 255 255 255 0 8 You should see a summary of your DSL setup as follows
258. ications The following are dimensions of an M4 tap screw and masonry plug used for wall mounting All measurements are in millimeters mm Figure 112 Masonry Plug and M4 Tap Screw 4 22e 0 1 e 01 2 16 J l 1 l lj I 1 l 20 0 2 0 30 0 2 0 P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 26 Product Specifications P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Index Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 305 IP Addresses and Subnetting 293 Wireless LANs 345 Common Services 369 Legal Information 397 Index 399 IP Addresses and Subnetting This appendix introduces IP addresses and subnet masks IP addresses identify individual devices on a network Every networking device such as computers servers routers and printers needs an IP address to communicate across the network These networking devices are also known as hosts Subnet masks determine the maximum number of possible hosts on a network You can also use subnet masks to divide one network into multiple sub networks Introduction to IP Addresses One part of the IP address is the network number and the other part is the host ID In the same way that houses on a street share a common street name the hosts on a network share a common network number Similarly as each house has its own house number each host on the network has its own unique identifying number the host ID R
259. ice QoS 17 5 The QoS Monitor Screen To view the ZyXEL Device s QoS packet statistics click Advanced gt QoS gt Monitor The screen appears as shown Figure 85 Advanced gt QoS gt Monitor Monitor Refresh Interval No Refresh Interface Monitor No Name Pass Rate bps 1 eth0 14 Queue Monitor NoQueue The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 66 Advanced gt QoS gt Monitor LABEL DESCRIPTION Refresh Interval Enter how often you want the ZyXEL Device to update this screen Select No Refresh to stop refreshing statistics Interface Monitor No This is the index number of the entry Name This shows the name of the WAN interface on the ZyXEL Device Pass Rate bps This shows how many packets forwarded to this interface are transmitted successfully Queue Monitor No This is the index number of the entry Name This shows the name of the queue Pass Rate bps This shows how many packets assigned to this queue are transmitted successfully Drop Rate bps This shows how many packets assigned to this queue are dropped 17 6 QoS Technical Reference This section provides some technical background information about the topics covered in this chapter P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide 233 Chapter 17 Quality of Service QoS 17 6 1 17 6 2 17 6 3 IEEE 802 1Q Tag The IEEE 802 1Q standard defines a
260. ides communication across diverse interconnected networks C Show icon in notification area when connected P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide 307 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 5 The Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties window opens Figure 123 Windows XP Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties General Alternate Configuration You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Otherwise you need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings Obtain an IP address automatically Use the following IP address Obtain DNS server address automatically Use the following DNS server addresses Advanced 6 Select Obtain an I P address automatically if your network administrator or ISP assigns your IP address dynamically Select Use the following I P Address and fill in the IP address Subnet mask and Default gateway fields if you have a static IP address that was assigned to you by your network administrator or ISP You may also have to enter a Preferred DNS server and an Alternate DNS server if that information was provided 7 Click OK to close the Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties window 8 Click OK to close the Local Area Connection Properties window Verifying Settings 1 Click Start gt All Programs gt Accessories gt Command Prompt P 2612HNU Fx User s G
261. ied materials from the same place e Verify that the user has already received a copy of these materials or that you have already sent this user a copy For an executable the required form of the work that uses the Library must include any data and utility programs needed for reproducing the executable from it However as a special exception the materials to be distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed in either source or binary form with the major components compiler kernel and so on of the operating system on which the executable runs unless that component itself accompanies the executable It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license restrictions of other proprietary libraries that do not normally accompany the operating system Such a contradiction means you cannot use both them and the Library together in an executable that you distribute 7 You may place library facilities that are a work based on the Library side by side in a single library together with other library facilities not covered by this License and distribute such a combined library provided that the separate distribution of the work based on the Library and of the other library facilities is otherwise permitted and provided that you do these two things a Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based on the Library uncombined with any other library facilities This must be distributed under the terms of
262. ieiseeaennuicdectis 81 oy bli TeSa te DONS SENG sivas ce ticusaadsansnieh an iiaiai iaoa aN D 82 Part US AVA OU cs sccscsciniiiiinssssociivicassanantcassddensienaabiia ciicadidsscnneiussmnnnnwsisiss 83 Chapter 4 ore ioc 2 a es eS E E ee eee eee ea 85 LN AN NW RN 5 sce bis cnizsew tc aiucenr vader cant peaan uae tamale paisa aut saline acetates 85 A2 DHCP Cene Listeria Stacie Aae EEE EEE 90 a VLAN CIEN MENS sinaia iaaa Eaa EEE Ea EEDEN 91 AA Paora SUS OE an E La ae eee 92 Ao VOP is 1 11 5 eee reen eee ere mere Tree ree errr erat reerree rrr Treetiy crrprnT rer rrer Ty rcrreererere Tr cree 93 Chapter 5 PE oro eee ata cceceg ans tess eee ceeded ies ae ee ee cela lass 97 PREE 1 greene creer eee eerie rr errr reer rece Perr E tra ceret rere Tee rent ferro T 97 Bell What You Can Do in Mis CMa eh cscs sues cccraierwstseiedasntsteat ie eaniaiedeien 97 D2 Wna You Neod TO KION a sata e sanccutenclunalseids subiesscdeabud sondeluad devas bauen 98 ee eed oi S10 YN P Mernnerere entree cre ter er nrentrr re crtcrr rere terrier tec rere ret etter reer ter te 99 Be Ue Layer 2 Inieracs Sere ih pcs2crsscpniadcesqccctess caverns a AAA 99 12 P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Table of Contents 5 27 Layer 2 Inbetiate Goniguratoi sirsiran nania rnar a anaE E 101 5 3 The Intemet Connection Seregi occ coccescnesccssaavovssscensnnusacseadckssacdsannnns deiennersandakuannioadaiun snes 103 53 1 WAN Connection Configuratii ssccisccecescsc sta
263. in this screen Table 56 Security gt Certificates gt Trusted CAs LABEL DESCRIPTION PKI Storage Space in Use This bar displays the percentage of the ZyXEL Device s PKI storage space that is currently in use The bar turns from blue to red when the maximum is being approached When the bar is red you should consider deleting expired or unnecessary certificates before adding more certificates Trusted CA Setting This field displays the certificate index number The certificates are listed in alphabetical order P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 15 Certificates Table 56 Security gt Certificates gt Trusted CAs continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Name This field displays the name used to identify this certificate Subject This field displays identifying information about the certificate s owner such as CN Common Name OU Organizational Unit or department O Organization or company and C Country It is recommended that each certificate have unique subject information Issuer This field displays identifying information about the certificate s issuing certification authority such as a common name organizational unit or department organization or company and country With self signed certificates this is the same information as in the Subject field Valid From This field displays the date that the certificate becomes applicable The text dis
264. ing Connect using This connection uses the following items D Client for Microsoft Networks M E QoS Packet Scheduler M Fie and ae we for emg Networks Link Layer rere Discovery Manpar 1 0 Driver M Link Layer Topology Discovery Responder Uninstall Description Transmission Control Protocol Intemet Protocol The default wide area network protocol that provides communication across diverse interconnected networks P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide 315 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 6 The Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP I Pv4 Properties window opens Figure 136 Windows 7 Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP IPv4 Properties Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP IP v4 Properties 2f Xa General E You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Otherwise you need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings Obtain an IP address automatically Use the following DNS server addresses Preferred DNS server Alternate DNS server F Validate settings upon exit PESE cence 7 Select Obtain an IP address automatically if your network administrator or ISP assigns your IP address dynamically Select Use the following I P Address and fill in the I P address Subnet mask and Default gateway fields if you have a static IP address that was assigned to you by your network administrator or ISP You may al
265. ion Feedback Send your comments questions or suggestions to techwriters zyxel com tw Thank you The Technical Writing Team ZyXEL Communications Corp 6 Innovation Road II Science Based Industrial Park Hsinchu 30099 Taiwan Need More Help More help is available at www zyxel com ET ET Download Library gt Firmware Knowledge Base Software Glossary Driver Support amp Feedback Datasheet Warranty Information Tech Doc Overview ZyXEL Windows Vista Support User s Guide Forum Quick start guide CLI Reference Guide Support note Certification Declaration SNMP MIB File P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide 3 About This User s Guide Download Library Search for the latest product updates and documentation from this link Read the Tech Doc Overview to find out how to efficiently use the User Guide Quick Start Guide and Command Line Interface Reference Guide in order to better understand how to use your product Knowledge Base If you have a specific question about your product the answer may be here This is a collection of answers to previously asked questions about ZyXEL products Forum This contains discussions on ZyXEL products Learn from others who use ZyXEL products and share your experiences as well Customer Support Should problems arise that cannot be solved by the methods listed above you should contact your vendor If you cannot contact your vendor then contact a ZyXEL office for the r
266. ion published by the Free Software Foundation If the Library does not specify a license version number you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation 14 If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free programs whose distribution conditions are incompatible with these write to the author to ask for permission For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Appendix F Open Software Announcements write to the Free Software Foundation we sometimes make exceptions for this Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally NO WARRANTY 15 BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE LIBRARY TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE LIBRARY AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE LIBRARY IS WITH YOU SHOULD THE LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING REPAIR OR CORRECTION 16 IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDE
267. ion server 142 auto scan channel 135 button 26 channel 135 group key update timer 141 hide SSID 134 interference 347 passphrase 138 scheduling 146 security parameters 358 see also wireless WEP 138 WPA 140 WPA PSK 139 workgroup and file sharing 190 WPA 140 285 354 key caching 356 pre authentication 356 user authentication 356 vs WPA PSK 355 wireless client supplicant 356 with RADIUS application example 356 WPA2 354 user authentication 356 vs WPA2 PSK 355 wireless client supplicant 356 with RADIUS application example 356 WPA2 Pre Shared Key see WPA2 PSK WPA2 PSK 354 355 application example 357 WPA PSK 139 355 application example 357 P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Index P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide
268. ionality of the ZyXEL Device in DHCP requests that the ZyXEL Device sends to a DHCP server when getting a WAN IP address Vendor Class Identifier Enter the Vendor Class Identifier Option 60 such as the type of the hardware or firmware Use the following Static IP address Select this if you have a static IP address Multicast Proxy WAN IP Enter the static IP address provided by your ISP Address WAN Subnet Enter the subnet mask provided by your ISP Mask WAN gateway Enter the gateway IP address provided by your ISP IP Address Enable NAT Select this option to enable NAT on the ZyXEL Device Enable IGMP Select this check box to have the ZyXEL Device act as an IGMP proxy on this connection This allows the ZyXEL Device to get subscribing information and maintain a joined member list for each multicast group It can reduce multicast traffic significantly Back Click this button to return to the previous screen Next Click this button to continue IPoA This shows if you set the DSL Link Type field in the Network gt WAN gt Layer 2 I nterface screen to IPoA This screen does not show for the Ethernet WAN interface Figure 24 Network gt WAN gt Internet Connection IPoA DSL WAN Interface WAN IP Settings WAN IP Address WAN Subnet Mask I Enable NAT IGMP Multicast DSL Interface Configuration Enter information provided to you by your ISP to configure the WAN IP s
269. ions e Check the settings for QoS If it is disabled you might consider activating it If it is enabled you might consider raising or lowering the priority for some applications 25 5 Phone Calls and VoIP The telephone port won t work or the telephone lacks a dial tone 1 Check the telephone connections and telephone wire can access the Internet but cannot make VolP calls 1 The PHONE light should come on Make sure that your telephone is connected to the PHONE port 2 You can also check the VoIP status in the Status screen P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide 275 Chapter 25 Troubleshooting 3 If the VoIP settings are correct use speed dial to make peer to peer calls If you can make a call using speed dial there may be something wrong with the SIP server contact your VoIP service provider 25 6 Multiple SIP Accounts 25 6 1 You can set up two SIP accounts on your ZyXEL Device and your ZyXEL Device is equipped with two phone ports By default your ZyXEL Device uses SIP account 1 with both phone ports for outgoing calls and it uses SIP accounts 1 and 2 for incoming calls With this setting you always use SIP account 1 for your outgoing calls and you cannot distinguish which SIP account the calls are coming in through If you want to control the use of different dialing plans for accounting purposes or other reasons you need to configure your phone ports in order to control which SIP account you are usi
270. ircle marks a wireless LAN in the following figure Wireless clients A and B connect to an access point AP to access other devices such as the printer or the Internet Your ZyXEL Device works as an AP when you install a compatible WLAN card Figure 33 Example of a Wireless Network a Ethernet ae i adil S a 7 AP he I l l N S e A pra 7 1 1 What You Can Do in this Chapter e Use the General screen see Section 7 2 on page 133 to turn the wireless connection on or off create multiple SSIDs and make other configuration changes P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN e Use the Security screens see Section 7 3 on page 136 to set up wireless security e Use the QoS screen see Section 7 4 on page 142 to enable or disable wireless quality of service e Use the WPS screen and the WPS Station screen to use WiFi Protected Setup WPS WPS lets you set up a secure network quickly when connecting to other WPS enabled devices Use the WPS screen see Section 7 5 on page 143 to enable or disable WPS generate a security PIN Personal Identification Number and see information about the ZyXEL Device s WPS status You can also set up WPS by pressing a button or using a PIN e Use the Scheduling screen see Section 7 6 on page 145 to schedule a time period for the wireless LAN to operate each day e Use the Association List screen see Section 7 7 on page 147 to view wireles
271. is a proxy redirect or register server SIP Server Port Enter the SIP server s listening port number if your VolP service provider gave you one Otherwise keep the default value P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide 161 Chapter 9 Voice Table 37 VoIP gt SIP gt SIP Service Provider Advanced LABEL DESCRIPTION REGISTER Server Address Enter the IP address or domain name of the SIP register server if your VolP service provider gave you one Otherwise enter the same address you entered in the SIP Server Address field You can use up to 95 printable ASCII characters REGISTER Server Port Enter the SIP register server s listening port number if your VoIP service provider gave you one Otherwise enter the same port number you entered in the SIP Server Port field SIP Service Domain Enter the SIP service domain name In the full SIP URI this is the part after the symbol You can use up to 127 printable ASCII Extended set characters RTP Port Range Start Port End Port Enter the listening port number s for RTP traffic if your VoIP service provider gave you this information Otherwise keep the default values To enter one port number enter the port number in the Start Port and End Port fields To enter a range of ports e enter the port number at the beginning of the range in the Start Port field e enter the port number at the end of the range in the End Port
272. is screen Table 55 Security gt Certificates gt My Certificates LABEL DESCRIPTION Web Server Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click SIP TLS SSH Browse to find it SCP SFTP Browse Click Browse to find the certificate file you want to upload Current File This field displays the name used to identify this certificate It is recommended that you give each certificate a unique name Subject This field displays identifying information about the certificate s owner such as CN Common Name OU Organizational Unit or department O Organization or company and C Country It is recommended that each certificate have unique subject information Issuer This field displays identifying information about the certificate s issuing certification authority such as a common name organizational unit or department organization or company and country Valid From This field displays the date that the certificate becomes applicable The text displays in red and includes a Not Yet Valid message if the certificate has not yet become applicable Valid To This field displays the date that the certificate expires The text displays in red and includes an Expiring or Expired message if the certificate is about to expire or has already expired P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 15 Certificates Table 55 Security gt Certificates gt My Certificates contin
273. is section of the screen Add Click this to set up a new share on the ZyXEL Device See Section 10 2 1 on page 187 Active Check this to make the share available to the network Otherwise clear this Status This shows whether or not the share is available for sharing Share Name This field displays the share name on the ZyXEL Device Share Path This field displays the path for the share directories folders on the ZyXEL Device These are the directories folders on your USB storage device Share This field displays information about the share You can add share Description descriptions to shares in the Share Configuration Add Edit screen see Section 10 2 1 on page 187 and Section 10 2 2 on page 189 Modify Click the Edit icon to change the settings of an existing share See Section 10 2 2 on page 189 Click the Remove icon to delete this share in the list You will be asked to confirm this action Apply Click this to save your changes to the ZyXEL Device Cancel Click this to set every field in this screen to its last saved value P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 10 File Sharing 10 2 1 Share Configuration Add Screen Use this screen to set up a new share on the ZyXEL Device Click Add in the USB Services gt File Sharing gt Share Configuration screen Figure 59 USB Services gt File Sharing gt Share Configuration Add Share Configuration Add Share Volume Share
274. is turned on or move the wireless client closer to the AP or peer computer When you try to connect to an AP with security configured a window will pop up prompting you to specify the security settings Enter the pre shared key and leave the encryption type at the default setting Use the Next button to move on to the next screen You can use the Back button at any time to return to the previous screen or the Exit button to return to the Site Survey screen Security Settings gt Encryption Type ikir x gt Pre Shared Key ThisismyWPA PSKpre sharedkey Back Next Exit P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorial 4 The Confirm Save window appears Check your settings and click Save to continue gt Network Name SSID SSID_Example3 gt Network Type Infrastructure gt Network Mode 802 11b g gt Channel Auto gt Security WPA PSK Back Save Exit 5 The ZyXEL utility returns to the Link I nfo screen while it connects to the wireless network using your settings When the wireless link is established the ZyXEL utility icon in the system tray turns green and the Link Info screen displays details of the active connection Check the network information in the Link Info screen to verify that you have successfully connected to the selected network If the wireless client is not connected to a network the fields in this screen remain blank Wireless Network Status Statistics gt Profile
275. ish that you receive source code or can get it if you want it that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs and that you know you can do these things To protect your rights we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the software or if you modify it For example if you distribute copies of such a program whether gratis or for a fee you must give the recipients all the rights that you have You must make sure that they too receive or can get the source code And you must show them these terms so they know their rights We protect your rights with two steps 1 copyright the software and 2 offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy distribute and or modify the software Also for each author s protection and ours we want to make certain that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free software If the software is modified by someone else and passed on we want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original authors reputations Finally any free program is threatened constantly by software patents We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses in effect making
276. it bandwidth devoted to the boss s excessive file downloading 22 P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 1 Introducing the ZyXEL Device 1 2 2 VoIP Features You can register up to 2 SIP Session Initiation Protocol accounts and use the ZyXEL Device to make and receive VoIP telephone calls Figure 2 ZyXEL Device s VoIP Application gt a a a A The ZyXEL Device sends your call to a VolP service provider s SIP server which forwards your calls to either VolP or PSTN phones 1 2 3 ZyXEL Device s USB Support Use the built in USB 2 0 port to share files via a USB memory stick or a USB hard drive A Alternatively you can add a USB printer B and make it available on your local area network Figure 3 USB File Sharing or Print Server Application 1 3 Ways to Manage the ZyXEL Device Use any of the following methods to manage the ZyXEL Device P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide 23 Chapter 1 Introducing the ZyXEL Device e Web Configurator This is recommended for everyday management of the ZyXEL Device using a Supported web browser e Command Line Interface Line commands are mostly used for troubleshooting by service engineers FTP for firmware upgrades and configuration backup restore 1 4 Good Habits for Managing the ZyXEL Device Do the following things regularly to make the ZyXEL Device more secure and to manage the ZyXEL Device more effectively e Change the password Use a passw
277. ity gt MAC Filter MAC Filter I Active MAC Address Filter Note Only devices listed here are granted access to the network es O macaaress OOOO O 0i o ia oa a a a a oOo Reset The following table describes the labels in this menu Table 53 Security gt MAC Filter LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Check this to enable MAC address filtering Set This is the index number of the MAC address Allow Select Allow to permit access to the ZyXEL Device MAC addresses not listed will be denied access to the ZyXEL Device If you clear this the MAC Address field for this set clears MAC Address Enter the MAC addresses of the wireless station that are allowed access to the ZyXEL Device in these address fields Enter the MAC addresses in a valid MAC address format that is six hexadecimal character pairs for example 12 34 56 78 9a bc Apply Click this to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device Reset Click this to reload the previous configuration for this screen P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Firewall 14 1 Overview Use the ZyXEL Device firewall screens to enable and configure the firewall that protects your ZyXEL Device and network from attacks by hackers on the Internet and control access to it By default the firewall e allows traffic that originates from your LAN computers to go to all other networks e blocks traffic that originates on
278. ive works of the Software or any part thereof You may not assign sublicense convey or otherwise transfer pledge as security or otherwise encumber the rights and licenses granted hereunder with respect to the Software Certain components of the Software and third party open source programs included with the Software have been or may be made available by ZyXEL listed in the below Table collectively the Open Sourced Components You may modify or replace only these Open Sourced Components provided that you comply with the terms of this License and any applicable licensing terms governing use of the Open Sourced Components which have been provided on the License Notice as below for the Software ZyXEL is not obligated to provide any maintenance technical or other support for the resultant modified Software You may not copy reverse engineer decompile reverse compile translate adapt or disassemble the Software or any part thereof nor shall you attempt to create the source code from the object code for the Software Except as and only to the extent expressly permitted in this License by applicable licensing terms governing use of the Open Sourced Components or by applicable law you may not market co brand private label or otherwise permit third parties to link to the Software or any part thereof You may not use the Software or any part thereof in the operation of a service bureau or for the benefit of any other person or entity Y
279. k at the current status of the device system resources interfaces LAN WAN and WLAN and SIP accounts You can also register and unregister SIP accounts The Status screen also provides detailed information from DHCP and statistics from VoIP and traffic Click Status to open this screen The screen varies slightly depending on the WAN mode you set using the DSL WAN switch Figure 7 Status Screen ADSL WAN mode Refresh Interval None kd Refresh Now Device Information System Status Host Name P 2612HNU F System Uptime imin Model Name P 2612HNU F3 Current Date Time Sat Jan 1 01 01 04 CET 2000 MAC Address 00 13 49 11 66 8b Meee ee Firmware Version V3 00 BLM 0 b9 NAT Sessions Usage 10 5 LAN Information IP Address 192 168 1 1 IP Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Interface Status 7 DHCP Server Server WLAN Information Channel 1 WPS Status Unconfigured Di gt SSID1 Information SSID ZYXEL H4CPVN Down Status off LAN2 Up 1000Mbps Security Mode WPA PSK SSID2 Information Eon WA SSID ZyXEL_KMKCAS Up 1000Mbps Status Off Security Mode No Security wa SSID3 Information SSID ZyXEL 7EPHMM Status off Security Mode No Security e SSID4 Information SSID ZyXEL _UVFTYC Packet Statistics Status Off Security Mode No Security Printer Registration Status Account Action PE ccount stots tT
280. k based on the Library independent of the use of the Library ina tool for writing it Whether that is true depends on what the Library does and what the program that uses the Library does 1 You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library s complete source code as you receive it in any medium provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty and distribute a copy of this License along with the Library You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee 2 You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion of it thus forming a work based on the Library and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above provided that you also meet all of these conditions a The modified work must itself be a software library b You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change c You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License d If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a table of data to be supplied P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Appendix F Open Software Announcements by
281. ld in the IP header The DS field contains a 2 bit unused field and a 6 bit DSCP field which can define up to 64 service levels The following figure illustrates the DS field DSCP is backward compatible with the three precedence bits in the ToS octet so that non DiffServ compliant ToS enabled network device will not conflict with the DSCP mapping DSCP 6 bits Unused 2 bits The DSCP value determines the forwarding behavior the PHB Per Hop Behavior that each packet gets across the DiffServ network Based on the marking rule different kinds of traffic can be marked for different kinds of forwarding Resources can then be allocated according to the DSCP values and the configured policies P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide 235 Chapter 17 Quality of Service QoS P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Dynamic DNS Setup 18 1 Overview 18 1 1 18 1 2 This chapter discusses how to configure your ZyXEL Device to use Dynamic DNS Dynamic DNS allows you to update your current dynamic IP address with one or many dynamic DNS services so that anyone can contact you in applications such as NetMeeting and CU SeeMe You can also access your FTP server or Web site on your own computer using a domain name for instance myhost dhs org where myhost is a name of your choice that will never change instead of using an IP address that changes each time you reconnect Your friends or relatives will always be able to call you e
282. line media content in the media bar Enable Automatic Image Resizing Fa gt Restore Defaults Mozilla Firefox Mozilla Firefox 2 0 screens are used here Screens for other versions may vary You can enable Java Javascripts and pop ups in one screen Click Tools then click Options in the screen that appears Figure 172 Mozilla Firefox Tools gt Options IOA Help Web Search Ctrl K Downloads Ctrl J Add ons Web Developer Error Console Adblock Plus Ctrl Shift 4 Page Info EireFTP Clear Private Data Ctrl Shift Del Tab Mix Plus Options Session Manager _ Options T P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Appendix C Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions Click Content to show the screen below Select the check boxes as shown in the following screen Figure 173 Mozilla Firefox Content Security a mw Feeds Privacy Security Advanced wa a Main Tabs v Block pop up windows Exceptions IV Load images automatically Exceptions IV Enable JavaScript Advanced IV Enable Java r Fonts amp Colors Default Font Times New Roman 7 Size 16 Advanced Colors File Types Configure how Firefox handles certain types of Files Manage ee H Cancel Help P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide 343 Appendix C Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions P 2612HNU Fx User
283. ll associate with the access point to gain access to the network Check the MAC addresses of your wireless clients usually printed on a label on the bottom of the device If there is an unknown MAC address you can remove it or reset the AP P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide 367 Appendix D Wireless LANs P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Common Services The following table lists some commonly used services and their associated protocols and port numbers For a comprehensive list of port numbers ICMP type code numbers and services visit the IANA Internet Assigned Number Authority web site e Name This is a short descriptive name for the service You can use this one or create a different one if you like e Protocol This is the type of IP protocol used by the service If this is TCP UDP then the service uses the same port number with TCP and UDP If this is USER DEFINED the Port s is the IP protocol number not the port number e Port s This value depends on the Protocol Please refer to RFC 1700 for further information about port numbers e If the Protocol is TCP UDP or TCP UDP this is the IP port number e If the Protocol is USER this is the IP protocol number e Description This is a brief explanation of the applications that use this service or the situations in which this service is used Table 105 Commonly Used Services NAME PROTOCOL PORT S DESCRIPTION AH User Defined 51 T
284. lls when you dial the speed dial number Description This field displays a short description of the party you call when you dial the speed dial number Modify Use this field to edit or erase the speed dial entry Click the Edit icon to copy the information for this speed dial entry into the Speed Dial section where you can change it Click the Remove icon to erase this speed dial entry P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide 171 Chapter 9 Voice Table 41 VoIP gt Phone Book gt Speed Dial LABEL DESCRIPTION Clear Click this to erase all the speed dial entries Cancel Click this to set every field in this screen to its last saved value 9 7 SIP Technical Reference This section contains background material relevant to the Vol P screens 9 7 1 VoIP VoIP is the sending of voice signals over Internet Protocol This allows you to make phone calls and send faxes over the Internet at a fraction of the cost of using the traditional circuit switched telephone network You can also use servers to run telephone service applications like PBX services and voice mail Internet Telephony Service Provider ITSP companies provide VoIP service Circuit switched telephone networks require 64 kilobits per second Kbps in each direction to handle a telephone call VolP can use advanced voice coding techniques with compression to reduce the required bandwidth 9 7 2 SIP 172 The Session Initiation Protocol SIP is an a
285. logs Log Settings Use this screen to select which logs and or immediate alerts your device is to record You can also set it to e mail the logs to you Tools Firmware Use this screen to upload firmware to your device Configuration Use this screen to backup and restore your device s configuration settings or reset the factory default settings Restart This screen allows you to reboot the ZyXEL Device without turning the power off Diagnostic DSL Line Use this screen to test the connections to other devices P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide 3 Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator Table 2 Navigation Panel Summary LINK TAB FUNCTION Account Admin Use this screen to change the password for the Administrator account for your ZyXEL Device User Use this screen to change the password for the User account for your ZyXEL Device 2 2 3 Main Window The main window displays information and configuration fields It is discussed in the rest of this document Right after you log in the Status screen is displayed See Chapter 4 on page 85 for more information about the Status screen 2 2 4 Status Bar Check the status bar when you click Apply or OK to verify that the configuration has been updated P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Tutorial 3 1 Overview This chapter contains the following tutorials Setting Up Your DSL Connection How to Set up a Wireless Network Setti
286. lowing table describes the fields in this screen Table 7 Packet Statistics LABEL DESCRIPTION WAN Services Statistics Interface This shows the name of the interface For the WAN interface a default name nas followed by a number for example nas1 indicates the DSL interface The name ethO 14 indicates the default Ethernet WAN interface the physical Ethernet WAN port The number after the dot represents the VLAN ID number assigned to traffic sent through this connection Description This applies to the WAN connection and shows the service name of the WAN connection 1 and 2 or 0 and 1 are the default VPI and VCI numbers The last number represents the index number of connections over the same PVC or the VLAN ID number assigned to traffic sent through this connection Received This field displays the number of bytes received on this port Bytes Pkts This field displays the number of packets received on this port Errs This field displays the number of error packets received on this port P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 4 Status Screens Table 7 Packet Statistics continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Drops This field applies to the WAN services and displays the number of packets that were received on this port and dropped Transmitted This field displays the number of bytes transmitted on this port Bytes Pkts This field displays the number of packets transmitted on this port
287. lt DNS server Selected WAN Interface ipoe _1_1ieth0 14 7 DNS Server Configuration Get DNS server information dynamically OR enter static DNS server IP addresses If only a single PYC with IPoA or static IPoE protocol is configured you must enter static DNS server IP addresses Obtain DNS info dynamically Use the following Static DNS IP address Secondary DNS server Back Next The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 19 Network gt WAN gt Internet Connection PPPoE PPPoA IPoE or IPoA LABEL DESCRIPTION Selected WAN Select a WAN interface through which you want to obtain a system Interfaces default server and DNS server Obtain DNS info Select this to have the ZyXEL Device use the DNS server addresses dynamically assigned by your ISP Use the following Select this to have the ZyXEL Device use the DNS server addresses Static DNS IP you configure manually address Primary DNS Enter the first DNS server address assigned by the ISP server Secondary Enter the second DNS server address assigned by the ISP DNS server Back Click this button to return to the previous screen Next Click this button to continue 5 3 1 5 Configuration Summary Click Next in the previous section to open this read only screen that shows the current WAN connection settings 12 P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup This screens shows for
288. lude I IP Packet Length 46 1504 TE Exclude T pscp 0 63 I Exclude I TCP ack IF Exclude F DHCP YendorClassiD DHCP Option 60 IF Exclude Class ID String F Service FTP z I Exclude Back Apply Cancel Class Name Give a class name to this traffic such as E mail in this example To Queue Link this to an item in the QoS gt Queue Setup screen which is the E mail queue created in this example From Interface This is the interface from which the traffic will be coming from Select LAN P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide 79 Chapter 3 Tutorial 3 12 Ether Type Select IP to identify the traffic source by its IP address or MAC address MAC Address Type the MAC address of your computer AA FF AA FF AA FF Type the MAC Mask if you know it IP Address Type the IP address of your computer 192 168 1 23 Type the IP Subnet Mask if you know it This maps e mail traffic to queue 7 created in the previous screen see the IP Protocol field This also maps your computer s IP address and MAC address to queue 7 see the Source fields Verify that the queue setup works by checking Advanced gt QoS gt Monitor This shows the bandwidth allotted to e mail traffic compared to other network traffic Monitor Refresh Interval No Retresh gt Interface Monitor No Name Pass Rate bps Drop Rate bps 1 eth0 14 392 0 Queue Monitor Access th
289. me before you can import the certificate Figure 75 Security gt Certificates gt Trusted CA gt Import File Path Certificates Trusted CAs Import Please specify the location of the certificate file to be imported The certificate file must be in one of the following formats BinaryX 509 PEM Base 64 encoded X 509 Binary PKCS 7 PEM Base 64 encoded PKCS 7 Browse Back Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 57 Security gt Certificates gt Trusted CA gt Import LABEL DESCRIPTION File Path Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse to find it Browse Click Browse to find the certificate file you want to upload Back Click Back to return to the previous screen Apply Click this to save the certificate on the ZyXEL Device Cancel Click this to quit and return to the Trusted CAs screen 15 5 Trusted CA Details Use this screen to view in depth information about the certification authority s certificate change the certificate s name and set whether or not you want the ZyXEL Device to check a certification authority s list of revoked certificates before trusting a certificate issued by the certification authority P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 15 Certificates Click Security gt Certificates gt Trusted CAs to open the Trusted CAs scr
290. n about the ZyXEL Device features described in this chapter Tool Examples Note Only the administrator account username admin can access the ZyXEL Device through FTP Note When uploading a firmware to the ZyXEL Device via TFTP FTP make sure you are in the FW subdirectory To do this while using an TFTP FTP client double click the FW folder When using a command console use the cd change directory command Using FTP or TFTP to Restore Configuration This example shows you how to restore a previously saved configuration Note that this function erases the current configuration before restoring a previous back up configuration please do not attempt to restore unless you have a backup configuration file stored on disk FTP is the preferred method for restoring your current computer configuration to your device since FTP is faster Please note that you must wait for the system to automatically restart after the file transfer is complete Do not interrupt the file transfer process as this may PERMANENTLY DAMAGE your device When the Restore Configuration process is complete the device automatically restarts Restore Using FTP Session Example Figure 102 Restore Using FTP Session Example ftp gt put config rom rom 0 200 Port command okay 150 Opening data connection for STOR rom 0 226 File received OK 221 Goodbye for writing flash ftp 16384 bytes sent in 0 06Seconds 273 07Kbytes sec ftp gt quit
291. n about the topics covered in this chapter Firewall Rules Overview Your customized rules take precedence and override the ZyXEL Device s default settings The ZyXEL Device checks the source IP address destination IP address and IP protocol type of network traffic against the firewall rules in the order you list them When the traffic matches a rule the ZyXEL Device takes the action specified in the rule Guidelines For Enhancing Security With Your Firewall Change the default password via web configurator Think about access control before you connect to the network in any way Limit who can access your ZyXEL Device Don t enable any local service such as telnet or FTP that you don t use Any enabled service could present a potential security risk A determined hacker might be able to find creative ways to misuse the enabled services to access the firewall or the network For local services that are enabled protect against misuse Protect by configuring the services to communicate only with specific peers and protect by configuring rules to block packets for the services at specific interfaces Keep the firewall in a secured locked room P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 14 Firewall 14 3 3 Security Considerations Note Incorrectly configuring the firewall may block valid access or introduce security risks to the ZyXEL Device and your protected network Use caution when creating or deleting firewall rules
292. n explicit VLAN tag in the MAC header to identify the VLAN membership of a frame across bridges A VLAN tag includes the 12 bit VLAN ID and 3 bit user priority The VLAN ID associates a frame with a specific VLAN and provides the information that devices need to process the frame across the network IEEE 802 1p specifies the user priority field and defines up to eight separate traffic types The following table describes the traffic types defined in the IEEE 802 1d standard which incorporates the 802 1p Table 67 JEEE 802 1p Priority Level and Traffic Type PRIORITY LEVEL TRAFFIC TYPE Level 7 Typically used for network control traffic such as router configuration messages Level 6 Typically used for voice traffic that is especially sensitive to jitter jitter is the variations in delay Level 5 Typically used for video that consumes high bandwidth and is sensitive to jitter Level 4 Typically used for controlled load latency sensitive traffic such as SNA Systems Network Architecture transactions Level 3 Typically used for excellent effort or better than best effort and would include important business traffic that can tolerate some delay Level 2 This is for spare bandwidth Level 1 This is typically used for non critical background traffic such as bulk transfers that are allowed but that should not affect other applications and users Level 0 Typically used for best effort traffi
293. n external syslog server Logging Active Click Active to enable syslog logging Syslog Server Enter the server name or IP address of the syslog server that will log the selected categories of logs UDP Port Enter the port number used by the syslog server Active Log and Alert Log Select the categories of logs that you want to record Send Select log categories for which you want the ZyXEL Device to send E mail Immediate alerts immediately Alert Apply Click this to save your customized settings and exit this screen Cancel Click this to return to the previously saved settings 21 4 Log Descriptions This section provides descriptions of example log messages Table 75 Call Statistics Logs LOG MESSAGE DESCRIPTION Start Outgoing Call SIP Someone used a phone to make an outgoing call Number rx pkts d rx bytes d lost Display the RTP packets status pkts Sd avg jitter d tx pkts d tx bytes d In Call End SIP Incoming call from SIP number has terminated Show Number Duration Seconds the call duration Out Call End SIP Outgoing call from SIP number has terminated Show Number Duration Seconds the call duration Incoming Call Established Incoming call from SIP number has been established SIP Number Outgoing Call Established Outgoing call to SIP number has been established SIP Number P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 21 Logs
294. n for this screen 12 3 Technical Reference The following section contains additional technical information about the ZyXEL Device features described in this chapter ZyXEL Device Print Server Compatible USB Printers The following is a list of USB printer models compatible with the ZyXEL Device print server Table 52 Compatible USB Printers BRAND MODEL Brother MFC7420 CANON BJ F9000 CANON i320 CANON PIXMA MP450 P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide 1 97 Chapter 12 Print Server Table 52 Compatible USB Printers continued BRAND MODEL CANON PIXMA MP730 CANON PIXMA MP780 CANON PIXMA MP830 CANON PIXUS ip2500 CANON PIXMA ip4200 CANON PIXMA ip5000 CANON PIXUS 990i EPSON CX3500 EPSON CX3900 EPSON EPL 5800 EPSON EPL 6200L EPSON LP 2500 EPSON LP 8900 EPSON RX 510 EPSON RX 530 EPSON Stylus 830U EPSON Stylus 1270 EPSON Stylus C43UX EPSON Stylus C60 EPSON Stylus Color 670 HP Deskjet 5550 HP Deskjet 5652 HP Deskjet 830C HP Deskjet 845C HP Deskjet 1125C HP Deskjet 1180C HP Deskjet 1220C HP Deskjet F4185 HP Laserjet 1022 HP Laserjet 1200 HP Laserjet 2200D HP Laserjet 2420 P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 12 Print Server Table 52 Compatible USB Printers continued BRAND MODEL HP Color
295. n how you configure these security features Table 104 Wireless Security Relational Matrix AUTHENTICATION METHOD KEY ENCRYPTIO ENTER IEEE 802 1X MANAGEMENT N METHOD MANUAL KEY PROTOCOL Open None No Disable Enable without Dynamic WEP Key Open WEP No Enable with Dynamic WEP Key Yes Enable without Dynamic WEP Key Yes Disable Shared WEP No Enable with Dynamic WEP Key Yes Enable without Dynamic WEP Key Yes Disable WPA TKIP AES No Enable WPA PSK TKIP AES Yes Disable WPA2 TKIP AES No Enable WPA2 PSK TKIP AES Yes Disable P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs Antenna Overview An antenna couples RF signals onto air A transmitter within a wireless device sends an RF signal to the antenna which propagates the signal through the air The antenna also operates in reverse by capturing RF signals from the air Positioning the antennas properly increases the range and coverage area of a wireless LAN Antenna Characteristics Frequency An antenna in the frequency of 2 4GHz IEEE 802 11b and IEEE 802 11g or 5GHz IEEE 802 11a is needed to communicate efficiently in a wireless LAN Radiation Pattern A radiation pattern is a diagram that allows you to visualize the shape of the antenna s coverage area Antenna Gain Antenna gain measured in dB decibel is the increase in coverage within the RF beam width Higher antenna gain improves the rang
296. n page 184 for an explanation of file sharing terms e See Section 3 6 on page 50 for a file sharing tutorial What You Can Do in this Chapter e Use the Share Configuration screen Section 10 2 on page 185 to enable file sharing server on the ZyXEL Device and configure the workgroup name e Use the Account Management screen Section 10 3 on page 190 to set up and configure a file sharing account P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 10 File Sharing 10 1 2 What You Need to Know 10 1 3 The following terms and concepts may help as you read this chapter User Account This gives you access to the file sharing server It includes your user name and password Workgroup name This is the name given to a set of computers that are connected on a network and share resources such as a printer or files Windows automatically assigns the workgroup name when you set up a network Shares When settings are set to default each USB device connected to the ZyXEL Device is given a folder called a share If a USB hard drive connected to the ZyXEL Device has more than one partition then each partition will be allocated a share You can also configure a share to be a sub folder or file on the USB device File Systems A file system is a way of storing and organizing files on your hard drive and storage device Often different operating systems such as Windows or Linux have different file systems The file sharing feature
297. nce standard seetsshwtandiseanedeeeitneninruetecerd 105 54 Tames itll Tee Rs SR cscs ts vstevs cansvacaesdasnuawtadnnluganeas E AA 113 Chapter 6 LAN SOUP ossieiiciesterscicsiesecicatcciescccesiciicsceicasaiietiesadeccearanlaseciandsresacuestsiseacubestauadacnascamuatccdseanacie 121 E RI ashes adc pabsean ccd atea Ak tadaee soda edna atlas eae aade cad ee ee ee 121 Bole What Yow Can Dain TNS GNapiet sonansa a iscn vanea eiecan panes 121 G Le Villian Vou Nesd To KNOW oiiaee inea E Sachs nds hencenGaiw ands 122 6 1 3 Beare You Begin icccscissecssneconncasrencanmardeanqnsnnenaderansrnauandsiennueniiannnanctanrneannmaeubanes 122 02 Ue Pe ssa ies es ctdeercs aa ander aaa aaa 122 DIG Sorar SOOO paasee iai 123 CATE Cien LO OGGE dosien i a 124 0o DCMU REEE CG porroi ai aE E IAE AEE A 126 Chapter 7 adlie eE T A E E E a T 129 EEEE aaea 129 Zi Wiat You Can Dain this Grape ssmisoroninioanaireien aa atiaenipates 129 Pala Whal You Need to KNOW ccsctnrciditocvonsticcunts weridancnusigddaaesnediaeaceeoisdeaausauaidananueiiacesencne 130 hia Bobre You Bogin seisseen aea EE S 133 7 2 The Wireless LAN General Screen ou ccccccecsesscaeceseeecceecesceeesesseaaeceecececeseeseseseeteaaeaaeees 133 Lo mesacny ASRI iaa E E 136 Por No SIN Graa a A rr err er err ty 137 173 2 Sahe WEP Shared WEP EnGiyphoit siciusictiacucsradent osstn selon ao e iaaa tows 137 Taa WPA PSKIWPA2 PSK AuthenticaADON oseni anara 139 F054 WPAN PA Authentication ssssscscvca
298. nd select a channel which is not used by another device Operating The ZyXEL Device automatically scans for and selects a channel whenever Channel the device reboots or the wireless setting is changed This is the channel currently being used by your AP Intra BSS A Basic Service Set BSS exists when all communications between Traffic wireless clients or between a wireless client and a wired network client go Blocking through one access point AP Intra BSS traffic is traffic between wireless clients in the BSS When Intra BSS is enabled wireless client A and B can access the wired network and communicate with each other When Intra BSS is disabled wireless client A and B can still access the wired network but cannot communicate with each other Check this to prevent wireless clients in this wireless network from communicating with one another Output Power Set the output power of the ZyXEL Device in this field If there is a high density of wireless devices in an area decrease the output power of the ZyXEL Device to reduce interference with other wireless devices Select either Low Med or High See the product specifications for more information on your ZyXEL Device s output power HT HT High Throughput Use the fields below to configure the 802 11n Parameters wireless environment of your ZyXEL Device P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide 135 Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Table 24 Network gt Wireless LAN
299. ndows 7 Open Windows Media Player It should automatically detect the ZyXEL Device O Windows Media Player File View Play Tools Help GO gt P2612HNU FP Organize v Stream v Create playlist v AUE Music E Library Playlists 4 JI Music D Artist Videos Album Genre E Videos Pictures Recorded TV da Music E Videos Pictures Recorded TV Pictures gt Recorded TV Playlists If you cannot see the ZyXEL Device in the left panel as shown above right click Other Libraries gt Refresh Other Libraries P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorial 2 Select a category in the left panel and wait for Windows Media Player to connect to the ZyXEL Device D Windows Media Player E File View Play Tools Help GO gt P2612HNU F gt Music gt All music Play ries Organize vy Stream Create playlist v HEI 4 Album E Library j Playlists a JJ Music H Artist A Contacting the remote media library Album x 2 Cancel Genre H Videos Oo Pictures Recorded TV P Other Libraries a P P2612HNU F JJ Music B Videos Pictures Recorded TV 3 In the right panel you should see a list of files available in the USB storage device O Windows Media Player File View Play Tools Help GO gt P2612HNU F gt Videos gt All Videos Play Organize Stream v Create playlist v Se v Searc Title Lengtt Releas
300. network behind a router R3 connected to the LAN Figure 77 Example of Static Routing Topology 16 1 1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the Static Route screens Section 16 2 on page 220 to view and configure IP static routes on the ZyXEL Device P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 16 Static Route 16 2 Configuring Static Route Use this screen to view and configure IP static routes on the ZyXEL Device Click Advanced gt Static Route to open the Static Route screen Figure 78 Advanced gt Static Route Static Route Static Route Rules Fs active status Name Destination SubnetMask Gateway Modity 1 g g Add Example_1 192 168 1 77 255 255 255 0 192 168 1 1 amp wi The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 59 Advanced gt Static Route LABEL DESCRIPTION Add Click this to go to the screen where you can set up a static route on the ZyXEL Device This is the number of an individual static route Active This indicates whether the rule is active or not You can change this in the Modify screen Section 16 2 1 on page 221 Status This shows whether the rule is currently in use or not Name This is the name that describes or identifies this route Destination This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination Routing is always based on network number Subnet Mask This parameter sp
301. nfigure your ZyXEL Device s Provider Voice over IP settings SIP Account Use this screen to set up information about your SIP account control which SIP accounts the phones connected to the ZyXEL Device use and configure audio settings such as volume levels for the phones connected to the ZyXEL Device Phone Analog Phone Use this screen to set which phone ports use which SIP accounts Region Use this screen to select your location and call service mode Phone Book Speed Dial Use this screen to configure speed dial for SIP phone numbers that you call often USB Services File Sharing Share Use this screen to enable file sharing server on Configuration the ZyXEL Device and configure the workgroup name Account Management Use this screen to set up and configure a file sharing account Media Server Configuration Use this screen to enable or disable the sharing of media files Print Server Print Configuration Use this screen to enable or disable sharing of a USB printer via your ZyXEL Device Security MAC Filter MAC Filter Use this screen to configure the ZyXEL Device to give exclusive access to specific wireless clients P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator Table 2 Navigation Panel Summary LINK TAB FUNCTION Firewall Services Use this screen to activate deactivate the firewall and set the default action t
302. ng Up NAT Port Forwarding How to Make a VoIP Call Using the File Sharing Feature Using the Media Server Feature Using the Print Server Feature Configuring the MAC Address Filter Configuring Static Route for Routing to Another Network Configuring QoS Queue and Class Setup Access the ZyXEL Device Using DDNS 3 2 Setting Up Your DSL Connection This tutorial shows you how to set up your Internet connection using the Web Configurator If you connect to the Internet through a DSL connection use the information from your Internet Service Provider ISP to configure the ZyXEL Device Do the following steps P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide 33 Chapter 3 Tutorial Hardware Preparation Check the back panel of your device where the Ethernet ports are located and make sure the DSL WAN switch is pointing up Connect one end of an Ethernet cable to the DSL port of your ZyXEL Device The other end should be connected to the DSL port in your house or a DSL router modem provided by your ISP Connect one end of another Ethernet cable to an Ethernet port on the ZyXEL Device and the other end to a computer that you will use to access the Web Configurator Connect the ZyXEL Device to a power source turn it on and wait for the POWER LED to become a steady green Turn on the modem provided by your ISP as well as the computer Account Configuration Click Network gt WAN gt Layer 2 Interface to open the following screen Select
303. ng bit in the IP address is part of the host ID The following example shows a subnet mask identifying the network number in bold text and host ID of an IP address 192 168 1 2 in decimal Table 90 IP Address Network Number and Host ID Example 1ST 2ND 3RD 4TH OCTET OCTET OCTET OCTET 192 168 1 2 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 00000010 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 00000000 Network Number 11000000 10101000 00000001 Host ID 00000010 P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Appendix A IP Addresses and Subnetting By convention subnet masks always consist of a continuous sequence of ones beginning from the leftmost bit of the mask followed by a continuous sequence of zeros for a total number of 32 bits Subnet masks can be referred to by the size of the network number part the bits with a 1 value For example an 8 bit mask means that the first 8 bits of the mask are ones and the remaining 24 bits are zeroes Subnet masks are expressed in dotted decimal notation just like IP addresses The following examples show the binary and decimal notation for 8 bit 16 bit 24 bit and 29 bit subnet masks Table 91 Subnet Masks BINARY 1ST 2ND 3RD 4TH DECIMAL OCTET OCTET OCTET OCTET 8 bit mask 11111111 00000000 00000000 00000000 255 0 0 0 16 bit mask 11111111 11111111 00000000 00000000 255 255 0 0 24 bit mask 11111111 111
304. ng on No Reply to the registered destination Disable CFNR DeActivate call forwarding on No Reply to the registered destination Enable CFB Activate call forwarding on No Busy to the registered destination P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 21 Logs Table 78 VolP Miscellaneous LOG MESSAGE DESCRIPTION Disable CFB DeActivate call forwarding on No Busy to the registered destination temp enable CallWaiting One shot enable call waiting temp disable CallWaiting One shot disable call waiting CallWaiting Interrogation Interrogation the call waiting status 252 P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Tools 22 1 Overview Use the instructions in this chapter to change the device s configuration file or upgrade its firmware After you configure your device you can backup the configuration file to a computer That way if you later misconfigure the device you can upload the backed up configuration file to return to your previous settings You can alternately upload the factory default configuration file if you want to return the device to the original default settings The firmware determines the device s available features and functionality You can download new firmware releases from your nearest ZyXEL FTP site or www zyxel com to use to upgrade your device s performance Only use firmware for your device s specific model Refer to the label on the
305. ng when placing or receiving calls Outgoing Calls The following figure represents the default behavior of your ZyXEL Device when two SIP accounts are configured and you are using two phones When you place a call from phone port 1 or phone port 2 the ZyXEL Device will use SIP account 1 Figure 107 Outgoing Calls Default PHONE 1 PHONE 2 SIP 2 In the next example phone port 1 is configured to use SIP account 1 and phone port 2 is configured to use SIP account 2 In this case every time you place a call through phone port 1 you are using your SIP account 1 Similarly every time you place a call through phone port 2 you are using your SIP account 2 To apply 276 P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 25 Troubleshooting these configuration changes you need to configure the Analog Phone screen See Section 9 4 on page 169 Figure 108 Outgoing Calls Individual Configuration PHONE 1 PHONE 2 25 6 2 Incoming Calls The following example shows the default behavior of your ZyXEL Device for incoming calls when two SIP accounts are configured and you are using two phones When a call comes in from your SIP account 1 the phones connected to both phone port 1 and phone port 2 ring Similarly when a call comes in from your SIP account 2 the phones connected to both phone port 1 and phone port 2 ring In either case you are not sure which SIP account the call is coming from Figure 109 Incoming Calls Default PHONE 1
306. ng your network For more information on IP address translation refer to RFC 1631 The IP Network Address Translator NAT 8 3 3 How NAT Works Each packet has two addresses a source address and a destination address For outgoing packets the ILA Inside Local Address is the source address on the LAN and the IGA Inside Global Address is the source address on the WAN For incoming packets the ILA is the destination address on the LAN and the IGA is the destination address on the WAN NAT maps private local IP addresses to globally unique ones required for communication with hosts on other networks It replaces the original IP source address and TCP or UDP source port numbers for Many to One and Many to Many Overload NAT mapping in each packet and then forwards it to the Internet The ZyXEL Device keeps track of the original addresses P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide 155 Chapter 8 Network Address Translation NAT and port numbers so incoming reply packets can have their original values restored The following figure illustrates this Figure 47 How NAT Works NAT Table LAN Inside Local Inside Global IP Address IP Address WAN 192 168 1 10 IGA 1 192 168 1 13 192 168 1 11 IGA2 192 168 1 12 IGA 3 192 168 1 13 IGA 4 Inside Local Inside Global Address ILA Address IGA 192 168 1 11 192 168 1 10 P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide 9 1 Overview Use this chapter to e Connect an analog phone
307. nications between access points and wireless clients extending a network s range P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Traditionally a wireless network operates in one of two ways e An infrastructure type of network has one or more access points and one or more wireless clients The wireless clients connect to the access points e An ad hoc type of network is one in which there is no access point Wireless clients connect to one another in order to exchange information Network Names Each network must have a name referred to as the SSID Service Set IDentifier The service set is the network so the service set identifier is the network s name This helps you identify your wireless network when wireless networks coverage areas overlap and you have a variety of networks to choose from Multiple SSIDs Traditionally you needed to use different access points APs to configure different SSIDs As well as the cost of buying extra APs there is also the possibility of channel interference The ZyXEL Device s Multiple SSID function allows you to use one AP to provide several SSIDs simultaneously You can then assign varying levels of privilege to different SSIDs Wireless stations can use different SSIDs to associate with the same AP The following are some notes on multiple SSIDs e A maximum of four SSIDs can be used simultaneously e You must use different WEP keys for
308. nking The ZyXEL Device is sending receiving data to from the LAN Off The ZyXEL Device does not have an Ethernet connection with the LAN WPS Green On The wireless network is activated and is operating in WLAN IEEE 802 11b g mode Blinking The ZyXEL Device is communicating with other wireless clients Off The wireless network is not activated DSL Green On This light applies when the ZyXEL Device is in DSL WAN mode The DSL line is up Blinking The ZyXEL Device is initializing the DSL line Off The DSL line is down WAN Green On This light applies when the ZyXEL Device is in Ethernet WAN mode The ZyXEL Device has an Ethernet connection with a device on the WAN Blinking The ZyXEL Device is sending receiving data to from the WAN Off The ZyXEL Device does not have an Ethernet connection with the WAN INTERNET Green On The ZyXEL Device has an IP connection but no traffic Your device has a WAN IP address either static or assigned by a DHCP server PPP negotiation was successfully completed if used and the DSL connection is up Blinking The ZyXEL Device is sending or receiving IP traffic Red On The ZyXEL Device attempted to make an IP connection but failed Possible causes are no response from a DHCP server no PPPoE response PPPoE authentication failed Off The ZyXEL Device does not have an IP connection PHONE Green On A SIP account is registered for the phone port Blinkin
309. ns Overview Hostname DNS Routing Additionally edit their configuration Name IP Address AMD PCnet Fast 79C971 DHCP Adding a Network Card Press Add to configure a new network card manually Configuring or Deleting Choose a network card to change or remove Then press Configure or Delete as desired AMD PCnet Fast 79C971 MAC 08 00 27 96 ed 3d Device Name eth etho Started automatically at boot IP address assigned using DHCP d Configure Abort P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 5 When the Network Card Setup window opens click the Address tab Figure 160 openSUSE 10 3 Network Card Setup YaST2 linux h20z Address Setup Al a Network Card Setup Select No Address Setup if you do not want any IP address for this device This is configuration Name particularly useful for anneme ile bonding ethernet devices _ No IP Address for Bonding Devices General Select Dynamic _ Dynamic Address DHCP address if you do not have a static IP address assigned by IP Address Subnet Mask Hostname the system administrator or your cable or DSL provider Statically assigned IP Address You can choose one of the dynamic address assignment method Select DHCP if you have a DHCP server running on your local network Network
310. nsport Layer Security With EAP TLS digital certifications are needed by both the server and the wireless clients for mutual authentication The server presents a certificate to the client After validating the identity of the server the client sends a different certificate to the server The exchange of certificates is done in the open before a secured tunnel is created This makes user identity vulnerable to passive attacks A digital certificate is an electronic ID card that authenticates the sender s identity However to implement EAP TLS you need a Certificate Authority CA to handle certificates which imposes a management overhead EAP TTLS Tunneled Transport Layer Service EAP TTLS is an extension of the EAP TLS authentication that uses certificates for only the server side authentications to establish a secure connection Client authentication is then done by sending username and password through the secure connection thus client identity is protected For client authentication EAP TTLS supports EAP methods and legacy authentication methods such as PAP CHAP MS CHAP and MS CHAP v2 PEAP Protected EAP Like EAP TTLS server side certificate authentication is used to establish a secure connection then use simple username and password methods through the secured connection to authenticate the clients thus hiding client identity However PEAP only supports EAP methods such as EAP MD5 EAP MSCHAPv2 and EAP GTC EAP Generic T
311. ntation files accompanying the Software Documentation for internal business use only for up to the number of users specified in sales order and invoice You have the right to make one backup copy of the Software and Documentation solely for archival back up or disaster recovery purposes You shall not exceed the scope of the license granted hereunder Any rights not expressly granted by ZyXEL to you are reserved by ZyXEL and all implied licenses are disclaimed 2 Ownership You have no ownership rights in the Software Rather you have a license to use the Software as long as this License Agreement remains in full force and effect Ownership of the Software Documentation and all intellectual property rights therein shall remain at all times with ZyXEL Any other use of the Software by any other entity is strictly forbidden and is a violation of this License Agreement 3 Copyright P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide 373 Appendix F Open Software Announcements 374 The Software and Documentation contain material that is protected by International Copyright Law and trade secret law and by international treaty provisions All rights not granted to you herein are expressly reserved by ZyXEL You may not remove any proprietary notice of ZyXEL or any of its licensors from any copy of the Software or Documentation 4 Restrictions You may not publish display disclose sell rent lease modify store loan distribute or create derivat
312. nually connect to a network e Configure a profile to have the wireless client automatically connect to a specific network or peer computer This example illustrates how to manually connect your wireless client to an access point AP which is configured for WPA PSK security and connected to the Internet Before you connect to the access point you must know its Service Set IDentity SSID and WPA PSK pre shared key In this example the SSID is SSID_Example3 and the pre shared key is ThisismyWPA PSKpre sharedkey After you install the ZyXEL utility and then insert the wireless client follow the steps below to connect to a network using the Site Survey screen P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorial 1 Open the ZyXEL utility and click the Site Survey tab to open the next Available Network List Site Information ssb Chamel signal i 1 Network Type Infrastructure T ZyXEL_MIS 6 62 Network Mode 802 119 ie zyxet_yzu 6 62 Channel 6 T ZyXEL_test 6 60 Security WPA PSK MAC Address 00 40 C5 CD 1F 64 SSID_Example3 ry Surveyed at 11 46 38 T CPE_5257_00 1 54 T dlink4300 6 50 Scan Connect screen shown 2 The wireless client automatically searches for available wireless networks Click Scan if you want to search again If no entry displays in the Available Network List that means there is no wireless network available within range Make sure the AP or peer computer
313. o apply them to the ZyXEL Device Cancel Click this to set every field in this screen to its last saved value P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 9 Voice 9 4 The Analog Phone Screen Use this screen to control which SIP accounts and PSTN line each phone uses To access this screen click Vol P gt Phone gt Analog Phone Figure 50 VoIP gt Phone gt Analog Phone Phone Port Selection Phone Port Selection Phonet SIP Account to Make Outgoing Call eraco sie numer siPt z ChangeMe SIP Account s to Receive Incoming Call F siP1 ChangeMe M sip ChangeMe Apply Cancel Each field is described in the following table Table 39 VolP gt Phone gt Analog Phone LABEL DESCRIPTION Phone Port Selection Phone Port Select a phone port in the ZyXEL Device Selection SIP Account to Make Outgoing Call SIP Account Select the SIP account you want to use when making outgoing calls Association with the analog phone connected to this phone port SIP Number Click this to go to a screen where you can configure the SIP number for the SIP account SIP Account s to Receive Incoming Call SIP Account Select a SIP account if you want to receive phone calls for the selected SIP account on this phone port If you select more than one SIP account for incoming calls there is no way to distinguish between them when you receive phone calls If you do not select a sourc
314. o take on network traffic going in specific directions Certificates My Certificates Use this screen to generate and export self signed certificates or certification requests and import the ZyXEL Device s CA signed certificates Trusted CAs Use this screen to save CA certificates to the ZyXEL Device Advanced Static Route Static Route Use this screen to configure IP static routes to tell your device about networks beyond the directly connected remote nodes Qos General Use this screen to enable QoS and decide allowable bandwidth using QoS Queue Setup Use this screen to configure QoS queue assignment Class Setup Use this screen to set up classifiers to sort traffic into different flows and assign priority and define actions to be performed for a classified traffic flow Monitor Use this screen to view each queue s statistics Dynamic DNS Dynamic DNS This screen allows you to use a static hostname alias for a dynamic IP address Service Service Use this screen to configure through which Control Control interface s users can use which service s to manage the ZyXEL Device Maintenance System General Use this screen to configure your device s name domain name management inactivity timeout and password Time Setting Use this screen to change your ZyXEL Device s time and date Logs View Log Use this screen to display your device s
315. oint with each access point connected together by a wired network This wired connection between APs is called a Distribution System DS This type of wireless LAN topology is called an Infrastructure WLAN The Access Points not only provide communication with the wired network but also mediate wireless network traffic in the immediate neighborhood P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs An ESSID ESS Dentification uniquely identifies each ESS All access points and their associated wireless clients within the same ESS must have the same ESSID in order to communicate Figure 176 Infrastructure WLAN eee ee 3 ee gt 7 Channel A channel is the radio frequency ies used by wireless devices to transmit and receive data Channels available depend on your geographical area You may have a choice of channels for your region so you should use a channel different from an adjacent AP access point to reduce interference Interference occurs when radio signals from different access points overlap causing interference and degrading performance Adjacent channels partially overlap however To avoid interference due to overlap your AP should be on a channel at least five channels away from a channel that an adjacent AP is using For example if your region has 11 channels and an adjacent AP is using channel 1 then you need to select a channel between 6 or 11 RTS CTS A hidden node occurs when two stati
316. oken Card for client authentication EAP GTC is implemented only by Cisco LEAP LEAP Lightweight Extensible Authentication Protocol is a Cisco implementation of IEEE 802 1x P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide 353 Appendix D Wireless LANs Dynamic WEP Key Exchange The AP maps a unique key that is generated with the RADIUS server This key expires when the wireless connection times out disconnects or reauthentication times out A new WEP key is generated each time reauthentication is performed If this feature is enabled it is not necessary to configure a default encryption key in the wireless security configuration screen You may still configure and store keys but they will not be used while dynamic WEP is enabled Note EAP MD5 cannot be used with Dynamic WEP Key Exchange For added security certificate based authentications EAP TLS EAP TTLS and PEAP use dynamic keys for data encryption They are often deployed in corporate environments but for public deployment a simple user name and password pair is more practical The following table is a comparison of the features of authentication types Table 103 Comparison of EAP Authentication Types EAP MD5 EAP TLS EAP TTLS PEAP LEAP Mutual Authentication No Yes Yes Yes Yes Certificate Client No Yes Optional Optional No Certificate Server No Yes Yes Yes No Dynamic Key Exchange No Yes Yes Yes Yes Credential Integrity None
317. old value is smaller than the RTS CTS value see previously you set then the RTS Request To Send CTS Clear to Send handshake will never occur as data frames will be fragmented before they reach RTS CTS size Preamble Type Preamble is used to signal that data is coming to the receiver Short and long refer to the length of the synchronization field in a packet Short preamble increases performance as less time sending preamble means more time for sending data All IEEE 802 11 compliant wireless adapters support long preamble but not all support short preamble Use long preamble if you are unsure what preamble mode other wireless devices on the network support and to provide more reliable communications in busy wireless networks Use short preamble if you are sure all wireless devices on the network support it and to provide more efficient communications Use the dynamic setting to automatically use short preamble when all wireless devices on the network support it otherwise the ZyXEL Device uses long preamble Note The wireless devices MUST use the same preamble mode in order to communicate IEEE 802 119 Wireless LAN IEEE 802 11 is fully compatible with the IEEE 802 11b standard This means an IEEE 802 11b adapter can interface directly with an IEEE 802 119 access point and vice versa at 11 Mbps or lower depending on range IEEE 802 11g has P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs several interme
318. ollowing settings in the Advanced gt Dynamic DNS screen e Select Active Dynamic DNS e Select Dynamic DNS for the DDNS type Type zyxelrouter dyndns org in the Host Name field P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorial e Enter the user name UserNamel1 and password 12345 Dynamic DNS Dynamic DNS Setup I active Dynamic DNS Service Provider Wii DynDNS ORG z Dynamic DNS Type D Host Name zyxelrouter dydns org 1 to 255 characters User Name UserName1 1 to 255 characters Password sR 1 to 63 characters Apply Reset Click Apply 3 12 3 Testing the DDNS Setting Now you should be able to access the ZyXEL Device from the Internet To test this Open a web browser on the computer using the IP address a b c d that is connected to the Internet Type http zyxelrouter dyndns org and press Enter The ZyXEL Device s login page should appear You can then log into the ZyXEL Device and manage it P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide PART Il Advanced Status Screens 85 WAN Setup 97 LAN Setup 121 Wireless LAN 129 Network Address Translation NAT 149 Voice 157 File Sharing 183 Media Server 193 Print Server 195 MAC Filter 201 Firewall 203 Certificates 209 Static Route 219 Quality of Service QoS 223 Dynamic DNS Setup 237 Service Control 239 Status Screens 4 1 Status Overview Use the Status screens to loo
319. ols to open the Firmware screen Follow the instructions in this screen to upload firmware to your ZyXEL Device The upload process uses HTTP Hypertext Transfer Protocol and may take up to two minutes After a successful upload the system will reboot See Section 22 5 1 on page 260 for upgrading firmware using FTP TFTP commands Do NOT turn off the ZyXEL Device while firmware upload is in progress Figure 92 Maintenance gt Tools gt Firmware Upgrade Firmware Upgrade To upgrade the firmware browse to the location of the binary BIN file and click Upload The latest firmware can be downloaded from the website If the file is compressed ZIP file you must first extract the binary BIN file In some cases you may need to reconfigure the device Current Firmware Version V3 00 BLT 0 b3 File Path Browse q Note The upload firmware takes about 4 minutes to complete and the device will reboot after firmware is successfully upgraded The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 80 Maintenance gt Tools gt Firmware Upgrade LABEL DESCRIPTION Current This is the present Firmware version and the date created Firmware Version File Path Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse to find it Browse Click Browse to find the bin file you want to upload Remember that you must decompress compressed zip files before you can
320. on top of UPnP It allows the users to use a TR 064 compliant CPE management application on their computers from the LAN to discover the CPE and configure user specific parameters such as the username and password SSH SCP SFTP Secure Shell SSH is a secure communication protocol that combines authentication and data encryption to provide secure encrypted communication between two hosts over an unsecured network The following file transfer methods use SSH P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 19 Service Control e Secure Copy SC is a secure way of transferring files between computers It uses port 22 SSH File Transfer Protocol or Secure File Transfer Protocol SFTP is an old way of transferring files between computers It uses port 22 19 2 The Service Control Screen Use this screen to decide what services you may use to access which ZyXEL Device interface Click Advanced gt Service Control to open the following screen Figure 87 Advanced gt Service Control Service Control Service Control HTTPS HTTP TELNET FTP SSHISCP SFTP UPnP TR 064 Services LANWWLAN WAN Pot aaa 99 4 Enable M Enable 443 Enable M Enable 80 Enable M Enable 23 Enable M Enable 21 Enable M Enable 22 Enable NA 49152 Enable NIA 18888 The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 69 Advanced gt Service Control LABEL DESCRIPTION This is the index number of th
321. on your ZyXEL Device supports File Allocation Table FAT FAT32 and New Technology File System NTFS Common Internet File System The ZyXEL Device uses Common Internet File System CIFS protocol for its file sharing functions CIFS compatible computers can access the USB file storage devices connected to the ZyXEL Device CIFS protocol is supported on Microsoft Windows Linux Samba and other operating systems refer to your systems specifications for CIFS compatibility Before You Begin Make sure the ZyXEL Device is connected to your network and turned on Connect the USB device to one of the ZyXEL Device s USB ports Make sure the ZyXEL Device is connected to your network P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 10 File Sharing 2 The ZyXEL Device detects the USB device and makes its contents available for browsing If you are connecting a USB hard drive that comes with an external power supply make sure it is connected to an appropriate power source that is on Note If your USB device cannot be detected by ZyXEL Device see the troubleshooting for suggestions 10 2 The Share Configuration Screen In the Server Settings screen you need to configure your ZyXEL Device s Workgroup Name The ZyXEL Device will not be able to join the workgroup if your local area network has restrictions set up that do not allow devices to join a workgroup In this case contact your network administrator Use this screen to set
322. ons are within range of the same access point but are not within range of each other The following figure illustrates a hidden node Both stations STA are within range of the access point AP or P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide 347 Appendix D Wireless LANs wireless gateway but out of range of each other so they cannot hear each other that is they do not know if the channel is currently being used Therefore they are considered hidden from each other Figure 177 RTS CTS E i a CTS Range Station AP gees me A wen Man AP iin pe i f iiia i i j Q 22 fw a i ENES ACK canm Stations A and B do not pY ae Station A T gt hear each other They f annann can hear the AP When station A sends data to the AP it might not know that the station B is already using the channel If these two stations send data at the same time collisions may occur when both sets of data arrive at the AP at the same time resulting in a loss of messages for both stations RTS CTS is designed to prevent collisions due to hidden nodes An RTS CTS defines the biggest size data frame you can send before an RTS Request To Send CTS Clear to Send handshake is invoked When a data frame exceeds the RTS CTS value you set between 0 to 2432 bytes the station that wants to transmit this frame must first send an RTS Request To Send message to the AP for permission to send it The AP then responds with a CTS Clear to Send messag
323. operating systems described in this appendix See the product specifications for more information about which operating systems are supported This appendix shows you how to configure the IP settings on your computer in order for it to be able to communicate with the other devices on your network Windows Vista XP 2000 Mac OS 9 OS X and all versions of UNIX LINUX include the software components you need to use TCP IP on your computer If you manually assign IP information instead of using a dynamic IP make sure that your network s computers have IP addresses that place them in the same subnet In this appendix you can set up an IP address for e Windows XP NT 2000 on page 305 e Windows Vista on page 309 e Windows 7 on page 313 e Mac OS X 10 3 and 10 4 on page 317 e Mac OS X 10 5 on page 321 e Linux Ubuntu 8 GNOME on page 324 e Linux openSUSE 10 3 KDE on page 329 Windows XP NT 2000 The following example uses the default Windows XP display theme but can also apply to Windows 2000 and Windows NT P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 1 2 Click Start gt Control Panel Figure 119 Windows XP Start Menu Re Internet Explorer 5 My Documents Q Outlook Express Y Paint Files and Settings Transfer W D s BY Command Prompt Co My Music et a Acrobat Reader 4 0 My Computer Tour windows xP 2 My Recent Documents My Pictures
324. or the Internet It connects your private networks such as a LAN Local Area Network and other networks so that a computer in one location can communicate with computers in other locations Figure 13 LAN and WAN 5 1 1 What You Can Do in this Chapter The Layer 2 Interface screen Section 5 2 on page 99 lets you view remove or add a layer 2 WAN interface e The Internet Connection screen Section 5 3 on page 103 lets you view and configure the WAN settings on the ZyXEL Device for Internet access P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup Table 9 WAN Setup Overview LAYER 2 INTERFACE INTERNET CONNECTION DSL LINK CONNECTION WAN SERVICE INTERFACE TYPE MODE TYPE CONNECTION SETTINGS Ethernet Default Mode PPPoE PPP user name and password WAN IP address VLAN MUX DNS server and default Mode Note gateway This mode is not yet IPOE WAN IP address NAT DNS supported by server and default gateway the ZyXEL Bridging N A Device as of writing ATM EoA Default Mode PPPoE PPP user name and password WAN IP address VLAN MUX DNS server and default Mode Note gateway This mode is not yet IPOE WAN IP address NAT DNS supported by server and default gateway the ZyXEL Bridging N A Device as of writing PPPOA PPP user name and password WAN IP address DNS server and default gateway I POA WAN IP address NAT DNS server and default gateway 5 1 2 What You Need
325. or this example External Port s Enter 666 as the Start and End port Protocol Select TCP UDP This should be the protocol supported by the Doom server P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorial 2 The screen should display as follows Click Add Port Forwarding Port Forwarding Server IP Service Name WAN Interface Address External Port s Internal Port s Protocol User Defined i 1_1_1 192 168 1 34 a eS a eo TCP UDP Add user Define z poe zl fis2 t68 B66 B66 B66 Bee External External Internal Internal Server IP pentacal Start Port End Port Start Port End Port Address Totoro Apply Reset 3 The port forwarding settings you configured should appear in the table Click Apply to have the ZyXEL Device start forwarding port 666 traffic to the computer with IP address 192 168 1 34 Port Forwarding Port Forwarding Server IP Service Name WAN Interface Address External Port s Internal Port s Protocol m EA User Defined a ae 11 Ball Internal End Part Internal Start Port External End Port External Start Port Server IP Address Apply Reset Players on the Internet then can have access to Thomas Doom server 3 5 How to Make a VoIP Call You can register a SIP account with the SIP server and make voice calls over the Internet to another VoIP device 3 5 1 VoIP Calls
326. ord that s not easy to guess and that consists of different types of characters such as numbers and letters e Write down the password and put it in a safe place e Back up the configuration and make sure you know how to restore it Restoring an earlier working configuration may be useful if the device becomes unstable or even crashes If you forget your password you will have to reset the ZyXEL Device to its factory default settings If you backed up an earlier configuration file you would not have to totally re configure the ZyXEL Device You could simply restore your last configuration 1 5 LEDs Lights The following graphic displays the labels of the LEDs Figure 4 LEDs on the Top of the Device onsets POWER ETHERNET WILAN WPS DSL WAN INTERNET PHONE None of the LEDs are on if the ZyXEL Device is not receiving power Table 1 LED Descriptions LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION POWER Green On The ZyXEL Device is receiving power and ready for use Red On The ZyXEL Device detected an error while self testing or there is a device malfunction Off The ZyXEL Device is not receiving power P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 1 Introducing the ZyXEL Device Table 1 LED Descriptions LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION ETHERNET Green On The ZyXEL Device has an Ethernet connection with a 1 4 device on the Local Area Network LAN Bli
327. osh OS X Before You Begin To configure the print server you need the following e Your ZyXEL Device must be connected to your computer and any other devices on your network The USB printer must be connected to your ZyXEL Device e A USB printer with the driver already installed on your computer e The computers on your network must have the printer software already installed before they can create a TCP IP port for printing via the network Follow your printer manufacturers instructions on how to install the printer software on your computer Note Your printer s installation instructions may ask that you connect the printer to your computer Connect your printer to the ZyXEL Device instead P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 12 Print Server 12 2 The Print Server Screen Use this screen to enable or disable sharing of a USB printer via your ZyXEL Device To access this screen click USB Services gt Print Server Figure 67 USB Services gt Print Server Print Configuration Print Server I Enable Printer Server Services Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this menu Table 51 USB Services gt Print Server LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable Check this to have the ZyXEL Device share a USB printer Printer Server Otherwise clear this Services Apply Click this to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device Cancel Click this to reload the previous configuratio
328. ot be disabled Hide SSID Select this check box to hide the SSID in the outgoing beacon frame so a station cannot obtain the SSID through scanning using a site survey tool P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Table 24 Network gt Wireless LAN gt General continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Mode Select This makes sure that only compliant WLAN devices can associate with the ZyXEL Device Select 802 11b g n to allow IEEE802 11b EEE802 11g and EEE802 11n compliant WLAN devices to associate with the ZyXEL Device The transmission rate of your ZyXEL Device might be reduced Select 802 11b g to allow both EEE802 11b and EEE802 11g compliant WLAN devices to associate with the ZyXEL Device The transmission rate of your ZyXEL Device might be reduced Select 802 11g Only to allow only IEEE 802 11g compliant WLAN devices to associate with the ZyXEL Device Select 802 11n only in 2 4G band to allow only IEEE 802 11n compliant WLAN devices with the same frequency range 2 4 GHz to associate with the ZyXEL Device Select 802 11n only in 5G band to allow only IEEE 802 11n compliant WLAN devices with the same frequency range 5 GHz to associate with the ZyXEL Device Channel Select this option and set the operating frequency channel depending on Selection your particular region Select a channel from the drop down list box Scan Click this button to have the ZyXEL Device immediately scan for a
329. ou may not cause assist or permit any third party to do any of the foregoing Portions of the Software utilize or include third party software and other copyright material Acknowledgements licensing terms and disclaimers for such material are contained in the License Notice as below for the Software and your use of such material is governed by their respective terms ZyXEL has provided as part of the Software package access to certain third party software as a convenience To the extent that the Software contains third party software ZyXEL has no express or implied obligation to provide any technical or other support for such software Please contact the appropriate software vendor or manufacturer directly for technical support and customer service related to its software and products 5 Confidentiality You acknowledge that the Software contains proprietary trade secrets of ZyXEL and you hereby agree to maintain the confidentiality of the Software using at least as great a degree of care as you use to maintain the confidentiality of your own most confidential information You agree to reasonably communicate the terms and conditions of this License Agreement to those persons employed by you who P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Appendix F Open Software Announcements come into contact with the Software and to use reasonable best efforts to ensure their compliance with such terms and conditions including without limitation not knowingly
330. ouple of examples Daylight Saving Time ends in the United States on the first Sunday of November Each time zone in the United States stops using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A M local time So in the United States you would select First Sunday November and type 2 in the o clock field Daylight Saving Time ends in the European Union on the last Sunday of October All of the time zones in the European Union stop using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment 1 A M GMT or UTC So in the European Union you would select Last Sunday October The time you type in the o clock field depends on your time zone In Germany for instance you would type 2 because Germany s time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC GMT 1 Apply Click this to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device Reset Click this to begin configuring this screen afresh P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide 21 1 21 1 1 21 1 2 Logs Overview The web configurator allows you to choose which categories of events and or alerts to have the ZyXEL Device log and then display the logs or have the ZyXEL Device send them to an administrator as e mail or to a syslog server Note The ZyXEL Device s log feature is only for Voice over IP VoIP What You Can Do in this Chapter e Use the View Log screen Section 21 2 on page 248 to see the logs for the categories that you selected in the Log Settings screen e Use The Log Settings screen Section
331. our vendor for further information e Make sure to connect the cables to the correct ports e Place connecting cables carefully so that no one will step on them or stumble over them e Always disconnect all cables from this device before servicing or disassembling e Use ONLY an appropriate power adaptor or cord for your device e Connect the power adaptor or cord to the right supply voltage for example 110V AC in North America or 230V AC in Europe Do NOT allow anything to rest on the power adaptor or cord and do NOT place the product where anyone can walk on the power adaptor or cord Do NOT use the device if the power adaptor or cord is damaged as it might cause electrocution e If the power adaptor or cord is damaged remove it from the device and the power source e Do NOT attempt to repair the power adaptor or cord Contact your local vendor to order a new one e Do not use the device outside and make sure all the connections are indoors There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning e Do NOT obstruct the device ventilation slots as insufficient airflow may harm your device e Use only No 26 AWG American Wire Gauge or larger telecommunication line cord e Ifyou wall mount your device make sure that no electrical lines gas or water pipes will be damaged Your product is marked with this symbol which is known as the WEEE mark WEEE gt stands for Waste Electronics and Electrical Equipment It means that us
332. outers use the network number to send packets to the correct network while the host ID determines to which host on the network the packets are delivered Structure An IP address is made up of four parts written in dotted decimal notation for example 192 168 1 1 Each of these four parts is known as an octet An octet is an eight digit binary number for example 11000000 which is 192 in decimal notation Therefore each octet has a possible range of 00000000 to 11111111 in binary or O to 255 in decimal P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Appendix A IP Addresses and Subnetting The following figure shows an example IP address in which the first three octets 192 168 1 are the network number and the fourth octet 16 is the host ID Figure 113 Network Number and Host ID 192 168 1 16 i i at i p I af I mmmh ff i I I I i I I I I I I I I I I i rt a a ap EB Eee eee eee ee How much of the IP address is the network number and how much is the host ID varies according to the subnet mask Subnet Masks A subnet mask is used to determine which bits are part of the network number and which bits are part of the host ID using a logical AND operation The term subnet is short for Sub network A subnet mask has 32 bits If a bit in the subnet mask is a 1 then the corresponding bit in the IP address is part of the network number If a bit in the subnet mask is 0 then the correspondi
333. permitting such persons to use any portion of the Software for the purpose of deriving the source code of the Software 6 No Warranty THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW ZyXEL DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ZyXEL DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE FUNCTIONS CONTAINED IN THE SOFTWARE WILL MEET ANY REQUIREMENTS OR NEEDS YOU MAY HAVE OR THAT THE SOFTWARE WILL OPERATE ERROR FREE OR IN AN UNINTERUPTED FASHION OR THAT ANY DEFECTS OR ERRORS IN THE SOFTWARE WILL BE CORRECTED OR THAT THE SOFTWARE IS COMPATIBLE WITH ANY PARTICULAR PLATFORM SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE WAIVER OR EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES SO THEY MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU IF THIS EXCLUSION IS HELD TO BE UNENFORCEABLE BY A COURT OF COMPETENT JURISDICTION THEN ALL EXPRESS AND IMPLIED WARRANTIES SHALL BE LIMITED IN DURATION TO A PERIOD OF THIRTY 30 DAYS FROM THE DATE OF PURCHASE OF THE SOFTWARE AND NO WARRANTIES SHALL APPLY AFTER THAT PERIOD 7 Limitation of Liability IN NO EVENT WILL ZyXEL BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY THIRD PARTY FOR ANY INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION INDIRECT SPECIAL PUNITIVE OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF BUSINESS LOSS OF PROFITS BUSINESS INTERRUPTION OR LOSS OF BUSINESS INFORMATION ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM OR FO
334. physical connection determines whether the ZyXEL Device ports are LAN or WAN ports There are two separate IP networks one inside the LAN network and the other outside the WAN network as shown next Figure 32 LAN and WAN IP Addresses DHCP Setup DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol RFC 2131 and RFC 2132 allows individual clients to obtain TCP IP configuration at start up from a server You can configure the ZyXEL Device as a DHCP server or disable it When configured as a server the ZyXEL Device provides the TCP IP configuration for the clients If you turn DHCP service off you must have another DHCP server on your LAN or else the computer must be manually configured IP Pool Setup The ZyXEL Device is pre configured with a pool of IP addresses for the DHCP clients DHCP Pool See the product specifications in the appendices Do not assign static IP addresses from the DHCP pool to your LAN computers LAN TCP IP The ZyXEL Device has built in DHCP server capability that assigns IP addresses and DNS servers to systems that support DHCP client capability P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 6 LAN Setup IP Address and Subnet Mask Similar to the way houses on a street share a common street name so too do computers on a LAN share one common network number Where you obtain your network number depends on your particular situation If the ISP or your network administrator assigns you a block of registered IP addresse
335. plays in red and includes a Not Yet Valid message if the certificate has not yet become applicable Valid To This field displays the date that the certificate expires The text displays in red and includes an Expiring or Expired message if the certificate is about to expire or has already expired Modify Click the Edit icon to open a screen with an in depth list of information about the certificate Click the Remove icon to remove the certificate A window displays asking you to confirm that you want to delete the certificates Note that subsequent certificates move up by one when you take this action Cert Click this button and then Save in the File Download screen The Save As screen opens browse to the location that you want to use and click Save Import Click Import to open a screen where you can save the certificate of a certification authority that you trust from your computer to the ZyXEL Device Refresh Click this button to display the current validity status of the certificates 15 4 Trusted CA Import Click Security gt Certificates gt Trusted CAs to open the Trusted CAs screen and then click Import to open the Trusted CA Import screen Follow the instructions in this screen to save a trusted certification authority s certificate to the ZyXEL Device P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 15 Certificates Note You must remove any spaces from the certificate s filena
336. pplication layer control signaling protocol that handles the setting up altering and tearing down of voice and multimedia sessions over the Internet SIP signaling is separate from the media for which it handles sessions The media that is exchanged during the session can use a different path from that of the signaling SIP handles telephone calls and can interface with traditional circuit switched telephone networks SIP Identities A SIP account uses an identity sometimes referred to as a SIP address A complete SIP identity is called a SIP URI Uniform Resource Identifier A SIP account s URI identifies the SIP account in a way similar to the way an e mail address identifies an e mail account The format of a SIP identity is SIP Number SIP Service Domain P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 9 Voice SIP Number The SIP number is the part of the SIP URI that comes before the symbol A SIP number can use letters like in an e mail address johndoe your ITSP com for example or numbers like a telephone number 1122334455 Vol P provider com for example SIP Service Domain The SIP service domain of the VoIP service provider is the domain name in a SIP URI For example if the SIP address is 1122334455 Vol P provider com then Vol P provider com is the SIP service domain SIP Registration Each ZyXEL Device is an individual SIP User Agent UA To provide voice service it has a public IP address for SIP an
337. print is a message digest calculated using the MD5 or SHAI algorithms The following procedure describes how to check a certificate s fingerprint to verify that you have the actual certificate Browse to where you have the certificate saved on your computer Make sure that the certificate has a cer or crt file name extension Figure 71 Certificates on Your Computer e hand mn EdLondon Office cer CH E3 La office crt Certificates P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 15 Certificates 3 Double click the certificate s icon to open the Certificate window Click the Details tab and scroll down to the Thumbprint Algorithm and Thumbprint fields Figure 72 Certificate Details kn gt General Details Certification Path Show lt ai gt Value Glenn RSA 1024 Bits Digital Signature Certificate Signing DNS Name Glenn Subject Type CA Path Length Cons Fe Thumbprint algorithm shal SJ Thumbprint BOA7 22B6 7960 FF92 S2F4 6B4C A2 vi 4 Useasecure method to verify that the certificate owner has the same information in the Thumbprint Algorithm and Thumbprint fields The secure method may very based on your situation Possible examples would be over the telephone or through an HTTPS connection 15 2 My Certificates Use this screen to view the ZyXEL Device s summary list of certificates and certification requests You can import the following certificat
338. questing authentication e Access Reject Sent by a RADIUS server rejecting access e Access Accept Sent by a RADIUS server allowing access P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide 351 Appendix D Wireless LANs e Access Challenge Sent by a RADIUS server requesting more information in order to allow access The access point sends a proper response from the user and then sends another Access Request message The following types of RADIUS messages are exchanged between the access point and the RADIUS server for user accounting e Accounting Request Sent by the access point requesting accounting e Accounting Response Sent by the RADIUS server to indicate that it has started or stopped accounting In order to ensure network security the access point and the RADIUS server use a shared secret key which is a password they both know The key is not sent over the network In addition to the shared key password information exchanged is also encrypted to protect the network from unauthorized access Types of EAP Authentication This section discusses some popular authentication types EAP MD5 EAP TLS EAP TTLS PEAP and LEAP Your wireless LAN device may not support all authentication types EAP Extensible Authentication Protocol is an authentication protocol that runs on top of the IEEE 802 1x transport mechanism in order to support multiple types of user authentication By using EAP to interact with an EAP compatible RADIUS serv
339. r Computer s IP Address 3 Click the Network and Sharing Center icon Figure 126 Windows Vista Network And Internet 3 CION F gt Control Panel Network and Internet p p Search p File Edit View Tools Help Control Panel Home i EN Network and Sharing Center n am nnect to a network System and Maintenance Security e Network and Internet View network computers and devices Add a device to the network Set up file sharing Internet Options Connect to the Internet Change yourhomepage Manage browser add ons Programs Delete browsing history and cookies jz Hardware and Sound 4 Click Manage network connections Figure 127 Windows Vista Network and Sharing Center Gv 5 Network and Internet Network and Sharing Center v File Edit View Tools Help Tasks A A Network and Sharing Center View computers and devices Connect to a network C Set up a canne tinn or network 4 k 9 d Manage network connections A TWPC99111 Internet Diagnose ana repair This computer Not connected 5 Right click Local Area Connection and then select Properties Figure 128 Windows Vista Network and Sharing Center LAN or High Sesed Internet 11 Local Collapse group Left Arrow A Conne x get IRE Expand all groups Collapse all groups Disable Status Diagnose Bridge Connections Create Shortcut Delete Rename Note During this procedur
340. r Statistics Hardware Address 00 16 cb 8b 50 2e IP Address es 118 169 44 203 Link Speed 100 Mb Link Status Active Vendor Marvell Model Yukon Gigabit Adapter 88E8053 Sent Packets 20607 Send Errors 0 Recv Packets 22626 Recv Errors 0 Collisions 0 P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address Mac OS X 10 5 The screens in this section are from Mac OS X 10 5 1 Click Apple gt System Preferences Figure 144 Mac OS X 10 5 Apple Menu Finder File Edit Vie About This Mac Software Update Mac OS X Software SS System Preferences y R Recent Items gt Force Quit VES Sleep Restart Shut Down 2 In System Preferences click the Network icon Figure 145 Mac OS X 10 5 Systems Preferences e020 System Preferences Personal Appearance Desktop amp Expos amp International ok Spotlight Screen Saver Spaces Hardware O P A ee gt o D CDs amp DVDs Displays Energy Keyboard amp Print amp Fax Sound Saver Mouse Internet amp N e e ej a a QuickTime Sharing System Q A u O Accounts Date amp Time Parental Software Speech Startup Disk Time Machine Universal Controls Update Access P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide 321 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 3 When the Network preferences pane opens select Ethernet from the list of available connection types Figure 146 Mac OS X 1
341. r modifying the Program or works based on it 6 Each time you redistribute the Program or any work based on the Program the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy distribute or modify the Program subject to these terms and conditions You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients exercise of the rights granted herein You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to this License 7 If as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason not limited to patent issues conditions are imposed on you whether by court order agreement or otherwise that contradict the conditions of this License they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations then as a consequence you may not distribute the Program at all For example if a patent license would not permit royalty free redistribution of the Program by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Program If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance the balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circ
342. r these conditions and telling the user how to view a copy of this License Exception if the Program itself is interactive but does not normally print such an announcement your work based on the Program is not required to print an announcement These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves then this License and its terms do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Program the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it Thus it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you rather the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Program In addition mere aggregation of another P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Appendix F Open Software Announcements work not based on the Program with the Program or with a work based on the Program on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License 3 You may copy and distribute the Program or a work b
343. rary Public License version 2 hence the version number 2 1 P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Appendix F Open Software Announcements Preamble The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it By contrast the GNU General Public Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software to make sure the software is free for all its users This license the Lesser General Public License applies to some specially designated software packages typically libraries of the Free Software Foundation and other authors who decide to use it You can use it too but we suggest you first think carefully about whether this license or the ordinary General Public License is the better strategy to use in any particular case based on the explanations below When we speak of free software we are referring to freedom of use not price Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software and charge for this service if you wish that you receive source code or can get it if you want it that you can change the software and use pieces of it in new free programs and that you are informed that you can do these things To protect your rights we need to make restrictions that forbid distributors to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender these rights These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you i
344. re is properly connected refer to the Quick Start Guide 2 Launch your web browser 3 Type 192 168 1 1 as the URL P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator 4 A password screen displays Type admin default as the username and 1234 as the password and click Login Click Cancel to revert to the default password in the password field If you have changed the password enter your password and click Login Figure 5 Password Screen Welcome to your router Configuration Interface Enter your user name and password then click Login Note For security reasons the ZyXEL Device automatically logs you out if you do not use the web configurator for five minutes default If this happens log in again 2 2 Web Configurator Main Screen The following screen shows after you have logged in Figure 6 Main Screen ZyXEL gt Status Status Device Information Host Name Model Name MAC Address Firmware Version WAN Information Mode IP Address IP Subnet Mask LAN Information IP Address IP Subnet Mask DHCP Server WLAN Information Channel WPS Status SSID1 Information SSID Status Security Mode SSID2 Information SSID Status Security Mode SSID3 Information SSID Status P 2612HNU F3 P 2612HNU F3 00 13 49 11 66 8b V3 00 BLM 0 b9 ETHER WAN IPoE 192 168 1 1 2
345. reate Playlist Create Auto Pla E gt Playlists 0a P Create Playlist E Jd Library Music Pictures D Artist Album d Songs Worlds Aaron Goldberg Jazz Genre EJ Year Ly Rating 2006 Add Favorites to List When Dragging Quiet Songs Aisha Duo Jazz 2005 More Options Help with Using the Library 2 Check Find media that others are sharing in the following screen and click OK Media Sharing A 21x Find and share music pictures and video on your network I Share my media F Your network Network is a private network Devices that you allow can GP find your shared media P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorial In the Library screen check the left panel detect the ZyXEL Device The Windows Media Player should F windows Media Player Now Playing Library dd Music P2612HNUF gt E p Playlists Title gt Create Playlist Primary Views E JI Library M Artist Sa AJ n X Album Wed A a J Songs Artist Album Songs Additional Views g A d Songs Contributing Composer Parental Genre Artist Rating E Year Ly Rating gt Playlists gt Genre Year Rating Playlists j Online Stores The ZyXEL Device displays as a playlist Clicking on the category icons in the right panel shows you the media files in the USB storage device attached to your ZyXEL Device Wi
346. reduction in network performance and make the network inadequate for time critical application such as video on demand The ZyXEL Device assigns each packet a priority and then queues the packet accordingly Packets assigned a high priority are processed more quickly than those with low priority if there is congestion allowing time sensitive applications to flow more smoothly Time sensitive applications include both those that require a low level of latency delay and a low level of jitter variations in delay such as Internet gaming and those for which jitter alone is a problem such as Internet radio or streaming video Note The ZyXEL Device has built in configurations for Voice over IP IP The Quality of Service QoS feature does not affect VoIP traffic e See Section 17 6 on page 233 for advanced technical information on SIP What You Can Do in this Chapter e Use the General screen Section 17 2 on page 224 to enable QoS on the ZyXEL Device and decide allowable bandwidth using QoS e Use the Queue Setup screen Section 17 3 on page 226 lets you configure QoS queue assignment e Use the Class Setup screen Section 17 4 on page 227 to set up classifiers to sort traffic into different flows and assign priority and define actions to be performed for a classified traffic flow P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide 223 Chapter 17 Quality of Service QoS e Use the Monitor screen Section 17 5 on page 233 to view the ZyXEL De
347. reet share a common street name so too do computers on a LAN share one common network number This is known as an Internet Protocol address Subnet Mask The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address Your ZyXEL Device will compute the subnet mask automatically based on the IP address that you entered You don t need to change the subnet mask computed by the ZyXEL Device unless you are instructed to do otherwise DHCP DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol allows clients to obtain TCP IP configuration at start up from a server This ZyXEL Device has a built in DHCP server capability that assigns IP addresses and DNS servers to systems that support DHCP client capability DNS DNS Domain Name System maps a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa The DNS server is extremely important because without it you must know the IP address of a computer before you can access it The DNS server addresses you enter when you set up DHCP are passed to the client machines along with the assigned IP address and subnet mask 6 1 3 Before You Begin Find out the MAC addresses of your network devices if you intend to add them to the DHCP Client List screen 6 2 The IP Screen Click Network gt LAN to open the IP screen See Section 6 1 on page 121 for background information Use this screen to set the Local Area Network IP address 122 P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 6 LAN Setup and
348. registered with a SIP server Register Fail The last time the ZyXEL Device tried to register the SIP account with the SIP server the attempt failed The ZyXEL Device automatically tries to register the SIP account when you turn on the ZyXEL Device or when you activate it Inactive The SIP account is not active You can activate it in VoIP gt SIP gt SIP Settings Registration Time This field displays the last time you successfully registered the SIP account It displays N A if you never successfully registered this account URI This field displays the account number and service domain of the SIP account You can change these in VoIP gt SIP gt SIP Settings Message This field indicates whether or not there are any messages waiting for Waiting the SIP account Last Incoming Number This field displays the last number that called the SIP account It displays N A if no number has ever dialed the SIP account Last Outgoing This field displays the last number the SIP account called It displays Number N A if the SIP account has never dialed a number Call Status Account This column displays each SIP account in the ZyXEL Device Duration This field displays how long the current call has lasted Status This field displays the current state of the phone call Idle There are no current VoIP calls incoming calls or outgoing calls being made DIAL The callee s phone is ringing RING Th
349. rent call on hold to answer an incoming call 3 Separate the current three way conference call into two individual calls one is on line the other is on hold Flash 3 Create three way conference connection Flash O8 Transfer the call to another phone P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 9 Voice European Call Hold Call hold allows you to put a call A on hold by pressing the flash key If you have another call press the flash key and then 2 to switch back and forth between caller A and B by putting either one on hold Press the flash key and then 0 to disconnect the call presently on hold and keep the current call on line Press the flash key and then 1 to disconnect the current call and resume the call on hold If you hang up the phone but a caller is still on hold there will be a remind ring European Call Waiting This allows you to place a call on hold while you answer another incoming call on the same telephone directory number If there is a second call to a telephone number you will hear a call waiting tone Take one of the following actions e Reject the second call Press the flash key and then press 0 e Disconnect the first call and answer the second call Either press the flash key and press 1 or just hang up the phone and then answer the phone after it rings e Put the first call on hold and answer the second call Press the flash key an
350. rnet browser 3 If this does not work you have to reset the device to its factory defaults See Section 1 6 on page 26 cannot see or access the Login screen in the web configurator 1 Make sure you are using the correct IP address e The default IP address is 192 168 1 1 e If you changed the IP address Section on page 127 use the new IP address 272 P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 25 Troubleshooting e If you changed the IP address and have forgotten it see the troubleshooting suggestions for forgot the IP address for the ZyXEL Device 2 Check the hardware connections and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected See the Quick Start Guide 3 Make sure your Internet browser does not block pop up windows and has JavaScripts and Java enabled See Appendix C on page 335 4 Reset the device to its factory defaults and try to access the ZyXEL Device with the default IP address See Section 1 6 on page 26 5 If the problem continues contact the network administrator or vendor or try one of the advanced suggestions Advanced Suggestions e Try to access the ZyXEL Device using another service such as Telnet If you can access the ZyXEL Device check the remote management settings and firewall rules to find out why the ZyXEL Device does not respond to HTTP e If your computer is connected to the WAN port or is connected wirelessly use a computer that is connected to a ETHERNET port can see t
351. rovides superior security to TKIP Use AES if the other access points on your network support it Select TKI PAES MI X to allow both TKIP and AES types of security in your wireless network Radius Server IP Enter the IP address of the external authentication server in dotted Address decimal notation Server Port Enter the port number of the external authentication server The default port number is 1812 You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so with additional information Share Secret Enter a password up to 31 alphanumeric characters as the key to be shared between the external authentication server and the ZyXEL Device The key must be the same on the external authentication server and your ZyXEL Device The key is not sent over the network Apply Click this to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device Reset Click this to reload the previous configuration for this screen 7 4 The QoS Screen This screen allows you to enable or disable wireless quality of service Click Network gt Wireless LAN gt QoS The following screen displays Figure 40 Network gt Wireless LAN gt QoS QoS Setup 4 q Note v Enable WMM of SSID1 Enable WMM of SSID2 Enable WMM of SSID3 Enable WMM of SSID4 Enable WMM Automatic Power Save Delivery APSD 1 If your wireless mode is set to 802 11n including 802 11b g n
352. rt the ZyXEL Device s CA signed certificates e Use the Trusted CA screens see Section 15 3 on page 214 to save the certificates of trusted CAs to the ZyXEL Device You can also export the certificates to a computer What You Need to Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read this chapter Certification Authorities A Certification Authority CA issues certificates and guarantees the identity of each certificate owner There are commercial certification authorities like CyberTrust or VeriSign and government certification authorities Public and Private Keys When using public key cryptology for authentication each host has two keys One key is public and can be made openly available the other key is private and must be kept secure Public key encryption in general works as follows Tim wants to send a private message to J enny Tim generates a public private key pair What is encrypted with one key can only be decrypted using the other Tim keeps the private key and makes the public key openly available P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 15 Certificates 3 4 5 Tim uses his private key to encrypt the message and sends it to J enny Jenny receives the message and uses Tim s public key to decrypt it Additionally Jenny uses her own private key to encrypt a message and Tim uses Jenny s public key to decrypt the message The ZyXEL Device uses certificates based on public key cryptology to
353. s Neither the name of the University nor of the Laboratory may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FORA PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAI MED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE This Product includes Mini_httpd under the license by ACME Labs Freeware ACME Labs Freeware License All the free software available on the ACME Labs web site has a copyright notice like this one Copyright 2000 by Jef Poskanzer lt jef mail acme com gt All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer
354. s follow their instructions in selecting the IP addresses and the subnet mask If the ISP did not explicitly give you an IP network number then most likely you have a single user account and the ISP will assign you a dynamic IP address when the connection is established If this is the case it is recommended that you select a network number from 192 168 0 0 to 192 168 255 0 and you must enable the Network Address Translation NAT feature of the ZyXEL Device The Internet Assigned Number Authority IANA reserved this block of addresses specifically for private use please do not use any other number unless you are told otherwise Let s say you select 192 168 1 0 as the network number which covers 254 individual addresses from 192 168 1 1 to 192 168 1 254 zero and 255 are reserved In other words the first three numbers specify the network number while the last number identifies an individual computer on that network Once you have decided on the network number pick an IP address that is easy to remember for instance 192 168 1 1 for your ZyXEL Device but make sure that no other device on your network is using that IP address The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address Your ZyXEL Device will compute the subnet mask automatically based on the IP address that you entered You don t need to change the subnet mask computed by the ZyXEL Device unless you are instructed to do otherwise Private IP Addresses Ever
355. s stations that are currently associated with the ZyXEL Device You don t necessarily need to use all these screens to set up your wireless connection For example you may just want to set up a network name a wireless radio channel and some security in the General and Security screens 7 1 2 What You Need to Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read this chapter Wireless Basics Wireless is essentially radio communication In the same way that walkie talkie radios send and receive information over the airwaves wireless networking devices exchange information with one another A wireless networking device is just like a radio that lets your computer exchange information with radios attached to other computers Like walkie talkies most wireless networking devices operate at radio frequency bands that are open to the public and do not require a license to use However wireless networking is different from that of most traditional radio communications in that there a number of wireless networking standards available with different methods of data encryption Wireless Network Construction Wireless networks consist of wireless clients access points and bridges A wireless client is a radio connected to a user s computer e An access point is a radio with a wired connection to a network which can connect with numerous wireless clients and let them access the network A bridge is a radio that relays commu
356. s able to play media files music videos and pictures e ZyXEL DMA 2500 a digital media adapter You need to set up the DMA 2500 to work with your television TV Refer to the DMA 2500 Quick Start Guide for the correct hardware connections 52 P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorial Before you begin connect the USB storage device containing the media files you want to play to the USB port of your ZyXEL Device 3 7 1 Configuring the ZyXEL Device Note The Media Server feature is enabled by default To use your ZyXEL Device as a media server click USB Services gt Media Server Configuration Media Server M Enable Media Server qQ Note If your system has no volume control Media Server cannot be enabled when the system starts Apply Cancel Check Enable Media Server and click Apply This enables DLNA compliant media clients to play the video music and image files in your USB storage device 3 7 2 Using Windows Media Player This section shows you how to play the media files on the USB storage device connected to your ZyXEL Device using Windows Media Player USB Storage Device Computer with Windows Media Player ZyXEL Device P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide 53 Chapter 3 Tutorial Windows Vista 1 Open Windows Media Player and click Library gt Media Sharing as follows F Windows Media Player N Playing Library dd Music Library Songs C
357. s again Pre authentication enables fast roaming by allowing the wireless client already connecting to an AP to perform IEEE 802 1x authentication with another AP before connecting to it Wireless Client WPA Supplicants A wireless client supplicant is the software that runs on an operating system instructing the wireless client how to use WPA At the time of writing the most widely available supplicant is the WPA patch for Windows XP Funk Software s Odyssey client The Windows XP patch is a free download that adds WPA capability to Windows XP s built in Zero Configuration wireless client However you must run Windows XP to use it WPA 2 with RADIUS Application Example To set up WPA 2 you need the IP address of the RADIUS server its port number default is 1812 and the RADIUS shared secret A WPA 2 application example with an external RADIUS server looks as follows A is the RADIUS server DS is the distribution system The AP passes the wireless client s authentication request to the RADIUS server The RADIUS server then checks the user s identification against its database and grants or denies network access accordingly A 256 bit Pairwise Master Key PMK is derived from the authentication process by the RADIUS server and the client P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs 4 The RADIUS server distributes the PMK to the AP The AP then sets up a key hierarchy and management system using th
358. s and you never need to transmit private keys Certificate File Formats The certification authority certificate that you want to import has to be in one of these file formats P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 15 Certificates 15 1 3 Binary X 509 This is an ITU T recommendation that defines the formats for X 509 certificates PEM Base 64 encoded X 509 This Privacy Enhanced Mail format uses 64 ASCII characters to convert a binary X 509 certificate into a printable form Binary PKCS 7 This is a standard that defines the general syntax for data including digital signatures that may be encrypted The ZyXEL Device currently allows the importation of a PKS 7 file that contains a single certificate e PEM Base 64 encoded PKCS 7 This Privacy Enhanced Mail PEM format uses 64 ASCII characters to convert a binary PKCS 7 certificate into a printable form Note Be careful not to convert a binary file to text during the transfer process It is easy for this to occur since many programs use text files by default Verifying a Certificate Before you import a trusted CA or trusted remote host certificate into the ZyXEL Device you should verify that you have the actual certificate This is especially true of trusted CA certificates since the ZyXEL Device also trusts any valid certificate signed by any of the imported trusted CA certificates You can use a certificate s fingerprint to verify it A certificate s finger
359. s get more bandwidth than queues with smaller weights Rate Limit Specify the maximum transmission rate in Kbps allowed for traffic on this queue Back Click this to return to the previous screen without saving Apply Click this to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device Cancel Click this to begin configuring this screen afresh 17 4 The Class Setup Screen Use this screen to add edit or delete QoS classifiers A classifier groups traffic into data flows according to specific criteria such as the source address destination address source port number destination port number or incoming interface For example you can configure a classifier to select traffic from the same protocol port such as Telnet to form a flow P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide 227 Chapter 17 Quality of Service QoS You can give different priorities to traffic that the ZyXEL Device forwards out through the WAN interface Give high priority to voice and video to make them run more smoothly Similarly give low priority to many large file downloads so that they do not reduce the quality of other applications Click Advanced gt QoS gt Class Setup to open the following screen Figure 83 Advanced gt QoS gt Class Setup Class Setup me 1 V Example_1 Class Setup Click the button to add a new class maximum of 30 entries Order active Class Adal Classification Criteria Int
360. s to whom the Software is furnished to do so subject to the following conditions The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS ORIMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL THEAUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHERLIABILITY WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS INTHE SOFTWARE This Product includes libedit 20080712 2 11 Ilbupnp 1 4 2 Openssh 5 2p1 Ppp 2 4 4 and Pure ftpd 1 0 23 under the license by BSD BSD Copyright c dates as appropriate to package The Regents of the University of California All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Appendix F Open Software Announcement
361. sansirnir e e uasd lacyiidaietaladancenemiecens 238 Chapter 19 Sorte COTO h ern an rn ne vena se RUDE Noor WntEe gS nePee PO Here eer ee os Orne err emery nore eee 239 ER EEGI a ag lene a PAIA IAEA A stern aden eda aetna seed A ETE TEE 239 19 11 What You Gan Do inthis Chapter ss ciiaiecine se vizsseistavaderdenancagitiaanieamiateinderbraiceesieaes 239 191 2 What YOU Need to ROW Secscc tx cacccniicecesenctuekede sie becaedeneieacadentt a a 239 19 2 The Service Control Screen oo ccc cccc cee ececesecueeeeceseuaeeeeueeeseeaeaueceseuaeaueceeesaeaeeseeeeeeanes 240 Part Ill Maintenance Troubleshooting and Specifications 241 Chapter 20 ee ee pie se Re gee er ee ene oe eee epee none ey ene eee eer ne eee renner 243 EE KETE PA TE Me A rope ey ee MS ote PP a reir E EE T Rem eee mem SoS em 243 20011 What You Can Doin this CADIS lt s aa 243 20 1 2 What You Need t KNOW oicicicccc cites cedicccnier cians tneucnsmunssnsiauiixieadsuiunivancaswmntaadawntsinaa 243 20 2 TNS SYSHi Ganar a SOMOS daroie ne EA 244 Oo The Mme Seiling SEGEN a iririnii trsni mandi RE E A 245 Chapter 21 ME 0 e E A N E E E E E E E E E 247 P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Table of Contents Uh CII Se sServccespexrte angaiexinabieasahsaasdaattidoraeciaai heed A scene 247 Ad What Yoo Can Dominis ChApler siiras einna iian 247 kk What You Need To KNOW acces curcctanrtiad selsheta aaslah nach a E e ake 247 ala The vaw LOTSA Ie cea aE Aa S Mareapant abies
362. sasdssnnsiatisndvadeveyaneisiine raa r manaatiaes 140 TA TS QOS SCG acc visiancacs iadadnussiniadinteds adantuos tandarebet oladan metadata nieoladdaneeteaadanueatuaneniaaians 142 MN se pea ected ie acd Meee ha bee Ret antici oe ac ten aa se cod Seeaic act p Sear ceahetteayes caaae eee uascuaeeccateetE Anes 143 TO CMOCMINNG Che r steadycam E E E A A 145 Ta BOR MOM DEL Cashel saa E 147 7 8 Wireless LAN Technical Reference ccccccccccecceeeceecesaeaesaaeeaessassseseeeeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeneaea 148 Chapter 8 Network Address Translation NAT cccccccsssssssseseeeeescecescensnseeeeeeecoeoensnseneeeeeaesoeoensenenees 149 TOVONI deuaa eae badit setae ee cee 149 8 1 1 What Vou Can Doin this Chapler ciccctsscscaiccsknegictecatetaisvaseedyecttassetdacncmaessionerndeeds 149 e L2 Wha vou Need To RENOWN Si sciccavanadar casrumousinsadsusnnsidouradas AEE aaa RASE A 149 OPFONNT acess issccs sedans eQici oc Wad cick cnc cca ies eee ieee rca lores 150 6 2 1 Configuring the Port Forwarding Soroen css cciesstcastecidsanteet it iana Nae 151 82 2 The Pon Forwarding EGU SGA csccuwicsiun sais de ustivineauetrauemieetniidenilamanntsg 153 Bo NAT Technical REGEM E sirier ea ied E Rri 154 P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide 13 Table of Contents Soo NAL DENNNONS drra A aAA AAE 154 Coe MO NAT DOER dirasai ani a aa Eaa AS Ea AAA EEE 155 82 3 Pow NAT WORKS desiccant cerca a aO a O a 155 Chapter 9 e A E E 157 Sal I Lc eee Cee POSTE etme ORC
363. screen Table 13 Network gt WAN gt Internet Connection Adding a WAN Interface LABEL DESCRIPTION Select a layer 2 interface for this Select an ATM interface The ATM interface name starts with nas followed by a number for example nas1 This uses the DSL port as service the WAN port and ADSL technology for data transmission Select eth0O 14 if you want to use the Ethernet WAN port as the WAN port Back Click this button to return to the previous screen Next Click this button to continue 5 3 1 2 WAN Service Type Use this screen to select your WAN service type Click Next in the Network gt WAN gt Internet Connection screen There are two possible screens as follows This screen shows for the Ethernet WAN interface by default for DSL WAN interface this shows when you select EoA as the DSL Link Type field in the P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup Network gt WAN gt Layer 2 Interface DSL ATM Interface Configuration screen Figure 20 Network gt WAN gt Internet Connection Service Type EoA WAN Service Configuration Select WAN service type ppp over Ethernet PPPoE IP over Ethernet C Bridging Enter Service Description Back Next On the other hand the following screen shows if you select PPPoA or I PoA as the DSL Link Type field in the Network gt WAN gt Layer 2 Interface DSL ATM Interface Configuration screen You only ne
364. services connections on the ZyXEL Device Note To use NAT or IGMP proxy in the ZyXEL Device you need to configure a WAN connection with PPPoE or IPoE P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup Note You can configure up to eight 8 WAN services for each interface Figure 18 Network gt WAN gt Internet Connection Internet Connection Wide Area Network WAN Service Setup Choose Add Modify or Remove to configure a WAN service over a selected interface ethO 14 ipoe_1_1_1 interface Description Type vlan8o2ip VlanMuntdl IGMP NAT Modify N A N A IPoE Disabled Enabled amp i nasi ipoe_2_1_1 Eo N A N A Enabled Enabled amp i Add The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 12 Network gt WAN gt Internet Connection LABEL DESCRIPTION Interface This shows the name of the interface used by this connection A default name nas followed by a number for example nas1 indicates the DSL interface The name ethO 14 indicates the default Ethernet WAN interface the physical Ethernet WAN port The number after the dot represents the VLAN ID number assigned to traffic sent through this connection Description This is the service name of this connection 1 and 2 or 0 and 1 are the default VPI and VCI numbers The last number represents the index number of connections over the same PVC or the V
365. so have to enter a Preferred DNS server and an Alternate DNS server if that information was provided Click Advanced if you want to configure advanced settings for IP DNS and WINS 8 Click OK to close the Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties window 9 Click OK to close the Local Area Connection Properties window Verifying Settings 1 Click Start gt All Programs gt Accessories gt Command Prompt 2 Inthe Command Prompt window type ipconfig and then press ENTER P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 3 The IP settings are displayed as follows Figure 137 Windows 7 Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP IPv4 Properties a 10 x Mac OS X 10 3 and 10 4 The screens in this section are from Mac OS X 10 4 but can also apply to 10 3 1 Click Apple gt System Preferences Figure 138 Mac OS X 10 4 Apple Menu Finder File Edit Vie About This Mac Software Update Mac OS X Software System Preferences Dock Location Recent Items Force Quit Sleep Restart Shut Down P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide 31 7 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 2 Inthe System Preferences window click the Network icon Figure 139 Mac OS X 10 4 System Preferences ear System Preferences 4 gt Show All fal j Personal TEMA Q Appearance Dashboard amp Desktop amp Dock International Security Spotlight Expos Screen Saver Har
366. so includes country codes access codes area codes P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 9 Voice local numbers long distance numbers or international call prefixes For example the dial plan 2 9 xxxxxx does not allow a local number which begins with 1 or 0 Without a dial plan users have to manually enter the whole callee s number and wait for the specified dialing interval to time out or press a terminator key usually the pound key on the phone keypad before the ZyXEL Device makes the call The ZyXEL Device initializes a call when the dialed number matches any one of the rules in the dial plan Dial plan rules follow these conventions The collection of rules is in parentheses Rules are separated by the bar symbol x stands for a wildcard and can be any digit from 0 to 9 A subset of keys is in a square bracket Ranges are allowed For example 359 means a number matching this rule can be 3 5 or 9 26 8 means a number matching this rule can be 2 6 7 8 or The dot appended to a digit allows the digit to be ignored or repeated multiple times Any digit 0 9 after the dot will be ignored For example 01 means a number matching this rule can be O 01 0111 01111 and so on e dialed number translated number indicates the number after the colon replaces the number before the colon in an angle bracket For example 1212 xxxxxxx means the ZyXEL Device
367. ssage authentication code Protocol CCMP to offer stronger encryption than TKIP TKIP uses 128 bit keys that are dynamically generated and distributed by the authentication server AES Advanced Encryption Standard is a block cipher that uses a 256 bit mathematical algorithm called Rijndael They both include a per packet key mixing function a Message Integrity Check MIC named Michael an extended initialization vector IV with sequencing rules and a re keying mechanism WPA and WPA2 regularly change and rotate the encryption keys so that the same encryption key is never used twice The RADIUS server distributes a Pairwise Master Key PMK key to the AP that then sets up a key hierarchy and management system using the PMK to dynamically generate unique data encryption keys to encrypt every data packet that is wirelessly communicated between the AP and the wireless clients This all happens in the background automatically The Message Integrity Check MIC is designed to prevent an attacker from capturing data packets altering them and resending them The MIC provides a strong mathematical function in which the receiver and the transmitter each compute and then compare the MIC If they do not match it is assumed that the data has been tampered with and the packet is dropped By generating unique data encryption keys for every data packet and by creating an integrity checking mechanism MIC with TKIP and AES it is more difficult to
368. ssssnnnnnnnunrennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nna 241 E A E A E APA A E A A A cada A E E E E 243 LOGS cnuis i a a 247 E EE E E VNT E AT TE E ut E TA A E T TE IA aye eee TA 253 saps ca AEE snc as E E E E A E E E E E E T 263 D NOSE ii TE iia bie 265 POU TATE AAA T E E A T E E E E A E E E EAE 269 TOULES noo U runanda a aa 271 Producti aC UIE apiri ghee asa pee aoe ty asad papndaeas saan ald aatenede pis 279 APDGNGICSS SNC WAGON sisassisessiiaasassassasacsassasasnaaiesdasasnardnsdaseniesaasdsnediansasaaseinatonnaaneaaasaniacsansannn 291 P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide 9 Contents Overview P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Table of Contents Table of Contents ApoU TNS Usero OIE o ane ne se ere ee a oe ce ee eae er eee 3 Document GONnventio INS vecidsesiceccho arts cect ecto recitsesdedevdeceitasseieaeieiettcareds cis ordetednediacloudheakinrsensude 5 Salety WANING S coco eects chs aaan erai space ea u aSa aR A aaa S E 7 COMON Oe ge a So ee aar ee ea errr eee 9 Aes ey Cae 1b 0 2 NE eee ene er a eee Be ane eyo E veo a een ee tne reer Eee ere ee 11 Part l Introduction 0 ccccceesceeseseseneecnesceesaneeenseeneeeueseueseneseneeseeesenesenes 19 Chapter 1 INTFOGUCING the ZyXEL DEVICE scccesscscssxasoxcasorssassanscenassaarentiasaceenasiassesanndieancasaiaciuansaneneatansessancn 21 Me aN ces he at ANE A EAEN A ate PAE Nomar alee Sladen gon aon A ET Seen 21 1 2 Applications tor the ZyXEL DOVICO sinais aa 21 Tel menel ACCESS srra N R AA
369. st pop up windows from appearing 2 3 Type the IP address of your device the web page that you do not want to have blocked with the prefix http For example http 192 168 167 1 P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide 337 Appendix C Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions 4 Click Add to move the IP address to the list of Allowed sites Figure 167 Pop up Blocker Settings Pop up Blocker Settings Exceptions Pop ups are currently blocked You can allow pop ups from specific Web sites by adding the site to the list below Address of Web site to allow http 192 168 1 1 Allowed sites Notifications and Filter Level Play a sound when a pop up is blocked Show Information Bar when a pop up is blocked Filter Level Medium Block most automatic pop ups Pop up Blocker FAQ 5 Click Close to return to the Privacy screen 6 Click Apply to save this setting JavaScripts If pages of the web configurator do not display properly in Internet Explorer check that JavaScripts are allowed P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Appendix C Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions 1 In Internet Explorer click Tools Internet Options and then the Security tab Figure 168 Internet Options Security AE General Security Privacy Content Connections Programs Advanced Select a Web content zone to specify its security settings 4 wa O Internet Local intranet Trusted
370. standard To achieve this non free programs must be allowed to use the library A more frequent case is that a free library does the same job as widely used non free libraries In this case there is little to gain by limiting the free library to free software only so we use the Lesser General Public License In other cases permission to use a particular library in non free programs enables a greater number of people to use a large body of free software For example permission to use the GNU C Library in non free programs enables many more people to use the whole GNU operating system as well as its variant the GNU Linux operating system Although the Lesser General Public License is Less protective of the users freedom it does ensure that the user of a program that is linked with the Library has the freedom and the wherewithal to run that program using a modified version of the Library The precise terms and conditions for copying distribution and modification follow Pay close attention to the difference between a work based on the library and a work that uses the library The former contains code derived from the library whereas the latter must be combined with the library in order to run P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Appendix F Open Software Announcements GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION 0 This License Agreement applies to any software library or other pro
371. static it cannot be changed or dynamic you can change it to a new random number by clicking on a button in the configuration interface When you use the PIN method you must enter the enrollee s PIN into the registrar Then when WPS is activated on the enrollee it presents its PIN to the registrar If the PIN matches the registrar sends the network and security information to the enrollee allowing it to join the network The advantage of using the PIN method rather than the PBC method is that you can ensure that the connection is established between the devices you specify not just the first two devices to activate WPS in the area However you need to log into the configuration interfaces of both devices Take the following steps to set up WPS using the PIN method P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs Decide which device you want to be the registrar usually the AP and which you want to be the enrollee usually the client Look for the enrollee s WPS PIN it may be displayed on the device If you don t see it log into the enrollee s configuration interface and locate the PIN Select the PIN connection mode not PBC connection mode See the device s User s Guide for how to do this for the ZyXEL Device see Section 7 5 on page 143 Log into the configuration utility of the registrar Select the PIN connection mode not the PBC connection mode Locate the place where you can enter the enrolle
372. stead of user specific credentials Type a pre shared key from 8 to 63 case sensitive ASCII characters including spaces and symbols P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Table 27 Network gt Wireless LAN gt Security WPA PSK WPA2 PSK LABEL DESCRIPTION Encryption Type Select TKIP to enable Temporal Key Integrity Protocol TKIP security on your wireless network Use this if the other access points on your network support do not have an AES option Select AES to enable Advanced Encryption System AES security on your wireless network AES provides superior security to TKIP Use AES if the other access points on your network support it Select TKIPAES MIX to allow both TKIP and AES types of security in your wireless network Apply Click this to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device Reset Click this to reload the previous configuration for this screen 7 3 4 WPA WPA2 Authentication The WPA2 security mode is currently the most robust form of encryption for wireless networks It requires a RADIUS server to authenticate user credentials and is a full implementation the security protocol Use this security option for maximum protection of your network However it is the least backwards compatible with older devices The WPA security mode is a security subset of WPA2 It requires the presence of a RADIUS server on your network in order to vali
373. steeteectnanietaadeses Gactaneernaeeecteg 187 10 2 2 Share Configuration Edif SOGE oisieisiseinnrin ninii aaia i 189 10 3 The Account Managemen Seres ssicciseoniiicainieruaiiei eidean a Eii 190 10 3 1 Account Management Add or Edit Screen cecccecceteeeeneeeeeeeeeeaeeeseeeeeeeaaeeenenees 191 Chapter 11 Medid eat a a aE a 193 TEEVI N a a N a 193 o We aL eos DO na 193 11 1 2 What You Need fo Know inthis Chapter ic ciscstisiinsmascessnereuwaiieesianadecomannaoanens 193 Te The Meda Saver OGOS ndniiiudmiriinii e E AA ea enti 194 Chapter 12 Print SETVE neea E Ea aAA aAa 195 P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Table of Contents Te T OVEN es she cre aaa Maneexisk bia A 195 1211 What YOO Can Do TS Chapter irarria naina aan 195 Teta What You Need to KOON ccsa E Ea 195 ToL Baoe TUE O a Serravtes pabiveadahwaRniaa oanaeeis oder 196 122 mhe PINO gs Wee ao iy inaen ia 197 T2 GGA RTGS INGO aen aea E EE EES 197 Chapter 13 MAG NOD cciecasctantasennraieacaiianaxian silat aaa enna eieiaotiaeriniensienieM aie 201 To ONENE eg cette na a tle secu Gansta a Ng eae re ea ene Se 201 18 1 1 What You Gah Do in this Chaple sscccsnccccricsecotuetaiscanteie secsasseercacnaniidessiantedeanneatsees 201 131 2 What You Need t KNOW stsssssacsasssisieialernecaniy artnet antennas Gane EEEa 201 T32 MAG Filler Soroen sieniin e a dnc eked ee 202 Chapter 14 Firewall ssr e a ia a 203 E OVANIE pokapa ea a a aeaeees 203 14 1 1 What You Can Do in the Firewall
374. t Assigned Number Authority IANA reserved this block of addresses specifically for private use please do not use any other number unless you are told otherwise You must also enable Network Address Translation NAT on the ZyXEL Device Once you have decided on the network number pick an IP address for your ZyXEL Device that is easy to remember for instance 192 168 1 1 but make sure that no other device on your network is using that IP address The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address Your ZyXEL Device will compute the subnet mask automatically based on the IP address that you entered You don t need to change the subnet mask computed by the ZyXEL Device unless you are instructed to do otherwise P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Appendix A IP Addresses and Subnetting Private IP Addresses Every machine on the Internet must have a unique address If your networks are isolated from the Internet running only between two branch offices for example you can assign any IP addresses to the hosts without problems However the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority IANA has reserved the following three blocks of IP addresses specifically for private networks e 10 0 0 0 10 255 255 255 e 172 16 0 0 172 31 255 255 e 192 168 0 0 192 168 255 255 You can obtain your IP address from the IANA from an ISP or it can be assigned from a private network If you belong to a small organization and your Intern
375. t also provides a fixed amount of bandwidth a PCR is specified but is only available when data is being sent An example of an VBR RT connection would be video conferencing Video conferencing requires real time data transfers and the bandwidth requirement varies in proportion to the video image s changing dynamics The VBR nRT non real time Variable Bit Rate type is used with bursty connections that do not require closely controlled delay and delay variation It is commonly used for bursty traffic typical on LANs PCR and MBS define the burst levels SCR defines the minimum level An example of an VBR nRT connection would be non time sensitive data file transfers P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup Unspecified Bit Rate UBR The Unspecified Bit Rate UBR ATM traffic class is for bursty data transfers However UBR doesn t guarantee any bandwidth and only delivers traffic when the network has spare bandwidth An example application is background file transfer IP Address Assignment A static IP is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you A dynamic IP is not fixed the ISP assigns you a different one each time The Single User Account feature can be enabled or disabled if you have either a dynamic or static IP However the encapsulation method assigned influences your choices for IP address and default gateway Introduction to VLANs A Virtual Local Area Network VLAN allows a physical network to be partitioned into
376. t is on the WAN side The following table summarizes this information Table 36 NAT Definitions ITEM DESCRIPTION Inside This refers to the host on the LAN Outside This refers to the host on the WAN Local This refers to the packet address source or destination as the packet travels on the LAN Global This refers to the packet address source or destination as the packet travels on the WAN NAT never changes the IP address either local or global of an outside host 8 3 2 What NAT Does In the simplest form NAT changes the source IP address in a packet received from a subscriber the inside local address to another the inside global address before forwarding the packet to the WAN side When the response comes back NAT translates the destination address the inside global address back to the inside local address before forwarding it to the original inside host Note that the IP address either local or global of an outside host is never changed The global IP addresses for the inside hosts can be either static or dynamically assigned by the ISP In addition you can designate servers for example a web server and a telnet server on your local network and make them accessible to the outside world If you do not define any servers NAT offers the additional benefit of firewall protection With no servers defined your ZyXEL Device filters out all incoming inquiries thus preventing intruders from probi
377. t to associate this network without authentication Note If you enable the WPS function only No Security WPA PSK and WPA2 PSK are available in this option Apply Click this to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device Reset Click this to reload the previous configuration for this screen 7 3 1 No Security Select No Security to allow wireless devices to communicate with the access points without any data encryption Note If you do not enable any wireless security on your ZyXEL Device your network is accessible to any wireless networking device that is within range Figure 36 Network gt Wireless LAN gt Security No Security Security Setup SSID SID1 SSID_Example3 v Security Mode No Security q Note Please select AES as Encryption Mode if you want to access N mode WLAN Select TKIP as Encryption Mode might cause you access b g mode WLAN 7 3 2 Static WEP Shared WEP Encryption WEP encryption scrambles the data transmitted between the wireless stations and the access points AP to keep network communications private Both the wireless stations and the access points must use the same WEP key There are two types of WEP authentication namely Open System Static WEP and Shared Key Shared WEP Open system is implemented for ease of use and when security is not an issue The wireless station and the AP or peer computer do not share a secret key Thus P 2612HNU Fx User s
378. t you want to view Refresh Click this to renew the log screen Clear Log Click this to delete all the logs This field is a sequential value and is not associated with a specific entry Time This field displays the time the log was recorded Facility The log facility allows you to send logs to different files in the syslog server Refer to the documentation of your syslog program for more details Level This field displays the severity level of the logs that the device is to send to this syslog server Message This field states the reason for the log 21 3 The Log Settings Screen Use the Log Settings screen to configure where the ZyXEL Device sends logs and which logs and or immediate alerts the ZyXEL Device records To change your ZyXEL Device s log settings click Maintenance gt Logs gt Log Settings The screen appears as shown Figure 91 Maintenance gt Logs gt Log Settings Active Log and Log Level Log Category VoIP M VolP Call Statistics M VolP Phone Event M VolP Misc M volP SIP Call Signaling M VoIP SIP Registrations Cancel Syslog Logging I Active Syslog Server 0 0 0 0 eye oT or IP UDP Port 514 Server Port Log Level ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 21 Logs The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 74 Maintenance gt Logs gt Log Settings LABEL DESCRIPTION Syslog The ZyXEL Device sends a log to a
379. tances Your SIP account provider removes these difficulties by taking care of the call routing and setup figuring out how to get your call to the right place in a way that you and the other person can talk to one another How to Find Out More See Chapter 3 on page 33 for a tutorial showing how to set up these screens in an example scenario See Section 9 7 on page 172 for advanced technical information on SIP P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 9 Voice 9 1 3 Before You Begin e Before you can use these screens you need to have a VoIP account already set up If you don t have one yet you can sign up with a VoIP service provider over the Internet e You should have the information your VoIP service provider gave you ready before you start to configure the ZyXEL Device 9 2 The SIP Service Provider Screen Use this screen to configure the SIP server information QoS for VoIP calls the numbers for certain phone functions and dialing plan Click VoIP gt SIP gt SIP Service Provider to open the SIP Service Provider screen P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 9 Voice Note Click Advanced to see all the fields in the screen You don t necessarily need to use all these fields to set up your account Click Basic to see and configure only the fields needed for this feature Figure 48 VoIP gt SIP gt SIP Service Provider Advanced SIP Semice Provider General SIP Local Port 5060 1025 65535 SIP Ser
380. te Click Add Static Route Static Route Rules Add a aa a aa a a Configure the Static Route Setup screen using the following settings e Select Active e Specify a descriptive name for this routing rule e Type 192 168 10 0 and subnet mask 255 255 255 0 for the destination N2 e Type 192 168 1 253 R s N1 address in the Gateway IP Address field IP Static Route IP Static Route Setup M active Route Name fm Destination IP Address fis2466100 IP Subnet Mask 55255 2550 Gateway IP Address fis21681 253 q Note The IP address and subnet mask fields must be matched e g host 255 255 255 255 or subnet 255 255 255 0 Back Apply Reset Click Apply The Advanced gt Static Route screen should display the route you just added Static Route Rules Now B should be able to receive traffic from A You may need to additionally configure B s firewall settings to allow specific traffic to pass through P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorial 3 11 Configuring QoS Queue and Class Setup This section contains tutorials on how you can configure the QoS screen Note Voice traffic will not be affected by the user defined QoS settings on the ZyXEL Device It always gets the highest priority Let s say you are a team leader of a small sales branch office You want to prioritize e mail traffic because your task includes sending urgent updates to clients at least twice every
381. ternet wirelessly make sure the wireless settings in the wireless client are the same as the settings in the AP Disconnect all the cables from your device and follow the directions in the Quick Start Guide again If the problem continues contact your ISP cannot access the Internet anymore had access to the Internet with the ZyXEL Device but my Internet connection is not available anymore 274 Check the hardware connections and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected See the Quick Start Guide and Section 1 5 on page 24 Turn the ZyXEL Device off and on If the problem continues contact your ISP P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 25 Troubleshooting The Internet connection is slow or intermittent 1 There might be a lot of traffic on the network Look at the LEDs and check Section 1 5 on page 24 If the ZyXEL Device is sending or receiving a lot of information try closing some programs that use the Internet especially peer to peer applications 2 Check the signal strength If the signal strength is low try moving the ZyXEL Device closer to the AP if possible and look around to see if there are any devices that might be interfering with the wireless network for example microwaves other wireless networks and so on 3 Turn the ZyXEL Device off and on 4 Ifthe problem continues contact the network administrator or vendor or try one of the advanced suggestions Advanced Suggest
382. the Macintosh HD icon to open the Macintosh HD window WECO in LD 3 Double click the Applications folder SHOR E Macintosh HD a E d mm E AY A Back Forward View Computer Home Favorites Applications 12 items 19 31 GB available 5 Applications 4 p3 Applications Mac OS 9 Users 8 Ls Documents Library System P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorial Double click the Utilities folder SKS A Applications R t E Z fan E A A Back Forward View Computer Home Favorites Applications 39 items 19 31 CB available Address Book Calculator D py Chess Clock DVD Player Double click the Print Center icon e098 J Utilities gt t 8 a as Y Back Forward View Computer Home Favorites Applications 30 items 19 31 GB available ii os Keychain Access Netinfo Manager Network Utility ODBC Administrator Process Viewer Click the Add icon at the top of the screen Printer List Stylus C43 Stopped Set up your printer in the Printer List configuration screen Select IP Printing from the drop down list box 8 Inthe Printer s Address field type the IP address of your ZyXEL Device 9 Deselect the Use default queue on server check box 10 Type LP1 a parallel port in the Queue Name field P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorial 72 not listed sele
383. the Sections above b Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact that part of it is a work based on the Library and explaining where to find the accompanying uncombined form of the same work 8 You may not copy modify sublicense link with or distribute the Library except as expressly provided under this License Any attempt otherwise to copy modify sublicense link with or distribute the Library is void and will automatically terminate your rights under this License However parties who have received copies or rights from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance 9 You are not required to accept this License since you have not signed it However nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Library or its derivative works These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License Therefore by modifying or distributing the Library or any work based on the Library you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so and all its terms and conditions for copying distributing or modifying the Library or works based on it 10 Each time you redistribute the Library or any work based on the Library the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy distribute link with or modify the Library subject to these terms and conditions P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Appendix F Open So
384. the external filename refers to the filename not on the ZyXEL Device that is on your computer local network and so the name but not the extension may vary After uploading new firmware see the Status screen to confirm that you have uploaded the correct firmware version Table 79 Filename Conventions INTERNAL FILE TYPE NAME EXTERNAL NAME DESCRIPTIO N Configuration Rom 0 This is the configuration filename on the rom File ZyXEL Device Uploading the rom 0 file replaces the entire ROM file system including your ZyXEL Device configurations system related data including the default password the error log and the trace log Firmware Ras This is the generic name for the firmware bin on the ZyXEL Device FTP Restrictions FTP will not work when 1 You are not logged on to the ZyXEL Device as an administrator username admin 2 The firewall is active turn the firewall off or create a firewall rule to allow access from the WAN 3 You have disabled the FTP service in the Advanced gt Service Control screen P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 22 Tools 22 1 3 Before You Begin e Ensure you have either created a firewall rule to allow access from the WAN or turned the firewall off otherwise the FTP will not function e Make sure the FTP service has not been disabled in the Advanced gt Service Control screen 22 2 Firmware Upgrade Screen Click Maintenance gt To
385. the hook for a short period of time a few hundred milliseconds before releasing it On newer telephones there should be a flash key button that generates the signal electronically If the flash key is not available you can tap press and immediately release the hook by hand to achieve the same effect However using the flash key is preferred since the timing is much more precise With manual tapping if the duration is too long it may be interpreted as hanging up by the ZyXEL Device You can invoke all the supplementary services by using the flash key Europe Type Supplementary Phone Services This section describes how to use supplementary phone services with the Europe Type Call Service Mode Commands for supplementary services are listed in the table below After pressing the flash key if you do not issue the sub command before the default sub command timeout 2 seconds expires or issue an invalid sub command the current operation will be aborted Table 43 European Flash Key Commands SUB COMMAND COMMAND DESCRIPTION Flash Put a current call on hold to place a second call Switch back to the call if there is no second call Flash 0 Drop the call presently on hold or reject an incoming call which is waiting for answer Flash 1 Disconnect the current phone connection and answer the incoming call or resume with caller presently on hold Flash 2 1 Switch back and forth between two calls 2 Put a cur
386. the program proprietary To prevent this we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone s free use or not licensed at all The precise terms and conditions for copying distribution and modification follow TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION 0 This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed under the terms of this General Public License The Program below refers to any such program or work and a work based on the Program means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law that is to say a work containing the Program or a portion of it either verbatim or with modifications and or translated into another language Hereinafter translation is included without limitation in the term modification Each licensee is addressed as you Activities other than P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide 379 Appendix F Open Software Announcements copying distribution and modification are not covered by this License they are outside its scope The act of running the Program is not restricted and the output from the Program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Program independent of having been made by running the Program Whether that is true depends on what the Program does 1 You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program s source code as you receive it
387. tically issuing a randomly generated WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK pre shared key from the registrar device to the enrollee devices Whether the network uses WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK depends on the device You can check the configuration interface of the registrar device to discover the key the network is using if the device supports this feature Then you can enter the key into the non WPS device and join the network as normal the non WPS device must also support WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs e When you use the PBC method there is a short period from the moment you press the button on one device to the moment you press the button on the other device when any WPS enabled device could join the network This is because the registrar has no way of identifying the correct enrollee and cannot differentiate between your enrollee and a rogue device This is a possible way for a hacker to gain access to a network You can easily check to see if this has happened WPS works between only two devices simultaneously so if another device has enrolled your device will be unable to enroll and will not have access to the network If this happens open the access point s configuration interface and look at the list of associated clients usually displayed by MAC address It does not matter if the access point is the WPS registrar the enrollee or was not involved in the WPS handshake a rogue device must sti
388. ting security information to Client 2 Figure 183 WPS Example Network Step 2 REGISTRAR EXISTING CONNECTION CLIENT 1 o AP1 o ENROLLEE an we oF eco CLIENT 2 P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs In step 3 you add another access point AP2 to your network AP2 is out of range of AP1 so you cannot use AP1 for the WPS handshake with the new access point However you know that Client 2 supports the registrar function so you use it to perform the WPS handshake instead Figure 184 WPS Example Network Step 3 EXISTING CONNECTION CLIENT 1 AP1 REGISTRAR a p Saa CLIENT 2 lt CUp ENROLLEE a N 5 AP1 Limitations of WPS WPS has some limitations of which you should be aware e WPS works in Infrastructure networks only where an AP and a wireless client communicate It does not work in Ad Hoc networks where there is no AP e When you use WPS it works between two devices only You cannot enroll multiple devices simultaneously you must enroll one after the other For instance if you have two enrollees and one registrar you must set up the first enrollee by pressing the WPS button on the registrar and the first enrollee for example then check that it successfully enrolled then set up the second device in the same way e WPS works only with other WPS enabled devices However you can still add non WPS devices to a network you already set up using WPS WPS works by automa
389. tion system which is implemented by public license practices Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system it is up to the author donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License 12 If the distribution and or use of the Library is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces the original copyright holder who places the Library under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded In such case this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License 13 The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and or new versions of the Lesser General Public License from time to time Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns Each version is given a distinguishing version number If the Library specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and any later version you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later vers
390. tive Qos WAN Managed Upstream Bandwidth 10000 kbps You can assign the upstream bandwidth manually e field is empty the CPE set the value automatically Apply Cancel Go to Advanced gt QoS gt Queue Setup Click Add to create a new queue In the screen that opens check Active and enter or select the following values e Name E mail Priority 7 High Weight 15 e Rate Limit 5 000 kbps Queue Configuration M active Name E mail Priority Tion z Weight Msz Rate Limit foo i kbps Back Apply Cancel P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorial 3 Goto Advanced gt QoS gt Class Setup Click Add to create a new class Check Active and follow the settings as shown in the screen below Class Configuration M active Class Name E mail Classification Order fi z Forward To Interface Unchange z DSCP Mark Unchange 7 0 63 802 1P Mark Unchange ba VLAN ID Unchange v 14095 To Queue E mail z Criteria Configuration Basic M From Interface Lan ed M Ether Type iP ox0800 z Source M MAC Address PAFF AAFF AAFF MAC Mask I Exclude V IP Address fis2 168 1 23 IP Subnet Mask I exclude m Range 165535 T exclude Destination I MAC Address MAC Mask F Exclude I IP Address IP Subnet Mask T exclude r a Port f _ xess35 I Exclude Others m 8021P fo z I Exclude I VLAN ID 1 4095 I Exclude IP Protocol User defined v 25 l Exc
391. to Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read this chapter Encapsulation Method Encapsulation is used to include data from an upper layer protocol into a lower layer protocol To set up a WAN connection to the Internet you need to use the same encapsulation method used by your ISP Internet Service Provider If your ISP offers a dial up Internet connection using PPPoE PPP over Ethernet or PPPoA they should also provide a username and password and service name for user authentication WAN IP Address The WAN IP address is an IP address for the ZyXEL Device which makes it accessible from an outside network It is used by the ZyXEL Device to communicate with other devices in other networks It can be static fixed or P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup dynamically assigned by the ISP each time the ZyXEL Device tries to access the Internet If your ISP assigns you a static WAN IP address they should also assign you the subnet mask and DNS server IP address es ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode ATM is a LAN and WAN networking technology that provides high speed data transfer ATM uses fixed size packets of information called cells With ATM a high QoS Quality of Service can be guaranteed ATM uses a connection oriented model and establishes a virtual circuit VC between two endpoints before the actual data exchange begins Finding Out More e See Section 5 4 on page 113 for advanced te
392. to configure Security Mode Choose Static WEP or Shared WEP from the drop down list box e Select Static WEP to have the ZyXEL Device allow association with wireless clients that use Open System mode Data transfer is encrypted as long as the wireless client has the correct WEP key for encryption The ZyXEL Device authenticates wireless clients using Shared Key mode that have the correct WEP key e Select Shared WEP to have the ZyXEL Device authenticate only those Deis clients that use Shared Key mode and have the correct WEP ey WEP Keys Enter a WEP key that will be used to encrypt data Both the ZyXEL Device and the wireless stations must use the same WEP key for data transmission If you want to manually set the WEP key enter any 5 or 13 characters ASCII string or 10 or 26 hexadecimal characters 0 9 A F for a 64 bit or 128 bit WEP key respectively Apply Click this to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device Reset Click this to reload the previous configuration for this screen P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN 7 3 3 WPA PSK WPA2 PSK Authentication The WPA PSK security mode provides both improved data encryption and user authentication over WEP Using a Pre Shared Key PSK both the ZyXEL Device and the connecting client share a common password in order to validate the connection This type of encryption while robust is not as strong as WPA WPA2 or
393. to save your settings Cancel Click this button to return all fields in this screen to their previous values 188 P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 10 File Sharing 10 2 2 Share Configuration Edit Screen Use this screen to edit an existing share on the ZyXEL Device Click Edit in the USB Services gt File Sharing gt Share Configuration screen Figure 61 USB Services gt File Sharing gt Share Configuration Edit Share Configuration Modify Share Share Name ZyXEL Share Path ZyXEL Description Se Celebrating Two Decades Access Level Security Share Access ZyXEL Available Users Allow Users Apply Cancel Each field is described in the following table Table 47 USB Services gt File Sharing gt Share Configuration Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION Share Name Manually enter the share name on the ZyXEL Device Share Path This field displays the directory folder used for the share on your USB storage device It is non configurable when you edit an existing share Description Enter a short description or some information about the share Access Level The share can either be available to everyone in the network or only to users you add in the Account Management screen Select Public to make the share available to everyone Select Security to make the share available only to users you allow Share Access This shows when you select Security as the Access Level for the share
394. tton Or input Enter the PIN of the device that you are setting up a WPS connection station s PIN with and click Start to authenticate and add the wireless device to number your wireless network You can find the PIN either on the outside of the device or by checking the device s settings Note You must also activate WPS on that device within two minutes to have it present its PIN to the ZyXEL Device Apply Click this to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device Refresh Click this to reload the previous configuration for this screen 7 6 Scheduling Screen Click Network gt Wireless LAN gt Scheduling to open the Wireless LAN Scheduling screen Use this screen to configure when the ZyXEL Device enables or disables the wireless LAN Figure 42 Network gt Wireless LAN gt Scheduling 000 O Q a O00 e on on On Off Off Off off off Off Off Off Wireless LAN Scheduling Enable Wireless LAN Scheduling G on Everyday 00 hour 00 M min 00 4 hour 00 x min Mon 00 iM hour 00 M min 00 M hour 00 mj min Tue 00 iM hour 00 M min 00 xj hour 00 j min Wed 00 hour 00 min 00 m hour 00 min Thu 00 iMi hour 00 min 00 hour 00 y min Fri 00 hour 00 min 00 hour
395. twork users If you want to share this printer you must provide a share name You can use the suggested name or type a new one The share name will be visible to other network O Share name 19 Select Yes and then click the Next button if you want to print a test page A pop up screen displays to ask if the test page printed correctly Otherwise select No and then click Next to continue Add Printer Wizard Print Test Page To confirm that the printer is installed properly you can print a test page Do you want to print a test page P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorial 20 The following screen shows your current printer settings Select Finish to complete adding a new printer Add Printer Wizard Completing the Add Printer Wizard You have successfully completed the Add Printer Wizard You specified the following printer settings Name HP DeskJet 1220C Share name lt Not Shared gt Pott IP_192 168 1 1 Model HP DeskJet 1220C Default Test page To close this wizard click Finish Add a New Printer Using Macintosh OS X Complete the following steps to set up a print server driver on your Macintosh computer 1 Click the Print Center icon located in the Macintosh Dock a place holding a series of icons shortcuts at the bottom of the desktop Proceed to step 6 to continue If the Print Center icon is not in the Macintosh Dock proceed to the next step 2 On your desktop double click
396. ubnet 4 IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER LAST OCTET BIT VALUE IP Address 192 168 1 192 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 11000000 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 Subnet Address 192 168 1 192 Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 193 Broadcast Address 192 168 1 255 Highest Host ID 192 168 1 254 P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Appendix A IP Addresses and Subnetting Example Eight Subnets Similarly use a 27 bit mask to create eight subnets 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 and 111 The following table shows IP address last octet values for each subnet Table 98 Eight Subnets suset SUBNET rims aponess 4ASTecq REGABSAST 1 0 1 30 31 2 32 33 62 63 3 64 65 94 95 4 96 97 126 127 5 128 129 158 159 6 160 161 190 191 7 192 193 222 223 8 224 225 254 255 Subnet Planning The following table is a summary for subnet planning on a network with a 24 bit network number Table 99 24 bit Network Number Subnet Planning NOST ORS OED SUBNET MASK NO SUBNETS NO HOSTS PER 1 255 255 255 128 25 126 2 255 255 255 192 26 62 3 255 255 255 224 27 30 4 255 255 255 240 28 16 14 5 255 255 255 248 29 32 6 6 255 255 255 252 30 64 2 7 255 255 255 254 31 128 1 The following table is a summary for subnet planning on a network with a 16 bit network number
397. ued LABEL DESCRIPTION Cert Click this button and then Save in the File Download screen The Save As screen opens browse to the location that you want to use and click Save Key Type This field applies to the SSH SCP SFTP certificate This shows the file format of the current certificate Replace Click this to replace the certificate s and save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device Cancel Click this to clear your settings 15 3 Trusted CAs Use this screen to view a summary list of certificates of the certification authorities that you have set the ZyXEL Device to accept as trusted The ZyXEL Device accepts any valid certificate signed by a certification authority on this list as being trustworthy thus you do not need to import any certificate that is signed by one of these certification authorities Click Security gt Certificates gt Trusted CAs to open the Trusted CAs screen Figure 74 Security gt Certificates gt Trusted CAs hy e Certificates Trusted CAs PKI Storage Space in Use 20 mo 100 Fea rte tic 2009 04 09 2010 04 09 g ale Trusted CA Setting CN Your_N4ME ST Your_STATE C CO emailAddress YOUR_EMAIL O YOUR_ORG_NAME CN Your_NAME ST Your_STATE C CO emailAddress YOUR_EMAIL O YOUR_ORG_NAME Import Refresh 1 cacert pem 03 53 01 03 53 01 GMT GMT The following table describes the labels
398. uide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 2 Inthe Command Prompt window type ipconfig and then press ENTER You can also go to Start gt Control Panel gt Network Connections right click a network connection click Status and then click the Support tab to view your IP address and connection information Windows Vista This section shows screens from Windows Vista Professional 1 Click Start gt Control Panel Figure 124 Windows Vista Start Menu Dr eye 7 0 Professional Connect To fal Media Player Classic gt Default Programs All Programs Help and Support omman S _ SelB as 2 Inthe Control Panel click the Network and Internet icon Figure 125 Windows Vista Control Panel GS Control Panel P File Edit View Tools Help e Control Panel Home F System and Maintenance User Accounts ia iia Get started with Windows Change account type Back up your computer Appearance and Personalization Change desktop background Security Check for updates ay Allow a program through Windows ms Firewall a Change the color scheme Adjust screen resolution etwork and Internet Connect to the Internet Clock Language and Region View network status and tasks lk Change keyboards or other input Set up file sharing methods Change display language P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up You
399. uide 323 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address Verifying Settings Check your TCP IP properties by clicking Applications gt Utilities gt Network Utilities and then selecting the appropriate Network interface from the Info tab Figure 148 Mac OS X 10 5 Network Utility BOO Network utility Netstat AppleTalk Ping Lookup Traceroute Whois Finger PortScan Please aterface for information Network Interface en1 Sn ee ae L Transfer Statistics Hardware Address 00 30 65 25 6a b3 Sent Packets 1230 IP Address es 10 0 2 2 Send Errors 0 Link Speed 11 Mbit s Recv Packets 1197 Link Status Active Recv Errors 0 Vendor Apple Collisions 0 Model Wireless Network Adapter 802 11 Linux Ubuntu 8 GNOME This section shows you how to configure your computer s TCP IP settings in the GNU Object Model Environment GNOME using the Ubuntu 8 Linux distribution The procedure screens and file locations may vary depending on your specific distribution release version and individual configuration The following screens use the default Ubuntu 8 installation Note Make sure you are logged in as the root administrator Follow the steps below to configure your computer IP address in GNOME P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 1 Click System gt Administration gt Network 9 aE m E Hardware Drivers elp and Support De Hardware Testin
400. umstances It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system which is implemented by public license practices Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system it is up to the author donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License 8 If the distribution and or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces the original copyright holder who places the Program under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded In such case this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License 9 The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and or new versions of the General Public License from time to time Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns Each version is
401. up file sharing using the ZyXEL Device To access this screen click USB Services gt File Sharing Figure 58 USB Services gt File Sharing gt Share Configuration Share Configuration File Sharing M Enable File Sharing Services SMB Server Configuration HostName P 2612HNU F3 Workgroup Name Workgroup Share Directory List Add Active Status ShareName SharePath Share Description Moaity Vv iS ZyXEL ZyXEL ZyXEL Celebrating Two Decades g mi Apply Cancel P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 10 File Sharing Each field is described in the following table Table 44 USB Services gt File Sharing gt Share Configuration Services SMB LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable File Select this to enable file sharing through the ZyXEL Device Sharing Server Configuration Host Name This shows the read only name that identifies the ZyXEL Device in your network You can change this in the Maintenance gt System screen Workgroup You can add the ZyXEL Device to an existing or a new workgroup on Name your network Enter the name of the workgroup which your ZyXEL Device automatically joins You can set the ZyXEL Device s workgroup name to be exactly the same as the workgroup name to which your computer belongs Share Directory List These fields identify the shares configured on the ZyXEL Device Note You must connect a USB storage device to the ZyXEL Device in order to see th
402. username and password or a key phrase can access the network Second they encrypt This means that the information sent over the air is encoded Only people with the code key can understand the information and only people who have been authenticated are given the code key These security standards vary in effectiveness Some can be broken such as the old Wired Equivalent Protocol WEP Using WEP is better than using no security at all but it will not keep a determined attacker out Other security standards are secure in themselves but can be broken if a user does not use them properly For example the WPA PSK security standard is perfectly secure if you use a long key which is difficult for an attacker s software to guess for example a twenty letter long string of apparently random numbers and letters but it is not very secure if you use a Short key which is very easy to guess for example a three letter word from the dictionary Because of the damage that can be done by a malicious attacker it s not just people who have sensitive information on their network who should use security Everybody who uses any wireless network should ensure that effective security is in place A good way to come up with effective security keys passwords and so on is to use obscure information that you personally will easily remember and to enter it ina way that appears random and does not include real words For example if your mother owns
403. ute and so on DiffServ DiffServ is a class of service CoS model that marks packets so that they receive specific per hop treatment at DiffServ compliant network devices along the route based on the application types and traffic flow Packets are marked with DiffServ Code Points DSCP indicating the level of service desired This allows the intermediary DiffServ compliant network devices to handle the packets differently depending on the code points without the need to negotiate paths or remember state information for every flow In addition applications do not have to request a particular service or give advanced notice of where the traffic is going 1 The ZyXEL Device does not support pulse dialing at the time of writing 2 The ZyXEL Device does not support DiffServ at the time of writing 178 P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 9 Voice DSCP and Per Hop Behavior DiffServ defines a new DS Differentiated Services field to replace the Type of Service TOS field in the IP header The DS field contains a 2 bit unused field and a 6 bit DSCP field which can define up to 64 service levels The following figure illustrates the DS field DSCP is backward compatible with the three precedence bits in the ToS octet so that non DiffServ compliant ToS enabled network device will not conflict with the DSCP mapping Figure 56 DiffServ Differentiated Service Field DSCP Unused 6 bit 2 bit The DSCP value
404. uthority see CA certificates 209 CA 209 replacing 213 storage space 213 thumbprint algorithms 212 thumbprints 212 trusted CAs 214 215 verifying fingerprints 211 Certification Authority see CA certifications 397 notices 397 viewing 398 CFI 117 P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Index channel 347 interference 347 channel ID 135 channel scan 135 CIFS Common Internet File System 185 Class of Service 178 Class of Service see CoS client server protocol 174 codecs 285 comfort noise generation 165 284 command interface 24 Common Internet File System CIFS 185 configuration 126 configuration file 253 copyright 397 CoS 178 235 country code 283 CTS Clear to Send 348 D default 259 default LAN IP address 27 Denial of Service see DoS Denials of Service see DoS device management command interface 24 Telnet 24 DHCP 87 122 126 237 static 125 DHCP relay 280 DHCP server 280 diagnostic 265 differentiated services 179 Differentiated Services see DiffServ DiffServ Differentiated Services 178 code points 178 marking rule 179 235 disclaimer 397 DLNA 193 DnD 283 DNS 122 DNS server address assignment 118 Do not Disturb see DnD domain name system see DNS Domain Name System See DNS DoS 204 DS Differentiated Services 235 DS field 179 235 DSCP 178 235 DSL line reinitialize 267 DSL mode 86 DTMF 178 detection and generation 285 Dual Tone MultiFrequency see DT
405. ven if they don t know your IP address First of all you need to have registered a dynamic DNS account with www dyndns org This is for people with a dynamic IP from their ISP or DHCP server that would still like to have a domain name The Dynamic DNS service provider will give you a password or key What You Can Do in the DDNS Screen Use the Dynamic DNS screen Section 18 2 on page 238 to enable DDNS and configure the DDNS settings on the ZyXEL Device What You Need To Know About DDNS DYNDNS Wildcard Enabling the wildcard feature for your host causes yourhost dyndns org to be aliased to the same IP address as yourhost dyndns org This feature is useful if you want to be able to use for example www yourhost dyndns org and still reach your hostname If you have a private WAN IP address then you cannot use Dynamic DNS P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide 237 Chapter 18 Dynamic DNS Setup 18 2 Configuring Dynamic DNS To change your ZyXEL Device s DDNS click Advanced gt Dynamic DNS The screen appears as shown See Section 18 1 on page 237 for more information Figure 86 Advanced gt Dynamic DNS Dynamic DNS Setup Service Provider Dynamic DNS Type Host Name User Name Password I Active Dynamic DNS WWAN DynDNs ORG gt 1 to 255 characters 1 to 255 characters 1 to 63 characters Reset The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 68 Advanced gt Dynamic D
406. ver Server Address Enter the IP address or domain name of the SIP outbound proxy server P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 9 Voice Table 37 VoIP gt SIP gt SIP Service Provider Advanced LABEL DESCRIPTION Server Port Enter the SIP outbound proxy server s listening port if your VoIP service provider gave you one Otherwise keep the default value QoS Tag SIP TOS Priority Setting Enter the DSCP DiffServ Code Point number for SIP voice transmissions The ZyXEL Device creates Class of Service CoS priority tags with this number to voice traffic that it transmits RTP TOS Priority Setting Enter the DSCP DiffServ Code Point number for RTP voice transmissions The ZyXEL Device creates Class of Service CoS priority tags with this number to RTP traffic that it transmits Timer Setting Expiration Enter the number of seconds your SIP account is registered with the Duration SIP register server before it is deleted The ZyXEL Device automatically tries to re register your SIP account when one half of this time has passed The SIP register server might have a different expiration Register Re Enter the number of seconds the ZyXEL Device waits before it tries send timer again to register the SIP account if the first try failed or if there is no response Session Expires Enter the number of seconds the ZyXEL Device lets a SIP session remain idle without
407. ver Address ChangeMe SIP Server Port 5060 1025 65535 REGISTER Server Address Changeme REGISTER Server Port 5060 1025 65535 SIP Service Domain ChangeMe RTP Port Range Start Port 50000 1025 65535 End Port 65535 1025 65535 DTMF Mode DTMF Mode PCM bi Transport Type Transport Type UDP FAX Option G 711 Fax Passthrough T 38 Fax Relay Eye N P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 9 Voice ee a ae ae Outbound Proxy I Enable Server Address Server Port 1025 65535 QoS Tay SIP TOS Priority Setting fo 0 63 RTP TOS Priority Setting fo 0 63 Timer Setting Expiration Duration 3600 20 654534 second Register Re send timer 512 180 65535 second Session Expires 180 100 3600 second Min SE po 90 1800 second Dialing Interval Selection Dialing Interval Selection 3 gt Second Bound Interface Name Bound Interface Name MultiWAN I ipoe_1_1_1 I ipoe_211 Cancel Each field is described in the following table Table 37 VolP gt SIP gt SIP Service Provider Advanced LABEL DESCRIPTION General SIP Local Port Enter the ZyXEL Device s listening port number if your VolP service provider gave you one Otherwise keep the default value SIP Server Enter the IP address or domain name of the SIP server provided by Address your VolP service provider You can use up to 95 printable ASCII characters It does not matter whether the SIP server
408. vice s QoS related packet statistics 17 1 2 What You Need to Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read this chapter QoS versus Cos QoS is used to prioritize source to destination traffic flows All packets in the same flow are given the same priority CoS class of service is a way of managing traffic in a network by grouping similar types of traffic together and treating each type as a class You can use CoS to give different priorities to different packet types CoS technologies include IEEE 802 1p layer 2 tagging and DiffServ Differentiated Services or DS IEEE 802 1p tagging makes use of three bits in the packet header while DiffServ is a new protocol and defines a new DS field which replaces the eight bit ToS Type of Service field in the IP header Tagging and Marking In a QoS class you can configure whether to add or change the DSCP DiffServ Code Point value IEEE 802 1p priority level and VLAN ID number in a matched packet When the packet passes through a compatible network the networking device such as a backbone switch can provide specific treatment or service based on the tag or marker 17 2 The QoS General Screen Use this screen to enable or disable QoS and select to have the ZyXEL Device assign the allowable upstream bandwidth P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 17 Quality of Service QoS Click Advanced gt QoS gt General to open the screen as shown next Figure 80
409. wireless networks fi See full map i a Jo Change adapter settings F TW PC ZyXEL com Internet Change advanced sharing This computer settings i A 98 View your active networks Connect or disconnect ZyXEL com Access type Internet Work network Connections Local Area Connection 4 Double click Local Area Connection and then select Properties Figure 134 Windows 7 Local Area Connection Status GO gt Control Panel Network and Internet Network Connections gt Organize v Disable this network device Diagnose this connection Rename this Local Area Connection Buu Wireless Network Connection Unidentified network ee ZyXEL RT 1 4 MI Broadcom NetXtreme Gigabit Eth ill 802 11n USB Adapter a eel a 7 ae tir Pres i ote A 4 Local Area Connection Status x General Connection IPv4 Connectivity No network access IPv6 Connectivity No network access Media State Enabled Duration 00 04 36 Speed 100 0 Mbps Details Activity Sent Be Received 2g a Packets 432 0 Disable Diagnose Close Note During this procedure click Continue whenever Windows displays a screen saying that it needs your permission to continue P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 5 Select Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP I Pv4 and then select Properties Figure 135 Windows 7 Local Area Connection Properties Network
410. work address www zyxel com support files the domain name is www zyxel com DHCP DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol is a method of allocating IP addresses to devices on a network from a DHCP Server Often your ISP or a router on your network performs this function LAN A LAN local area network is typically a network which covers a small area made up of computers and other devices which share resources such as Internet access and printers P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 20 System 20 2 The System General Screen Use the General screen to configure system settings such as the system and domain name inactivity timeout interval and system password The Host Name is for identification purposes However because some SPs check this name you should enter your computer s Computer Name Find the system name of your Windows computer In Windows XP click start My Computer View system information and then click the Computer Name tab Note the entry in the Full computer name field and enter it as the ZyXEL Device System Name Click Maintenance gt System to open the General screen Figure 88 Maintenance gt System gt General System Setup Host Name Domain Name Administrator Inactivity Timer 0 minutes 0 means no timeout P 2612HNU F1 P 2612HNU F1 Goan The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 70 Maintenance gt System gt General LA
411. x B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address tab The Interface Statistics column shows data if your connection is working properly Figure 155 Ubuntu 8 Network Tools Devices Network ooe n n Pay x Tool Edit Help Devices Ping Netstat Traceroute Port Scan Lookup Finger Whois RAEN ST os 9 configure IP Information Protocol IP Address Netmask Prefix Broadcast Scope IPv4 10 0 2 15 255 255 255 0 10 0 2 255 IPv6 fe80 a00 27ff fe30 e16c 64 Link Interface Information Interface Statistics Hardware address 08 00 27 30 e1 6c eeeeytes 684 6 KiB Multicast Enabled Transmitted packets 1425 MTU 1500 Transmission errors 0 Link speed not available Received bytes 219 5 KiB State Active Received packets 1426 Reception errors 0 Collisions 0 Linux openSUSE 10 3 KDE This section shows you how to configure your computer s TCP IP settings in the K Desktop Environment KDE using the openSUSE 10 3 Linux distribution The procedure screens and file locations may vary depending on your specific distribution release version and individual configuration The following screens use the default openSUSE 10 3 installation Note Make sure you are logged in as the root administrator Follow the steps below to configure your computer IP address in the KDE P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address
412. y detect and install my Plug and Play printer Ov A network printer or a printer attached to another computer i To set up a network printer that is not attached to a print server J use the Local printer option 4 Select Create a new port and Standard TCP IP Port Click Next Add Printer Wizard Select a Printer Port Computers communicate with printers through ports Select the port you want your printer to use If the port is not listed you can create a new port O Use the following port Create a new port pio Type of port Standard TCP IP Port P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorial 5 Add Standard TCP IP Printer Port Wizard window opens up Click Next to start configuring the printer port Add Standard TCP IP Printer Port Wizard Welcome to the Add Standard TCP IP Printer Port Wizard You use this wizard to add a port for a network printer Before continuing be sure that 1 The device is tumed on 2 The network is connected and configured To continue click Next Cancel 6 Enter the IP address of the ZyXEL Device to which the printer is connected in the Printer Name or IP Address field In our example we use the default IP address of the ZyXEL Device 192 168 1 1 The Port Name field updates automatically to reflect the IP address of the port Click Next Note The computer from which you are configuring the TCP IP printer port must be on the same LAN in order to use the
413. y machine on the Internet must have a unique address If your networks are isolated from the Internet for example only between your two branch offices you can assign any IP addresses to the hosts without problems However the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority IANA has reserved the following three blocks of IP addresses specifically for private networks e 10 0 0 0 10 255 255 255 e 172 16 0 0 172 31 255 255 e 192 168 0 0 192 168 255 255 You can obtain your IP address from the IANA from an ISP or it can be assigned from a private network If you belong to a small organization and your Internet access is through an ISP the ISP can provide you with the Internet addresses for your local networks On the other hand if you are part of a much larger P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide 1 27 Chapter 6 LAN Setup organization you should consult your network administrator for the appropriate IP addresses Note Regardless of your particular situation do not create an arbitrary IP address always follow the guidelines above For more information on address assignment please refer to RFC 1597 Address Allocation for Private Internets and RFC 1466 Guidelines for Management of IP Address Space P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Wireless LAN 7 1 Overview This chapter describes the ZyXEL Device s Network gt Wireless LAN screens Use these screens to set up your ZyXEL Device s wireless connection The blue c
414. yXEL Device You also need to set up file sharing on your ZyXEL Device in order to share files P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorial 1 Go to USB Services gt File Sharing gt Share Configuration to enable file sharing and enter a workgroup name Click Apply to save your settings Share Configuration File Sharing oz File Sharing Services SMB Server Configuration HostName P 2612HNU F3 Workgroup Name Workgroup Apply Cancel 2 This sets up the file sharing server You can see the USB storage device listed in the table below Share Configuration File Sharing M Enable File Sharing Services SMB Server Configuration Host Name P 2612HNU F3 Workgroup Name Workgroup Share Directory List Add Share Name SharePath Share Description ZyXEL ZyXEL ZyXEL Celebrating Two Decades Apply Cancel 3 6 2 Access Your Shared Files From a Computer You can use Windows Explorer to access the file storage devices connected to the ZyXEL Device Note The examples in this User s Guide show you how to use Microsoft s Windows XP to browse your shared files Refer to your operating system s documentation for how to browse your file structure Open Windows Explorer to access Bob s Share using Windows Explorer browser P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide st Chapter 3 Tutorial 1 In Windows Explorer s Address bar type a double backslas
415. ys what DHCP services the ZyXEL Device is providing to the LAN Choices are Server The ZyXEL Device is a DHCP server in the LAN It assigns IP addresses to other computers in the LAN Relay The ZyXEL Device acts as a surrogate DHCP server and relays DHCP requests and responses between the remote server and the clients None The ZyXEL Device is not providing any DHCP services to the LAN Click this to go to the screen where you can change it WLAN Information Channel This is the channel number used by the ZyXEL Device now Security This displays the type of security mode the ZyXEL Device is using in the wireless LAN WPS Status Configured displays when a wireless client has connected to the ZyXEL Device or WPS is enabled and wireless or wireless security settings have been configured Unconfigured displays if WPS is disabled or wireless security settings have not been configured SSID 1 4 Information SSID This is the descriptive name used to identify the ZyXEL Device in the wireless LAN Click this to go to the screen where you can change it Status This shows whether or not the SSID is enabled on Security This displays the type of security the ZyXEL Device is using in the Mode wireless LAN System Status System This field displays how long the ZyXEL Device has been running since it Uptime last started up The ZyXEL Device starts up when you plug it in when you restart it M
416. zation vector IV 355 Integrated Access Device see IAD intended audience 3 Internet access 22 Internet Assigned Numbers Authority See IANA Internet Assigned Numbers Authority see IANA Internet Control Message Protocol see ICMP Internet Service Provider see ISP IP address 87 127 default 27 WAN 98 IP Address Assignment 117 IP multicasting 282 IP pool 124 IP pool setup 126 ISP 98 iTunes server 193 ITU T 165 ITU T G 992 1 267 J jitter buffer 284 P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Index L LAN 121 and USB printer 196 LAN TCP IP 126 listening port 163 Local Area Network see LAN logout 28 automatic 28 logs 247 MAC 86 124 201 MAC address filtering 201 MAC filter 201 managing the device command interface 24 good habits 24 Telnet 24 using FTP See FTP Maximum Burst Size MBS 103 115 Media access control 201 Media Access Control see MAC Media Access Control see MAC Address media server 193 activation 194 iTunes server 193 Message Integrity Check see MIC MIC 355 model name 86 MTU Multi Tenant Unit 117 multicast 118 multimedia 172 multiple PVC support 281 multiple SIP accounts 284 multiple voice channels 284 multiplexing 115 LLC based 115 VC based 115 multiprotocol encapsulation 114 N NAT 127 151 301 definitions 154 external port 152 how it works 155 internal port 152 what it does 155 Network Address Translation see NAT non proxy calls 170
417. zyxel com or the URL of any other web site in the address bar and press ENTER If you are able to access the web site your new profile is successfully configured If you cannot access the Internet go back to the Profile screen select the profile you are using and click Edit Check the details you entered previously Also refer to the Troubleshooting section of this User s Guide or contact your network administrator if necessary P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorial 3 4 Setting Up NAT Port Forwarding Thomas manages the Doom server on a computer behind the ZyXEL Device In order for players on the Internet like A in the figure below to communicate with the Doom server Thomas needs to configure the port settings and IP address on the ZyXEL Device Traffic should be forwarded to the port 666 of the Doom server computer which has an IP address of 192 168 1 34 D 192 168 1 34 LAN WAN W port 666 Thomas may set up the port settings by configuring the port settings for the Doom server computer see Section 8 1 2 on page 149 for more information 1 Click Network gt NAT to open the Port Forwarding screen Enter the following values Service Name Select User Defined WAN Interface Select the WAN interface through which the Doom service is forwarded This is the default interface for this example which is ipoe_1_1_1 Server IP Address Enter the IP address of the Doom server This is 192 168 1 34 f

ZyXEL p-2612HNU-FX User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents